This site uses cookies.
Some of these cookies are essential to the operation of the site,
while others help to improve your experience by providing insights into how the site is being used.
For more information, please see the ProZ.com privacy policy.
VIA AILooking for an interpreter?
Remoto by ProZ.com connects you with an identity-verified interpreter by video or phone in about 60 seconds — 300+ languages, on demand or booked ahead.
Try Remoto »
Sep 23, 2022 (posted viaProZ.com): From March 2022 to July 2022, I translated 11 projects for Inlingua Boston (www.inlinguabostonma.com) with a total amount of US$685.00. The response emails to payment are always as the followings
Dear XXX
Please accept our apologies. We have been having problems with our accounting company and recently have changed everything. You will receive the outstanding balance payment next Friday, our payroll date.
But Inlingua Boston (www.inlinguabostonma.com) never pays.
...more »
This person has a SecurePRO™ card. Because this person is not a ProZ.com Plus subscriber, to view his or her SecurePRO™ card you must be a ProZ.com Business member or Plus subscriber.
所属
This person is not affiliated with any business or Blue Board record at ProZ.com.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Comparison of the inventions General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 나. 구성의 대비
1) 청구항 1 발명
청구항 1 발명은 인용발명 1에서 (그림 2C，0092, 0152, 0203) device 210D(출원발명의 휴대단말기에 대응〉, access point(출원발명의 기지국에 대응), 공격 시그너쳐가 탐지되었다면, 침입탐지시스템은 관리자(administrator로 출원발명의 유지보수 서버에 대응)에게 alert를 전송한다는 점, 인용발명 2에서 (column 2의 line 18-20, 26-28, 51-55) 특정 서비스와 관련된 비정상 트래픽의 검출은 IPS device에 의해 미래에 조사가 요구되어지는 테이블/리스트에 추가되어진다는 점, 스위치는 조사가 필요한 트래픽을 (DPI 기능을 가진) IPS로 리다이 렉트한다는 점, IPS가 해당 트래픽을 조사한다는 점, 인용발명 3에서 (그림 1, 3페이지의 column 1) 3G 이동통신망에서 DPI 기능을 가진 게이트웨이를 이용한다는 점으로부터 이 기술분야에 속한 통상의 기술자(이하, ‘통상의 기술자’)가 용이하게 도출할 수 있습니다.
2) 청구항 2-3 발명
청구항 2-3 발명에 부가된 구성은 인용발명 4에서 (청구항 1) 원바이러스를 발생시키는 근원지 정보를 검출하여, 검출된 근원지 네트워크 인터페이스를 비사용 상태로 전환한다는 점, 인용발명 5에서 (0008, 0031) 액세스포인트는 무선 네트워크로의 액세스를 요청하는 하나 이상의 모바일 디바이스들에 할당하기 위해 네트워크 컨트를러로부터 데이터 채널 리소스들을 수신할 수 있다는 점, 액세스 포인트는 로딩, 간섭, 모바일 디바이스 타입, 이용 가능한 리소스들 등에 기반하여 복수의 모바일 디바이스들에 리소스들을 허가 또는 거부할 수 있다는 점, 기지국은 모바일 디바이스들의 요청을 초기 스케줄링하지 않으면서 기지국으로부터 E-DCH/EUL 리소스들을 요청하게 하는 랜덤 액세스 채널(RACH)을 구현할 수 있다는 점, 모바일 디바이스들로부터 RACH를 통한 요청을 수신시, 기지국은 요청을 허가 또는 거부할 수 있다는 점, 휴대 단말기에 업링크 리소스를 할당하지 않는 경우 이를 휴대단말기에 송신하는 것은 단순 설계 변경 사항에 불과하다는 점으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있습니다.
翻訳 - 英語 B. Comparison of the inventions
1) The invention of claim 1
According to the cited invention 1 (Figure 2C, 0092, 0152, and 0203), when an attack signal targeting a device 210D (corresponding to the portable terminal in the present invention) and an access point (corresponding to the base station in the present invention) is detected, the intrusion monitoring system sends an alert to the administrator (corresponding to the maintenance server in the present invention). According to the cited invention 2 (lines 18 to 20, 26 to 28, and 51 to 55 in column 2), detection of service-specific anomalous traffic is added through an IPS device to a table/list that will be investigated in the future; a switch, by an IPS (with the DPI function), redirects the traffic that will be investigated; the IPS investigates the traffic. According to the cited invention 3 (Figure 1, column 1 on page 3), a gateway having the DPI function is used in a 3G mobile communication network. Therefore, with the above disclosure, those of ordinary skill in the art can easily achieve the invention according to claim 1.
2) The invention of claims 2 and 3
According to the cited invention 4 (claim 1), by detecting the information about the origin which spreads worm viruses, the network interface of the detected origin is changed into an unusable state. According to the cited invention 5 (0008 and 0031), in order to allocate access points to more than one mobile device requesting access to a wireless network, data channel resources can be collected by a network controller; the access points allow or refuse resources to a plurality of mobile devices depending on the uploading, interference and mobile device types, available resources, etc.; a base station does not need to perform initial scheduling for the requests from the mobile devices and can implement a random access channel (RACH) requesting the base station for an E-DCH/EUL resource; on receiving a request sent by a mobile device through an RACH, the base station may allow or reject the request; if an uplink resource is not allocated to a mobile terminal, then transmitting it to the mobile terminal is only a simple design change. Therefore, with the above disclosure, those of ordinary skill in the art can easily achieve in the invention of claims 2 and 3.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Korean into English General Patent General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: IT(情報テクノロジー)
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 인용발명 4 ： 공개특허공보 제 10-2006-0007292호(2006.01.24.)
인용발명 5 ： 공개특허공보 제 10-2010-0127837호(2010.12.06.)
가. 출원발명 및 인용발명
이 출원발명은 이동통신 네트워크에서의 사이버 공격 대처 방법에 관한 것입니다.
인용발명 1은 대역폭 제한을 가진 적응형 모니터링 방법에 관한 것입니다.
인용발명 2는 네트워크 조건에 기초한 서비스에 관한 것입니다.
인용발명 3은 3G 네트워크에서의 DPI 구현에 관한 것입니다.
인용발명 4는 네트워크에서의 원바이러스 탐지/차단 방법에 관한 것입니다.
인용발명 5는 기지국의 채널 리소스 사용 방법에 관한 것입니다.
나. 구성의 대비
1) 청구항 1 발명
청구항 1 발명은 인용발명 1에서 (그림 2C，0092, 0152, 0203) device 210D(출원발명의 휴대단말기에 대응〉, access point(출원발명의 기지국에 대응), 공격 시그너쳐가 탐지되었다면, 침입탐지시스템은 관리자(administrator로 출원발명의 유지보수 서버에 대응)에게 alert를 전송한다는 점, 인용발명 2에서 (column 2의 line 18-20, 26-28, 51-55) 특정 서비스와 관련된 비정상 트래픽의 검출은 IPS device에 의해 미래에 조사가 요구되어지는 테이블/리스트에 추가되어진다는 점, 스위치는 조사가 필요한 트래픽을 (DPI 기능을 가진) IPS로 리다이 렉트한다는 점, IPS가 해당 트래픽을 조사한다는 점, 인용발명 3에서 (그림 1, 3페이지의 column 1) 3G 이동통신망에서 DPI 기능을 가진 게이트웨이를 이용한다는 점으로부터 이 기술분야에 속한 통상의 기술자(이하, ‘통상의 기술자’)가 용이하게 도출할 수 있습니다.
2) 청구항 2-3 발명
청구항 2-3 발명에 부가된 구성은 인용발명 4에서 (청구항 1) 원바이러스를 발생시키는 근원지 정보를 검출하여, 검출된 근원지 네트워크 인터페이스를 비사용 상태로 전환한다는 점, 인용발명 5에서 (0008, 0031) 액세스포인트는 무선 네트워크로의 액세스를 요청하는 하나 이상의 모바일 디바이스들에 할당하기 위해 네트워크 컨트를러로부터 데이터 채널 리소스들을 수신할 수 있다는 점, 액세스 포인트는 로딩, 간섭, 모바일 디바이스 타입, 이용 가능한 리소스들 등에 기반하여 복수의 모바일 디바이스들에 리소스들을 허가 또는 거부할 수 있다는 점, 기지국은 모바일 디바이스들의 요청을 초기 스케줄링하지 않으면서 기지국으로부터 E-DCH/EUL 리소스들을 요청하게 하는 랜덤 액세스 채널(RACH)을 구현할 수 있다는 점, 모바일 디바이스들로부터 RACH를 통한 요청을 수신시, 기지국은 요청을 허가 또는 거부할 수 있다는 점, 휴대 단말기에 업링크 리소스를 할당하지 않는 경우 이를 휴대단말기에 송신하는 것은 단순 설계 변경 사항에 불과하다는 점으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있습니다.
翻訳 - 英語
Cited invention 4: Official Gazette for Patents No. 10-2006-0007292 (2006.01.24)
Cited invention 5: Official Gazette for Patents No. 10-2010-0127837 (2010.12.06)
A. Present invention and cited inventions
The present invention relates to a countermeasure against cyber-attacks in a mobile communication network.
Cited invention 1 relates to an adaptive monitoring method with bandwidth limitations.
Cited invention 2 relates to a service based on network conditions.
Cited invention 3 relates to DPI implementation in a 3G network.
Cited invention 4 relates to a method of worm virus monitoring/blocking in a network.
Cited invention 5 relates to a method of using channel resources of a base station.
B. Comparison of the inventions
1) The invention of claim 1
According to the cited invention 1 (Figure 2C, 0092, 0152, and 0203), when an attack signal targeting a device 210D (corresponding to the portable terminal in the present invention) and an access point (corresponding to the base station in the present invention) is detected, the intrusion monitoring system sends an alert to the administrator (corresponding to the maintenance server in the present invention). According to the cited invention 2 (lines 18 to 20, 26 to 28, and 51 to 55 in column 2), detection of service-specific anomalous traffic is added through an IPS device to a table/list that will be investigated in the future; a switch, by an IPS (with the DPI function), redirects the traffic that will be investigated; the IPS investigates the traffic. According to the cited invention 3 (Figure 1, column 1 on page 3), a gateway having the DPI function is used in a 3G mobile communication network. Therefore, with the above disclosure, those of ordinary skill in the art can easily achieve the invention according to claim 1.
2) The invention of claims 2 and 3
According to the cited invention 4 (claim 1), by detecting the information about the origin which spreads worm viruses, the network interface of the detected origin is changed into an unusable state. According to the cited invention 5 (0008 and 0031), in order to allocate access points to more than one mobile device requesting access to a wireless network, data channel resources can be collected by a network controller; the access points allow or refuse resources to a plurality of mobile devices depending on the uploading, interference and mobile device types, available resources, etc.; a base station does not need to perform initial scheduling for the requests from the mobile devices and can implement a random access channel (RACH) requesting the base station for an E-DCH/EUL resource; on receiving a request sent by a mobile device through an RACH, the base station may allow or reject the request; if an uplink resource is not allocated to a mobile terminal, then transmitting it to the mobile terminal is only a simple design change. Therefore, with the above disclosure, those of ordinary skill in the art can easily achieve in the invention of claims 2 and 3.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Written Opinion of the International Searching Authority General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 機械工学
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 1. 신규성 및 진보성
1.1 독립항: 청구항 제1항
청구항 제1항에 기재된 발명과 근접한 인용문헌 이에는 유입유로(834)를 가진 스풀몸체 (832) 및 배출유로 (814) 를 갖춘 밸브몸체 (810); 배출유로 (814) 와 연통하는 제1위치 및 배 출유로 (814) 와 연통 해제하는 제2위치 사이에서 왕복 이동하는 밸브스풀 (830); 및 밸브몸 체 (810) 와 밸브스풀 (830) 사이 의 틈새 (이로 유동되는 유압유를 교축하는 교축 작용부 (870) 를 포함하는 유압 액추에이터용 공기배출장치가 제시되어 있습니다(단락 [0060]-[0062], [0065] 및 도 4-6 참조) .
다만, 청구항 제1항은 인출입유로가 밸브몸체에 형성되는 점 (이하 차이점 1) 및 밸브스 풀이 구체라는 점 (이하 차이점2) 에서 인용문헌 이과 차이가 있습니다. 그러나 상기 차이 점1은 유체의 종류 및 특성 등을 고려하여 통상의 기술자가 적절히 변경할 수 있는 사항 이며, 상기 차이점2는 인용문헌 D2에 후방 체크 밸브기구를 구성하는 강구 (45) 로 기재되 어 있습니다(단락 [0016], [0017] 및 도 2 참조) . 또한 인용문헌 D1 및 D2는 기술 분야가 동일하고 위 구성요소들을 결합함에 있어 결합 전 구성요소들의 핵심적인 부분들을 변경 한다거나 새로운 기술적 사상이 필요한 것으로 볼 수도 없습니다. 따라서 청구항 제1항은 인용문헌 D1 및 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2 종속항: 청구항 제2항 내지 제14항
1.2.1 청구항 제2항
청구항 제2항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 제1배출유로 (814a) 및 제2배출유로 (814b) 와 동일합니다 (단락 [0060] 및 도 4, 6 참조). 따라서 청구항 제2항은 인용문헌 D1 및 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다 (PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.2 청구항 제3항 및 제5항
청구항 제3항에 기재된 발명은 교축 작용부가 유압유와 공기가 배출되는 제1배출유로의 상류측의 밸브몸체 영역에 노치 가공에 의해 틈새로 형성되어, 제1배출유로로 배출되는 유압유를 교축 작용하는 점에서 상기 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 발명과 차이가 있으며, 상기 차이 점은 인용문헌 D2 내지 D5에도 기 재되어 있지 않으며, 통상의 기술자에게도 자명하지 않습니다. 따라서 청구항 제3항은 신규성과 진보성이 있습니다 (PCT 제33조(2) 및 (3)).
청구항 제5항은 청구항 제3항의 종속항이므로 신규성 및 진보성이 있습니다 (PCT 제33조 (2) 및 (3)).
1.2.3 청구항 제4항 및 제6항 내지 제8항
청구항 제4항에 기재된 발명은 교축 작용부가, 유압유와 공기가 배출되는 제1배출유로 의 상류 측의 밸브몸체 영역에 노치 가공에 의해 제1틈새로 형성되어, 제1틈새로 유동되 는 유압유와 공기를 교축 작용하는 제1교축 작용부와; 제2배출유로에 구체의 밸브스풀의 왕복 이동 방향을 따라 복수 개로 함몰된 제2틈새로 형성되어, 제2틈새로 유동되는 유압 유를 교축 작용하는 제2교축 작용부를 포함하는 점에서 상기 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 발명 과 차이가 있으며, 상기 차이점은 인용문헌 D2 내지 D5에도 기재되어 있지 않으며, 통상 의 기 술자에게도 자명 하지 않습니 다. 따라서 청 구항 제4항은 신규성 과 진보성 이 있습니 다 (PCT 제33조(2) 및 (3)).
청구항 제6항 내지 제8항은 청구항 제4항의 종속항이므로 신규성 및 진보성이 있습니다 (PCT 제33조(2) 및 (3)).
1.2.4 청구항 제9항
청구항 제9항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 밸브몸체가, 유압유가 인출입되는 인출입유로 가 형성되는 제1밸브몸체와, 제1밸브몸체에 연결되며, 제1배출유로 및 제2배출유로가 형 성되고 구체의 밸브스풀을 수용하는 수용부가 형성되는 제2밸브몸체를 포함하는 것이나, 이는 인용문헌 D2에 기 재된 밸브본체 홀더 (41)와 스트링 (42)으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용 이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다(단락 [0016] 및 도 2 참조). 따라서 청구항 제9항은 인 용문헌 D1 및 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.5 청구항 제10항
청구항 제10항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 D2에 기재된 단차부(41a)를 포함하 는 구성과 동일합니다(도 2 참조). 따라서 청구항 제10항은 인용문헌 D1 및 D2에 의해 자 명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.6 청구항 제11항
청구항 제11항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 제2배출유로가 구체의 밸브스풀의 제1위치와 제2위치 사이에서의 왕복 이동 방향을 따라 제2밸브몸체에 함몰 형성되는 것이나, 이는 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 제1배출유로(814a)가 밸브스풀(830)의 제1위치와 제2위치 사이에서 왕복 이동 방향을 따라 밸브몸체에 함몰 형성되는 구성으로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하 게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다(도 4, 6 참조). 따라서 청구항 제11항은 인용문헌 D1 및 D2 에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.7 청구항 제12항
청구항 제12항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 인용문헌 D1의 기재된 밸브 탄성부재(850)와 동일합니다(단락 [0064] 및 도 4 참조). 따라서 청구항 제12항은 인용문헌 D1 및 D2에 의 해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.8 청구항 제13항
청구항 제13항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 공기배출용 밸브 조립체가, 구체의 밸브스풀 과 탄성부재 사이에 배치되어, 구체의 밸브스풀이 인출입유로로 유입된 유압유에 의해 제1배출유로로 이동될 때 구체의 밸브스풀에 제공된 유압력을 탄성부재에 제공하고 밸브몸 체 내부로부터 인출입유로로 유압유가 배출될 때 탄성부재의 탄성력을 구체의 밸브스풀에 제공하는 매개부재를 더 포함하는 것이나, 이는 인용문헌 D3에 기재된 밸브스풀(30)의 상 단에 구비된 고정체(32)로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다(단락 [0032] 및 도 7 참조). 또한 인용문헌 D1 내지 D3는 기술 분야가 동일하고 위 구성요소들 을 결합함에 있어 결합 전 구성요소들의 핵심적인 부분들을 변경한다거나 새로운 기술적 사상이 필요한 것으로 볼 수도 없습니다. 따라서 청구항 제13항은 인용문헌 D1 내지 D3에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.2.9 청구항 제14항
청구항 제14항에 기재된 부가적인 특징은 매개부재가 구체의 밸브스풀과 탄성부재 대비 낮은 경도를 갖는 것이나, 이는 통상의 기술자가 상황에 따라 적절히 선텍하여 실시 가능 한 사항입니다. 따라서 청구항 제14항은 인용문헌 D1 내지 D3에 의해 자명하므로 진보성 이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
1.3 독립항: 청구항 제15항
청구항 제15항에 기재된 발명과 근접한 인용문헌 이에는 피스톤(200), 및 피스톤(200) 을 수용하고 유압유를 수용 및 배출하는 공간이 형성되는 실린더 (100)를 포함하는 발전소 용 유압 액추에이터가 제시되어 있습니다(단락 [0040]-[0043] 및 도 1 참조).
다만, 청구항 제15항은 피스톤의 왕복 이동 방향을 따라 피스톤에 배치되어, 실린더에 인입되는 공기와 유압유를 배출시키는 제1항의 공기배출용 밸브 조립체를 포함하는 점에 서 인용문헌 이과 차이가 있지만, 상기 차이는 인용문헌 D1 및 D2로부터 통상의 기술자가 용이하게 도출할 수 있는 것입니다(견해서 단락 1.1 참조). 따라서 청구항 제15항은 인용 문헌 D1 및 D2에 의해 자명하므로 진보성이 없습니다(PCT 제33조(3)).
(비 고: 본 견해서는 청구항 제15항이 청구항 제1항을 인용하는 것으로 가정하고 작성되 었습니다.)
2. 산업상 이용가능성
청구항 제1항 내지 제15항에 기재된 발명은 산업상 이용가능합니다(PCT 제33조 (4)).
翻訳 - 英語 1. Novelty and Inventive Step
1.1 Independent Claim: Claim 1
The cited document D1, which closely relates to the invention as claimed in claim 1, discloses an exhaust device for a hydraulic actuator, which comprises a spool body (832) having an inflow path (834) and a valve body (810) having a discharge path (814); a valve spool (830) moving back and forth between the first position connecting the discharge path (814) and the second position blocking the discharge path (814); and a throttling portion (870) which throttles the hydraulic oil flowing in the gap (G) between the valve body (810) and the valve spool (830) (see Paragraphs [0060] to [0062], and [0065], and Figures 4 to 6).
Now, according to claim 1, the inflow/outflow paths are formed on the valve body (referred to as difference 1 hereinafter) and the valve spool is a ball (referred to as difference 2 hereinafter). These two points are different from the cited patents. Said difference 1 is something which those skilled in the art can appropriately change and implement according to the type and properties of the fluid, and as for said difference 2, a steel ball (45) of the rear check valve apparatus has been disclosed in document D2 (see Paragraphs [0016] and [0017] and Figure 2). In addition, documents D1 and D2 belong to the same technical field, and no change is required of the original core components and no new technical idea is needed when constructing the above-mentioned structure. Consequently, the invention as set forth in claim 1 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2 Dependent Claims: Claim 2 through Claim 14
1.2.1 Claim 2
The additional characteristic described in claim 2 is essentially the same as the first discharge path (814a) and the second discharge path (814b) disclosed in document D1 (see Paragraph [0060] and Figures 4 and 6). Consequently, the invention as set forth in claim 2 can easily be implemented according to Documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.2 Claims 3 and 5
According to the invention described in claim 3, the throttling portion is formed by notching the valve body area to become a gap at the upstream side of the first discharge path discharging the hydraulic oil and air, and thus can throttle the hydraulic oil discharged from the first discharge path. This point is different from the invention disclosed in document D1 and said difference is not disclosed in documents D2 to D5 and is not obvious to those skilled in the art. Consequently, claim 3 has novelty and an inventive step (PCT Article 33 (2) and (3)).
Claim 5 is dependent on claim 3, and thus has novelty and an inventive step (PCT Article 33 (2) and (3)).
1.2.3 Claim 4 and Claim 6 through Claim 8
According to the invention described in claim 4, the throttling portion comprises a first throttling portion which is formed by notching the valve body area to become a first gap at the upstream side of the first discharge path discharging the hydraulic oil and air and can throttle the hydraulic oil and air flowing in the first gap; and a second throttling portion which is formed to become a second gap with a plurality of dents in the back-and-forth movement direction of the ball valve spool in the second discharge path and can throttle the hydraulic oil flowing in the second gap. This point is different from the invention disclosed in document D1, and said difference is not mentioned in documents D2 to D5 and is not obvious to those skilled in the art. Consequently, claim 4 has novelty and an inventive step (PCT Article 33 (2) and (3)).
Claims 6 to 8 are dependent on claim 4, and thus have novelty and an inventive step (PCT Article 33 (2) and (3)).
1.2.4 Claim 9
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 9, the valve body comprises a first valve body where inflow/outflow paths which the hydraulic oil flows into/out of are formed; and a second valve body which is connected to the first valve body and where a first discharge path and a second discharge path are formed and an accommodation portion accommodating the ball valve spool is formed. Those skilled in the art can easily realize this structure according to the holder (41) and the string (42) disclosed in document D2 (see Paragraph [0016] and Figure 2). Consequently, the invention described in claim 9 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.5 Claim 10
The additional characteristic described in claim 10 is essentially the same as the structure comprising a blocking portion (41a) in Document 2 (see Figure 2). Consequently, the invention described in claim 10 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.6 Claim 11
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 11, the second discharge path is formed by denting the second valve body in the back-and-forth movement direction between the first position and the second position of the ball valve spool and is the same as the structure of the first discharge path (814a) formed by denting the valve body in the back-and-forth movement direction between the first position and the second position of the valve spool (830) as disclosed in document D1. Those skilled in the art can easily realize this structure (see Figures 4 and 6). Consequently, the invention described in claim 11 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.7 Claim 12
The additional characteristic described in claim 12 is essentially the same as the structure of the elastic component (850) as disclosed in document 1 (see Paragraph [0064] and Figure 4). Consequently, the invention described in claim 12 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.8 Claim 13
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 13, the exhaust valve assembly further comprises a medium component, which is arranged between the ball valve spool and the elastic component and supplies the hydraulic pressure supplied to the ball value spool further to the elastic component when the ball valve spool moves to the first discharge path with the aid of the hydraulic oil flowing into the inflow/outflow paths and supplies the elastic force of the elastic component to the ball valve spool when the hydraulic oil is charged from inside the valve body to the inflow/outflow path. However, those skilled in the art can easily realize this structure according to the fixing body (32) arranged at the top of the valve spool (30) as disclosed in document D3 (see Paragraph [0032] and Figure 7). In addition, documents D1 to D3 belong to the same technical field, and no change of the original core components is required, and no new technical idea is needed when constructing the above-mentioned structural elements. Consequently, the invention as set forth in claim 13 can easily be implemented according to documents D1 to D3 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.2.9 Claim 14
According to the additional characteristic described in claim 14, the hardness of the medium component is much lower than the hardness of the ball valve spool or the elastic component, and this characteristic is something which those skilled in the art can properly select and implement according to the situation. Consequently, the invention described in claim 14 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 to D3 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
1.3 Independent Claim: Claim 15
The document D1, which closely relates to the invention described in claim 15, discloses a hydraulic actuator for a power plant which comprises a piston (200) and a cylinder (100) accommodating the piston (200) and forming a space to accommodate and discharge the hydraulic oil (see Paragraphs [0040] to [0043] and Figure 1).
Now, according to claim 15, the exhaust valve assembly of claim 1 is arranged on the piston in the back-and-forth movement direction of the piston to discharge the air and hydraulic oil flowing into the cylinder. This point is different from the reference documents. The difference can be easily implemented by those skilled in the art according to documents D1 and D2 (see Paragraph 1.1 in the opinion). Consequently, the invention described in claim 15 can be easily implemented according to documents D1 and D2 and thus lacks an inventive step (PCT Article 33(3)).
(Remarks: The inference from claim 1 is cited in this opinion for claim 15.)
2. Industrial Applicability
The invention described in claims 1 to 15 is industrially applicable (PCT Article 33 (4)).
朝鮮語 から 英語: Preparation method of mutant strains with high phytoene production capacity and the mutant strains prepared by the method General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 청구범위
[청구항 1] 1) 제1 선택마커를 포함하는 lox 핵산 단편의 양 말단에 DR0861 유전자의 상부 및 하부 단편이 각각 융합된 DNA 구조체를 데이노코쿠스 속 균주에 도입하여 DR0861 유전자를 결실시키는 단계;
2) 상기 단계 1)의 DR0861 유전자가 결실된 균주에 groE 프로모터, cre 재조합 효소를 코딩하는 유전자, 제2 선택마커 및 온도 감수성 repUts를 포함하는 벡터를 도입하여 제1 선택마커를 결실시키는 단계; 및
3) 상기 단계 2)에서 수득된 변이 균주를 배양하여 제2 선택마커를 포함하는 벡터를 제거하는 단계를 포함하는, cre-lox 시스템을 이용한 DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 2] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 DR0861 유전자가 서열번호 22의 염기서열로 구성되는 폴리뉴클레오티드인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 3] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 단계 3)의 배양이 30 내지 40℃의 온도에서 수행되는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 4] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 데이노코쿠스 속 균주가 데이노코쿠스 라디오두란스인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 5] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 DR0861 유전자의 상부 및 하부 단편이 0.5 내지 1.2 kb의 길이를 갖는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 6] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 lox 핵산 단편이 lox71 및 lox66으로 구성된 군으로부터 선택되는 어느 하나 이상의 lox 유전자를 단편의 양 말단에 포함하는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 7] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 lox 핵산 단편이 서열번호 17의 염기서열로 구성되는 폴리뉴클레오티드인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 8] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 groE 프로모터가 서열번호 19의 염기서열로 구성되는 폴리뉴클레오티드인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 9] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 제1 및 제2 선택마커가 항생제 내성 유전자인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 10] 제9항에 있어서, 상기 항생제 내성 유전자가 카나마이신, 클로람페니콜, 스펙티노마이신 및 스트렙토마이신으로 구성된 군으로부터 선택되는 어느 하나 이상인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 11] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 제1 선택마커가 cre 재조합 효소의 발현에 의해 제거되는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 12] 제1항에 있어서, 상기 단계 2)의 벡터가 서열번호 21의 염기서열로 구성되는 폴리뉴클레오티드인, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 13] 제1항에 있어서, DR0862, DR1087, DR1395 및 DR1475로 구성된 군으로부터 선택되는 어느 하나 이상의 유전자를 각각 발현하는 플라스미드를 도입하는 단계를 추가로 포함하는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 14] 제13항이 있어서, DR0862 및 DR1475 유전자를 각각 발현하는 플라스미드를 모두 도입하는 단계를 추가로 포함하는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 15] 제1항, 제13항 및 제14항 중 어느 한 항에 있어서, DR2250 유전자를 결실시키는 단계를 추가로 포함하는, DR0861 유전자가 결실된 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주의 제조방법.
[청구항 16] 제1항의 방법으로 제조된 DR0861 유전자가 결실된 파이토엔 생산능을 갖는 데이노코쿠스 속 변이 균주.
[청구항 17] 제16항의 변이 균주를 배양하는 단계를 포함하는 파이토엔 생산 방법.
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
What is claimed is:
1. A preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene using a cre-lox system includes the following stages:
1) a stage in which a DNA structure is introduced into a Deinococcus strain and the DR0861 gene is eliminated, wherein the DNA structure contains a first selective marker, and the two end terminals of a lox nucleic acid fragment are fused with the upper and lower fragments of the DR0861 gene, respectively;
2) a stage in which the graE promotor, a gene encoding cre recombinase, and a vector containing a second selective marker and temperature-sensitive repUts are introduced into said strain lacking DR0861 gene in stage 1), and the first selective marker is eliminated; and
3) the stage in which said mutant strain obtained in stage 2) is cultured, and the second selective marker is eliminated.
2. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said DR0861 gene is a polynucleotide consisting of a base No. 22.
3. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said incubation of stage 3) is carried out at a temperature ranging from 30℃ to 40℃.
4. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said Deinococcus strain is Deinococcus radiodurans.
5. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said upper and lower fragments of the DR0861 gene have a length of 0.5 to 1.2 kb.
6. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein the two end terminals of said lox nucleic acid fragment include one or more lox genes selected from the group composed of lox71 and lox66.
7. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said lox nucleic acid fragment is a polynucleotide consisting of a base sequence No. 17.
8. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said groE promotor is a polynucleotide consisting of the base sequence No. 19.
9. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said first selective marker and said second selective marker are antibiotic-resistance genes.
10. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 9, wherein said antibiotic-resistance gene is one or more genes selected from the group composed of kanamycin, chloramphenicol, spectinomycin and streptomycin.
11. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said first selective marker is eliminated after the expression of the cre recombinase.
12. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, wherein said vector of stage 2) is a polynucleotide consisting of a base sequence No. 21.
13. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 1, which further includes a stage in which plasmids introduced, wherein the plasmids respectively express one or more genes selected from the group composed of DR0862 gene, DR1087 gene, DR1395 gene and DR1475 gene.
14. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in claim 13, which further includes a stage in which the all plasmids respectively expressing the DR0862 gene and DR1475 gene are introduced.
15. The preparation method of a Deinococcus mutant strain lacking a DR0861 gene as claimed in any of claim 1, claim 13 and claim 14, which further includes a stage in which the DR2250 gene is eliminated.
16. A Deinococcus mutant strain prepared using said preparation method of claim 1, which lacks a DR0861 gene and possesses a phytoene production capacity.
17. The production method of phytoene includes a stage in which said mutant strain of claim 16 is incubated.
1. Do not use in patients who show sensitization to this product or triclosan or who have a metal allergy.
1. Do not use this product on a site which requires joining with a suture for an extended period of 6 weeks or more. [This is because that the suture of this product is absorbent and as such it cannot maintain the required bonding strength.]
2. Do not use this product in suturing to a prosthetic material which requires permanent maintenance such as a heart valve and synthetic graft. [This is because that the suture of this product is absorbent and as such it cannot maintain the required bonding strength in suturing a prosthetic material, which requires permanent maintenance, to body tissues or suturing the prosthetic material to each other.]
3. Do not use in the operations of adult heart blood vessels, nervous tissues or microsurgeries or in the operations of eyes having contact with cornea or sclera.
4. Do not re-use or re-sterilize this product.
Mechanism
Suture, ligate and support with a thread-specific tensile strength.
Triclosan inhibits the colonization of Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus epidermidis, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus, methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus epidermidis, E. coli and Klebsiella pneumoniae on the surface of suture.
The results of in vitro inhibition experiments show that this product inhibits colonization of these bacteria on the suture. In addition, in animal studies, the results of transplanting this product and at the same time directly inoculating the bacteria in vivo suggest possibility of inhibiting bacterial colonization on the suture. However, the clinical usefulness of this is unknown.
The process of the tensile strength degrading and absorption of this product depends on hydrolysis.
This product minimizes variations in the residual tensile strength and the absorption rate, and is designed to provide wound support even when the healing process is prolonged.
日本語 から 英語: Clinical Study Visit General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 健康管理
翻訳 - 英語 Both oil and cream are applied to the nails. How many times are them applied in total? I see. Try to apply a little more. The diuretic is used for swelling, and the medication is still maintained at present.
There was a line or dry feeling in the nails, but there were no symptoms of nail coming off. Frozen gloves are introduced, but it is not used because of the uncomfortably chilly feeling due to peripheral neuropathy G1. I will observe the symptoms to see if frozen gloves could be introduced. For constipation, the supporting medicine is adjusted so that there is defecation every day and this care method is used as support. Lacrimation G1. There is facial erythema in addition to lacrimation, and mechanical stimulus such as wiping would be a factor to promote pigmentation of erythema in such place as cheeks, so advice is given on being careful in wiping and cleaning. There was no shortness of breath or motivation.
日本語 から 英語: phase I study report [59] General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 II RESULTS
1. Clinical Observation
(Subjective symptoms, neurological findings, and objective manifestations)
In the single dose studies, the clinical symptoms considered to be induced by pharmacological effect of this drug were symptoms of central nervous system, such as downiness, disorientation, dizziness, headache and lightheadedness, as well as fatigue, limb weakness and tiredness (Table 5-1). These symptoms were dose-dependent. Both occurrences and severity of symptoms increased with an increased dose. On the next day after medication, the symptoms disappeared in all patients receiving low doses (0.5 mg, 1 mg, 2 mg) and mild symptoms still remained in those receiving higher doses(4 mg, 6 mg). In addition, one patient experienced stomach upset, nausea and vomiting after administration at the dose of 4 mg. However, these symptoms were more frequently observed in this subject when receiving the drug on an empty stomach than before. The causality with this drug was unknown.
On the other hand, neurological findings and objective manifestations (Table 5-2) showed poor single-foot standing in one case on 2 mg and 4 mg doses, 2 cases on 4 mg dose, and 3 cases on 6 mg dose. Tired appearance/expression, reduced glint in eyes and slow movement were observed in subjects on 1 mg dose, drowsy expression in subjects on 2 mg, and speech retardation in 3 subjects on 6 mg, which were considered to be affected by this drug.
In addition, drowsiness was observed in all cases about 6 hours after receiving 1 mg HPD in the treated group (Tables 5-1 and 5-2). Fatigue and limb weakness were observed in 2 cases. Disorientation, tiredness and thirst were observed in 1 case, but the symptoms were mild and eliminated quickly. Only 1 case developed objective drowsy appearance, and 2 cases showed poor single-foot standing. On the other hand, only 2 cases in HPD 3 mg dose group showed drowsiness about 6 hours after medication. Muscle tone was observed in 1 case from 2 to 10 hours after administration, and its correction between this drug was unknown. Generally, there was the trend of fewer symptoms in HPD-treated groups than in LY dose groups.
Subjects receiving 4 mg in the multiple dose studies (Table 6-1) developed fatigue, disorientation, dizziness, and headache and lightheadedness induced by pharmacological effect of this drug during treatment period from first day of medication. In addition, irritability was observed in 1 case and depression in 2 cases. The euphoria was observed in one case receiving placebo, which was considered to be induced by his personality. Other subjective symptoms included fatigue, limb weakness, tiredness and thirst, etc..
On the other hand, the neurological findings and objective manifestations showed that subjects developed poor single-foot standing, drowsy facial expression, reduced glint in eyes, slow movements and etc. about 4 hours after administration on Day 1 and Day 2, which was considered related to this drug. However, after 4 days, little such effect was observed except for 1 case with poor single-foot standing on Day 4.
In the additional multiple dose studies (1 mg, 2. 5 mg) (Table 6-2), drowsiness, disorientation, dizziness, headache/lightheadedness, fatigue, limb weakness, tiredness, and thirst were also observed.
Also, the neurological findings showed poor single-foot standing in 1 case and poor writing skills in another case, both of whom received 2.5 mg dose. In the objective manifestations, drowsy facial expression, reduced glint in eyes and slow movements developed only in subjects receiving 2.5 mg dose, and they were transient and could eliminate without treatment, so they were not considered as clinically special problems.
2. Physical Examination Results
1) Blood pressure, pulse rate and body temperature
No changes of clinical problems were observed in blood pressure and pulse rate of subjects on doses of 0.5 mg, 1 mg and 2 mg. However, orthostatic hypotension was observed in 2 cases, one each on LY 4 mg and 6 mg. At the visit 4 hours after administration, subject L on LY 4 mg felt sick with supine systolic blood pressure of 92 mmHg and diastolic BP 42 mmHg, which was accompanied by heart rate of 44 beats / min and bradycardia. Electrocardiogram showed normal results. After administration of Etilefrine 5 mg Tablets and infusion of Hoechst 250 ml, the patient became calm and gradually recovered. At 12 hours later, the supine systolic blood pressure supine was 112 mmHg, diastolic BP was 53 mmHg and the pulse rate retuned to 52 beats/min, which was normal. Also, at the visit 3 hours after administration, subject I on LY 6 mg complained of dizziness during the orthostatic blood pressure measurement, with systolic blood pressure of 45 mmHg, diastolic BP 30 mmHg and pulse rate of 72 beats/min. Similarly, the subject received Etilefrine 5 mg Tablets and infusion of Hoechst 250 ml, and became calm. But 8 hours after repeated administration when single-foot standing test was performed, the subject complained of lightheadedness. In addition, the subject complained of feeling illness during the sitting blood pressure measurement. At this time, the sitting systolic blood pressure was 61 mmHg, diastolic BP was 34 mmHg, and pulse rate was 68 beats/min. However, 13 hours after administration when blood pressure was measured, the supine systolic blood pressure was 113 mmHg, diastolic BP was 58 mmHg, and pulse rate was 53 beats/min, which was normal. Variations within physiological normal range were also observed in other subjects.
日本語 から 英語: Sensitization Experiment of HandCAC (Hemostatic Forceps Part) Using Marmot General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 Summary
To investigate whether HandCAC (Hemostatic Forceps Part) can lead to sensitization in marmot and the degree using Maximization Test.
Add methanol of 10 times weight into the test substance (10ml methanol per 1 gram of test substance) and then shake and extract at room temperature for 24 hours. Filter the extracting solution with filter paper after extraction, and then condense the extracting solution to obtain the extract.
For sensitization induction 1, 1 ml dimethylsulfoxide is added into the extract obtained from 1g test substance to prepare the test solution administered to marmot intradermally On the sixth day after sensitization induction 1, sensitization induction 2 is carried out. 1 ml methanol is added into the extract obtained from 1g test substance to prepare the test solution, which is then opened and stored for 48 hours. On the 13th day after sensitization induction 2, 1 ml methanol is added into the extract obtained from 1g test substance to prepare the test solution (100% test solution) and its serial dilute solutions (50, 10, 1 and 0.1% test solution) , which are used to induce sensitization.
The result is that skin reaction is not observed in any test animal.
Therefore, it is considered that HandCAC (Hemostatic Forceps Part) does not lead to sensitization in marmot under the test conditions.
日本語 から 英語: Medical General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語
• Increased risk of suicidal thought and behavior in children, adolescents and young adults. Suicidal thought and behavior during treatment have been reported. Please contact your doctor immediately if you think of injuring yourself or feel like to injure yourself. Your condition will be closely monitored for all symptoms, suicidal tendency or unusual changes in behaviors.
• Movement disorder known as tardive dyskinesia (TD). It refers to repetitive, involuntary and unintended movements. This disorder is characterized by grimacing, tongue sticking out and clicking, lips puckering or pursing, and excessive eye blinking. Rapid movements of arms, lower limbs and torso may be developed. If these symptoms are developed, please contact your doctor immediately.
• Rare blood diseases such as leukopenia, neutropenia and agranulocytosis. Leukopenia is a condition in which there is a decrease in the number of white blood cells that protect the body against infections. In neutropenia, there is a decrease in the number of a specific type of white blood cells. In agranulocytosis, there is a dangerous decrease in the number of a specific type of white blood cells, which may lead to death if not treated. These conditions have been reported in patients who have a history of blood diseases or those who are taking a drug known to increase the risk of blood diseases. For your safety, your doctor will carefully examine your condition and give appropriate treatments as needed.
日本語 から 英語: Stable Eye Drop General field: 医療 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the Invention
Stable Eye Drop
2. Claims
(1) An eye drop characterized by blending glycyrrhetinic acid or salt thereof into an eye drop containing quaternary ammonium salts blended with sodium chondroitin sulfate.
(2) The eye drop according to claim (1), wherein the proportion of blended glycyrrhetinic acid or salt thereof is 0.01 - 0.5 w/v%.
(3) An eye drop characterized in that at least one or two compounds selected from polyoxyethylene hardened castor oil, polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of a fatty acid and polyoxyethylene ester of a fatty acid and polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene ether are blended with an eye drop containing quaternary ammonium salts blended with sodium chondroitin sulfate.
(4) The eye drop according to claim (3), wherein the proportion of said at least one or two blended compounds selected from polyoxyethylene hardened castor oil, polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of a fatty acid and polyoxyethylene ester of a fatty acid and polyoxyethylene polyoxypropylene ether is 0.01 - 0.5 w/v%.
(5) The eye drop according to claim (1) or claim (3), wherein the quaternary ammonium salt is benzalkonium chloride or benzethonium chloride.
(6) The eye drop according to claim (1) or claim (3), wherein 0.0l - 0.2 w/v % quaternary ammonium salts and 0.05 - 0.5 w/v % sodium chondroitin sulfate are blended.
翻訳 - 英語 [0010]
In order to address the above problems, the inventors conducted research and completed the invention to obtain a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide with excellent storage and handling stability and medicine [preferably prophylactic or therapeutic agent (particularly therapeutic agent) for diseases induced by thrombus or embolus (still more preferably thrombosis or embolism)].
[0011]
That is to say, the present invention is
（1） a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide, preferably,
（2） a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide according to (1), which is a crystal with major peaks at the diffraction angle 2θ=15, 22 and 27 (each ±2) under the powder X-ray diffraction of copper Kα-ray irradiation, more preferably,
（3） a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide according to (1), which is a crystal with major peaks at the diffraction angle 2θ=13, 15, 22, 27 and 30(each ±2)under the powder X-ray diffraction of copper Kα-ray irradiation.
[0012]
Moreover, the present invention is
（4） a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide according to (2) or (3), wherein the crystal content of the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide is above 50%.
And the invention is
（5） A process for preparing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide described in any one of (1) to (3), which comprises suspension of solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide in an inert solvent, followed by agitation and reaction of the mixture.
（6） The process for preparing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide according to (5), wherein the inert solvent is organic solvent selected from ketone, ester, nitrile, aromatic hydrocarbon, ether, chain or cyclic hydrocarbon, alcohol and halogenated hydrocarbon.
（7） The preparation process according to either (5) or (6), wherein the inert solvent is toluene, isopropyl ether, cyclohexane and ethyl acetate.
（8） The preparation process according to any one of (5) to (7), wherein the inert solvent is ethyl acetate.
（9） The preparation process according to any one of (5) to (8), wherein the reaction temperature is between 0℃ and 120℃.
（10） The preparation process according to any one of (5) to (9), wherein the reaction temperature is between 20℃ and 100℃.
（11） The process for preparing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide disclosed in any one of (1) to (3), which comprises dissolution of free Prasugrel into inert solvent, followed by dripping or addition of hydrobromic acid.
（12） The process for preparing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide according to (11), wherein the inert solvent is organic solvent selected from ketone, ester, nitrile, aromatic hydrocarbon, ether, chain or cyclic hydrocarbon, alcohol and halogenated hydrocarbon.
（13） The preparation process according to (11) or (12), wherein the inert solvent is toluene, isopropyl ether, cyclohexane and ethyl acetate.
（14） The preparation process according to any one of (11) to (13), wherein the inert solvent is ethyl acetate.
（15） The preparation process according to any one of (11) to (14), characterized in addition of seed crystal, or,
（16） The preparation process according to any one of (11) to (15), which comprises addition of half of the required amount of hydrobromic acid, addition of seed crystal, further dropwise addition of the remaining required amount of hydrobromic acid, followed by reaction of the mixture.
[0013]
Furthermore, the present invention is
(17) A medicament containing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide disclosed in any one of (1) to (3) as an active ingredient.
(18) A prophylactic or therapeutic agent for thrombus formation-induced or embolization-induced diseases in a warm blooded animal containing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide disclosed in any one of (1) to (3) as an active ingredient.
(19) A prophylactic or therapeutic agent for thrombosis or embolism in a human containing the non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide disclosed in any one of (1) to (3) as an active ingredient.
[Benefits of the Invention]
[0014]
According to the present invention, a non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide with excellent storage and handling stability can be provided.
[0015]
The non-solvate of Prasugrel hydrobromide of the invention is effective in the treatment and/or prevention of thrombosis or embolism (preferably thrombosis) (preferably therapeutic agent and/or prophylactic agent of thrombosis).
日本語 から 英語: Japanese patent translation General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims of New Utility Model]
1. An AC magnetic levitation transportation device which uses an alternating magnetic field to levitate and move a levitated object made of non-magnetic, conductive metal materials, wherein:
for said levitated object to be levitated and transferred, in addition to the AC electromagnet rows installed in the direction of the transfer of the levitated object, first permanent magnets are continuously or spacedly installed in parallel with the AC electromagnet rows and permanent magnets are also installed on said levitated object.
The traction to said levitated object in the transverse direction when it is levitated and transferred is increased through the attraction between the first permanent magnets installed in the direction of the transfer of said levitated object and the second permanent magnets installed on said levitated object.
[0024]
[Embodiment]
Figure 1 is a diagram illustrating the structure of first embodiment of the AC levitation transportation device according to the present invention. The AC electromagnet rows are arranged in the same way as shown in the above Figure 4 and Figure 5. Therefore, Figure 1 uses the same symbol 3 as in Figure 4 and Figure 5 to indicate the AC electromagnets.
[0025]
In Figure 1, the numbering 14 indicates the levitated object which moves levitatedly along the transfer lines comprising two rows of electromagnets 3. The levitated object 14 is shaped so that said levitated object 14 by itself has a certain degree of traction. The shape is shown by dotted lines in the top view of Figure (b) and is the same crisscross flat plate as that of the levitated object 4 shown in the above Figure 5. In addition to the crisscross shape, it can be an H, T or reversed T shape.
[0026]
In the AC levitation transportation device shown in Figure 1, in order to further increase the traction to said levitated object 14, firstly permanent magnets 1 are installed in parallel with the transfer lines (comprising the AC electromagnet rows 3) between the two transfer lines comprising the AC electromagnet rows 3. The permanent magnets 1 are all arranged with the same magnetic pole facing up and can be mounted continuously or spacedly. In addition, when the levitated object 14 is levitated and moves along the transfer lines comprising the AC electromagnet rows 3, there are permanent magnets 2 installed underneath said levitated object 14 facing the permanent magnets 1 as shown by the dotted lines in the front view 1(a). Underneath the levitated object 14, 3 pieces of the permanent magnets 2 are installed as shown by the dotted line in the top view 1(b), and all of said permanent magnets 2 attract the permanent magnets 1.
[0027]
According to the structure shown in the above Figure 1, a current is applied to the AC electromagnet rows 3 (comprising of the AC electromagnets) so that the repulsive force between the alternating magnetic field produced by the AC electromagnet rows 3 and the magnetic field generated by the over-current in the levitated object 14 in the alternating magnetic field lifts up the levitated object 14.
[0028]
In the structure shown in Figure 1, as described above, there is an attractive force between the permanent magnets 1 installed between the transfer lines comprising the two rows of AC electromagnets 3 and the permanent magnets 2 installed underneath the levitated object 14. As a result, when the levitated object 14 is levitated and moves along the transfer lines, the traction to the levitated object 14 in the transverse direction, i.e. perpendicular to the movement direction, can be increased.
[0029]
The attractive force between the permanent magnets 1 and permanent magnets 2 may influence the lifting of the levitated object 14. However, to ensure the attractive force is smaller than the repulsive force, the influence on the levitated object 14 can be reduced by selecting the degree of attractive force of the permanent magnets.
[0030]
In the embodiment shown in the above Figure 1 (first embodiment), in addition to shaping the levitated object so that it has a certain degree of traction, a unique structure of the present invention is incorporated to increase the traction through the attractive force between the permanent magnets 1 and permanent magnets 2.
[0031]
Secondly, the second embodiment of the present invention does not specifically shape the levitated object but the traction of the levitated object is increased only by using the unique structure of the present invention, as described with reference to Figure 2. The same parts as those shown in Figure 1 are indicated with the same symbols.
[0032]
The structure shown in Figure 2 is different from that shown in above Figure 1 and does not use the crisscross levitated object, instead it uses a levitated object of a simple rectangle flat plate that is not specially shaped. The permanent magnets 2 are installed under the levitated object and the permanent magnets 2 are installed continuously or spacedly between the transfer lines comprising two rows of AC electromagnets.
[0033]
By adopting this structure, the levitated object 24 only in the shape of a rectangle flat plate does not have any traction, and traction can be applied to the levitated object 24 through the attractive force between the permanent magnets 1 and 2. In this way, the levitated object 24 comprising of a simple flat plate can also be properly levitated while moving along the transfer lines.
日本語 から 英語: WOSA reports (Written Opinion of the International Searching Authority) General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Section 1
Claims 1-11
The inventions described in claims 1-11 have not been disclosed in any documents cited in the international search report, and possesses novelty and an inventive step.
Figure 3 of document 1 describes a plurality of irregularities which are provided in the direction perpendicular to the electric current direction on the surface of a ceramics board used for vacuum deposition that is made of Titanium diboride and Boron nitride, but it does not describe the width, depth and length of the irregularities. Additionally, the purpose of providing the irregularities according to document 1 is different from that of the present invention, so it would not be obvious even for a person skilled in the art to set the width, depth and length of the irregularities to be 0.1-1.5 mm wide, 0.03-1 mm deep and over 1 mm long, respectively.
Further, in the crucible of direct heating method according to document 2, though it is disclosed that grooves of 0.1-2.0 mm interval and 0.1-5.0 mm depth are provided on the inner surface of the crucible, it is not a resistance heating crucible and it is a technology of providing the grooves on the crucible in order to solve the problems caused by direct heating method, thus it would not be obvious even for a person skilled in the art that the crucible described in document 2 can be used for resistance heating.
Still further, documents 3-5 do not describe that grooves are provided in the direction not parallel to the electric current direction of the metal evaporation heating element, and it would not be easy even for a person skilled in the art to come up this idea.
Section 2
In claim 1, it is described that “1 groove or over 2 grooves are provided”, so the number of grooves includes 1 or 2.
About this point, reference example 4 describes a situation of having 50 grooves of 3.0 mm interval, and indicates that, in such a situation, the effects of the present invention will not be achieved (refer to Table 1). Considering the results of reference example 4, it would be obvious that in the event that 1 groove is provided, the effects of the present invention will not be achieved. Additionally, it would not be conceivable that 2 grooves or 3 grooves will achieve the effects of the present invention. Furthermore, if the interval of grooves is not specified even though there are 50 grooves, it would also be obvious that the effects of the present invention will not be achieved.
As described above, claim 1 includes the possibility of 1 groove or 2 grooves, and even when more than 2 grooves are provided but the interval of grooves is not specified, then the invention according to such claim 1 is not adequately supported by the specification.
翻訳 - 英語 ① Open the water supply valve to empty the air from the water softer.
Note: If the product is supplied with a raw water unit, fill the raw water tank with water and then empty the air by rotating the booster pump of the raw water unit. At this time, check if the booster pump is rotating in the direction of the arrow, and if not, interchange two of the power supply leads (wires), R, S and T.
② If the soft water tank is already filled with water, open the water supply valve and the air bleed valve of the water supply pump to remove any air. Now, turn on the operation switch of the boiler, and check if the water supply pump is rotating in the direction of the arrow. If not, interchange two (R and T) of the power supply leads (wires), R, S and T.
The air bleed valve will first eject the mixture of water and air, and after a little while, it starts to firmly eject only water.
Complete the air bleed at this stage, and then close the air bleed valve and continue to supply water.
翻訳 - 英語 Helicobacter pylori (Hp) infection is the main cause of gastric ulcer and duodenal ulcer. At present, triple or quadruple therapy including both PPI preparations and antibiotics are adopted in clinic to eradicate Hp infections. It is found that PPIs, when used in combination with antibiotics, produce good result in eradicating Hp, at, however, significantly varied eradication rate. Research finds that in addition to widely recognized effect of inhibiting secretion of gastric acid and resisting ulcer, PPI itself is an Hp inhibitor. Among those PPIs, which are commonly used in clinic, Pariet (Rabeprazole enteric-coated tablet), Takepron (Lansoprazole capsule) and Nexium have a relatively definite efficacy of acid inhibition. However, it is necessary to examine whether difference in antibacterial activity of different PPI preparations will affect the effect of Hp eradication therapy and to preliminarily explain the phenomenon of significantly varied effect of different PPIs for eradication therapy of Hp as shown in recent clinical epidemiology data.
This research is intended to compare and analyze in vitro antibacterial activity of 3 kinds of most commonly used PPI preparations.
中国語 から 英語: Observation on the efficacy of telbivudine blocking the mother-to-infant transmission from HBV-infected pregnant women General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Observation on the efficacy of telbivudine blocking the mother-to-infant transmission from HBV-infected pregnant women
Ge Jun, Zhou Hongping (Clinical Pharmacy, the Sixth People's Hospital of Hangzhou, Hangzhou, Zhejiang, 310000)
Abstract Objective To observe the efficacy of telbivudine blocking mother-to-infant transmission from HBV-infected pregnant women.
Methods 39 HBV-infected pregnant women receiving treatment in the hospital from January 2008 to December 2008 were divided into group A and group B.
Fourteen pregnant women in group A were orally administrated telbivudine 600 mg from the 28th week of gestation, and simultaneously received intramuscular injection of hepatitis B immunoglobulin (HBIG) 200u daily per month.
Twenty-five pregnant women in group B received only intramuscular injection of HBIG 200u from 28 weeks′ gestation per month.
Babies born to two groups of pregnant women immediately received intramuscular injection of HBIG 100u after birth, and at the same time received standard intramuscular injection of hepatitis B vaccine 10μg based on the 0, 1 and 6 month post-birth protocol.
Virus dynamics of the two groups of pregnant women, pregnancy complications, change rate of HBV-DNA, delivery mode and neonatal HBV infection rate, Apgar scores and developmental condition were respectively observed.
Results The HBV-DNA level of pregnant women in group A was significantly reduced and there were no significant changes in the HBV-DNA level of the pregnant women in group B.
Of the babies born to 14 pregnant women in group A, two were found to have a positive HBsAg result in the peripheral serum detection, with a blocking rate of 85.00%. Of the Babies born to 25 pregnant women in group B, three were found to have a positive HBsAg result in the peripheral serum detection, with a blocking rate of 86.92%.
In addition, the HBV infection rate was 0.00% in the infants born to pregnant women in group A, and there were 9 cases of pregnancy complications in this group.
Development conditions were all normal.
There were 17 cases of pregnancy complications and 1 infant with facial deformities.
Conclusion Telbivudine can effectively reduce HBV-DNA level of pregnant women with higher viral loads.
However, the blocking rate of mother-to-infant transmission of HBV was similar in efficacy to the intramuscular injection of HBIG.
China has high incidence of the hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection. The hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg) carrier rate is as high as 10% to 20%, of which 40% to 50% was through mother-to-infant transmission. About 30% to 50% of patients got the chronic hepatitis B virus infection through mother-to-infant transmission. So the mother-to-infant transmission is one of the most important transmission routes in China. For neonates, the active and passive immunization ways which adopt hepatitis B vaccine combined with HBIG are adopted both at home and abroad to reduce the infection rate of hepatitis B virus. However, a large number of clinical studies have shown that over 90% of babies born to HBsAg and HBeAg-positive pregnant women were infected with HBV. With this vaccine, neither the hepatitis B vaccine alone nor hepatitis B vaccine combined with HBIG can completely block the mother-to-infant transmission. In recent years, available nucleoside (nucleotide) drugs can effectively inhibit HBV replication and reduce HBV-DNA serum level. Although animal experiment results showed that nucleoside drugs such as telbivudine and lamivudine had no teratogenic effects, there were no sufficient evidence to evaluate the efficacy and safety of these drugs in humans. This study mainly investigated whether oral telbivudine can effectively improve the blocking rate of mother-to-infant transmission during pregnancy. The details are reported below.
中国語 から 英語: Medical General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 You are invited to participate in this clinical test/study and this form provides you with information about this trial/study. This trial/study has been reviewed and approved by the Research Ethics Committee and the principal investigator or his/her authorized staff will explain what is involved in the study and answer any questions that you have. Please consider it carefully before you sign. You must sign this consent form in order to participate in this trial/study.
Protocol Title:
In Chinese:
In English:
Study site: Sponsor/Pharmaceutical Company:
Principal Investigator: Title: Telephone:
Co-investigator: Title: Telephone:
※ 24-hour emergency contact: Telephone:
I. Introduction to the Current Global Marketing of the Drug, Medical Technology and Medical Device
II. Purpose of the Study:
III. Main Inclusion and Exclusion Criteria of the Study:
IV. Study Methods and Related Tests:
V. Processing of the Remaining Samples:
If there are samples remaining at the end of this study, they will be stored (at the National Taiwan University Hospital) with your consent for use in future study xx (please specify the estimated scope of the study). All new protocols will be reviewed and approved by the Research Ethics Committee of the National Taiwan University Hospital, and your consent will be obtained again if necessary. The remaining samples will be stored in Refrigerator xx, Research Room No. xx, National Taiwan University Hospital (or storing laboratory, site, institution, city and country) for xx years.
(In this paragraph, please specify the persons who may use the samples and the information about the samples and also specify whether there are other researchers than the principal investigator who are authorized under the laws to use the samples or whether the samples will be legally transferred to other sites abroad . )
To protect your privacy, your name and related personal data will be replaced by a study number in order to confirm that your samples and related data are kept completely confidential. If you want to destroy any samples that have been collected, please contact us immediately (contact: ____ telephone: ____; study site: _________ Telephone: ____Address: ____), and we will destroy your samples.
中国語 から 英語: Medical Record General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 [redacted] Medical Record
Name: [redacted] Department (Ward): CCU Bed No.:[redacted] Hospitalization No.:[redacted] ID No.: [redacted]
Admission Record of Cardiology Department
Name: [redacted] Place of birth: [redacted]
Gender: Female Ethnic origin: Han
Age: 72 Y Occupation:[redacted]
Marital status: married Date of birth: [redacted]/1937
Home address: [redacted]
Admission time and date: 30-Nov-2009,06:06 PM
Medical history recording time: 30-Nov-2009, 06:32 PM
Source of medical history: patient and her family
Chief complaint: repeated chest tightness for more than 1 year and worsening for 4 hours during the recurrence
The patient complained that one year ago he began to have chest tightness after activities with paroxysmal pain at precordial area; the pain did not radiate; the patient had no shortness of breath; the chest tightness persisted for several minutes during every episode and could be relieved after having a rest. The patient came to outpatient of our hospital for treatment and diagnosed with “coronary heart disease”. The patient intermittently received “Shensongyangxin Capsules" and “Jiuxin pills” (with unknown details), but the above symptoms still recurred. At that time, the patient did not pay much attention to these; at about 2 o'clock this afternoon, she had a sudden onset of chest tightness while resting, and it was located posterior to middle and lower parts of sternum and presented a squeezing nature, it was not tolerated; the patient did not have radiating pain; the chest tightness persisted for 2 hours and could not be relieved after taking “Jiuxin Pills”; also, the patient had excessive sweating, nausea, vomiting (for several times) with all vomits of stomach contents without coffee-like substances; the patient did not have shortness of breath. Then the patient came to our hospital for treatment and the emergency electrocardiography revealed “II, III, aVF, V4R-V6R, V7-V9 ST segments elevated by 0.1-0.35 mv, III AVB, atrial flutter”; the patient was diagnosed with coronary heart disease (myocardial infarction type) acute inferior wall, right ventricle, posterior wall myocardial infarction; the "urokinase 1.5 MU" was given for thrombolysis for approximately 1 hour and then the symptom of chest tightness was relieved as compared to before; the review electrocardiogram showed ST segment fell by more than 50%, which was considered as a successful thrombolysis. The patient was admitted to our department for further diagnosis and treatment. Since onset of symptoms, the patient has been in poor mental state, has average appetite and sleep, and normal stool and urine; no significant change was found in body weight.
Past medical history: the patient was diagnosed with "hypertension" more than one year ago with the blood pressure ranged between 140-160/70-90 mmHg; the patient intermittently took nitrendipine tablets; history of "hepatitis", "tuberculosis" and “upper digestive tract bleeding” was denied; the patient does not have the history of drug allergy, blood transfusion, trauma or surgery; vaccination history was unknown.
Personal history: Born in Changsha, Hunan without a history of living in other places permanently; history of exposure to living in epidemic region or infected water was denied. The patient has smoked for 30 years with about 20 cigarettes every day; the patient drinks occasionally; her spouse and children are physically healthy.
Menstrual history: first period at 15 years old, with each one for 3-5 days; 41 years old; the menstrual volume is high with normal color. No clots in menstruation; no dysmenorrhea.
Marital and childbearing history: The patient has been married for more than 40 years, and has 3 children; her spouse and children are physically healthy.
Family history: all family members are alive and healthy and denied the history of inherited and infectious diseases or those of the same kind.
Physical Examination
Body temperature: 36.0℃ Pulse rate: 58 beats/min Breath rate: 22 breaths/min BP: 104/54 mmHg Height: 156 cm Weight: 54.0 kg Waist 82 cm Hip 104 cm
The patient was normally developed and well nourished, had clear consciousness, presented the appearance of acute illness, and had active position. The skin color was normal all over body without jaundice or bleeding points; no liver palm or spider angioma was seen; no enlargement of superficial lymph nodes was noticed all over body.The head size was normal; no eyelid edema; no conjunctival congestion or edema; the cornea was transparent; both pupils were equal in size and roundness, and light reflex existed; the auricle had no deformity; lip mucosa was not cyanotic; no ulceration or bleeding was observed in oral mucosa; no throat congestion was found; no swelling of either tonsil was observed. The neck was soft and symmetrical without filling of jugular vein. The trachea was located in the middle and the thyroid was not enlarged. The thoracic cage was symmetric without deformities; the breathing frequency was normal. The percussion examination revealed clear sounds in both lungs; the breathing sounds were coarse in both lungs without significant dry or moist rales being auscultated; no pleural friction sound was heard. No uplift was found in the precordial area; the apex beat point was located at approximately 0.5 cm within clavicle midline of the left 5th intercostal space; the heart border was not expanded; the heart rate was 58 beats per minute with regular rhythms, and low and blunt sound; no pathological murmurs were auscultated in any valve area. Abdomen was flat with abdominal type breathing and without varicose veins on wall or gastrointestinal and peristaltic waves; the abdomen was soft without tenderness and rebound tenderness; no mass was palpated; the liver and spleen were not palpable under ribs; Murphy sign was negative. No percussive pain was found in area of liver or bilateral kidneys; shifting dullness was negative. Bowel sound was 4 time per minute without vascular murmur being auscultated. Anus and external genitalia were not checked. The spine had no deformity; no tenderness in paraspinal spikes; the extremities had no deformity; the joints had no swelling with free movement; no edema was found in lower extremities. The muscle and tension of limbs were normal; reflexes of knees existed; the Kernig’s, Brudzinski’s and Babinski’s signs were negative.
翻訳 - 英語 5. Technical requirements
5.1 Basic performance requirements
The fermentors are to be placed in a clean area of class D fermentation workshop. The fermentors can be used to culture high oxygen-consuming microorganisms, including E. coli and yeast, and are equipped with the basic functions such as process control and CIP, and each fermentor can be controlled separately. The culture is performed in batches. The connection from the 70-75 L fermentor to the 1,000 L fermentor is achieved by a detachable hose adaptor. Fermentors of different volumes can be controlled separately for individual culture and the CIP control system can be used for cleaning the 1,000 L fermentor, 75 L fermentor and all the material replenishment tanks.
No.
Requirements
﹡5.1.1 The fermentors have working volumes of 50 L and 700 L respectively, with a height to diameter ratio of 3:1.
﹡5.1.2 The two biofermentors each comprises a body, a control system and connecting pipelines, and is to be equipped with a CIP/SIP system.
﹡5.1.3 The supplier is provide the PID drawings and a detailed description of the functions and design for the bioreactor.
﹡5.1.4 The body shall has the ASME mark, indicating upper pressure limit 45 psig, fully vacuumed and design temperature 150 oC.
﹡5.1.5 The jacket has the ASME mark (or other marks as recognized by the Chinese regulatory body), indicating upper pressure limit 150 psig, fully vacuumed and design temperature 175 oC. The jacket is designed to have internal corrugation which may extend to the bottom and has a design temperature of 175 oC.
﹡5.1.6 The fermentor shall have a manhole, a safety lock, and 4 feed ports on its top, and also there shall be a lifting hook and a switch for inspection on top of the fermentor.
﹡5.1.7 There shall be flanges, a saucer bottom and a valve on the bottom of the fermentor.
﹡5.1.8 The fermentor jacket shall be made of the 304 stainless steel and be covered with high-temperature resistant electrical insulation
﹡5.1.9 The fermentor shall contain a thermal and electrical insulation layer, covered with a 304L stainless steel, treated.
﹡5.1.10 The 1,000 L fermentor and 70-75 L fermentor are to be equipped with a CIP system, and the clean-in-place (CIP) and sterilization-in-place (SIP) control programs shall be integrated into the PLC control program.
﹡5.1.11 All the fermentor bodies, pipes and accessories shall be made of 316 stainless steel if they have direct contact with the materials or 304 stainless steel if they do not have contact with the materials. The internal surface shall be electrolytically polished to Ra 15-20 (0.5μm).
﹡5.1.12 The 1,000 L fermentor comes with an installation hook on its top cover and the 70-75 L fermentor is supplied with a spring-powered opening mechanism.
﹡5.1.13 The fermentors shall be equipped with surface aeration and deep aeration, which can be used separately or in combination. The two sets of aeration pipelines are to have their own sterile filtration devices at air inlets. The air flow is 1.5 UDM.
﹡5.1.14 The filter integrity test may be performed in-line or off-line. The CIP/SIP interface allows for connection with the 400 L and 200 L material replenishment tanks.
﹡5.1.15 The culture temperature is 30 to 42 oC, accurate to
中国語 から 英語: DRUG INTERRACTIONS General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 中国語 7. DRUG INTERRACTIONS
7.11. Effect of X on the Metabolism of Other Drugs
No in vivo clinical trials have investigated the effect of X on the clearance of drugs metabolized by CYP3A4 (e.g. cisapride, terfenadine) or by CYP2D6 (e.g. imipramine). However, in vitro studies show a low rate of binding to these enzymes (mean Ki about 50-130 μM), that, given the therapeutic plasma concentrations of donepezil (164 nM), indicates little likelihood of interference.
Whether X has any potential for enzyme induction is not known. Formal pharmacokinetic studies evaluated the potential of X for interaction with theophylline, cimetidine, warfarin, digoxin and ketoconazole. No effects of X on the pharmacokinetics of these drugs were observed.
7.22. Effect of Other Drugs on the Metabolism of X
Ketoconazole and quinidine, inhibitors of CYP450, 3A4 and 2D6, respectively, inhibit donepezil metabolism in vitro. Whether there is a clinical effect of quinidine is not known. In a 7-day crossover study in 18 healthy volunteers, ketoconazole (20 mg q.d.) increased mean donepezil (5 mg q.d.) concentrations (AUC0-24 and Cmax) by 36%. The clinical relevance of this increase in concentration is unknown.
A small effect of CYP2D6 inhibitors was identified in a population pharmacokinetic analysis of plasma donepezil concentrations measured in patients with Alzheimer’s disease. Donepezil clearance was reduced by approximately 17% in patients taking 10 or 23 mg in combination with a known CYP2D6 inhibitor. This result is consistent with the conclusion that CYP2D6 is a minor metabolic pathway of donepezil.
Inducers of CYP2D6 and CYP3A4 (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, dexamethasone, rifampin, and phenobarbital) could increase the rate of elimination of X. Formal pharmacokinetic studies demonstrated that the metabolism of X is not significantly affected by concurrent administration of digoxin or cimetidine.
翻訳 - 英語 Continuous filament, or filament
Generally, continuous filament refers to a filament having a ratio of length to thickness of more than 10%. All chemical fibers can be used to made continuous filaments provided that they can be spun into threads. The continuous filament may be further divided into monofilament and multifilament by the number and fineness of fiber threads in each tow. The multifilament is usually used for clothing and the monofilament is intended mainly for non-clothing purposes, such as fishing line. A monofilament may have a diameter of greater than 60 and may even be as big as 5mm.
It is also called silk. In chemical fiber manufacturing, the fiber solution is extruded from a spinneret into a spinning chamber to cool down or into a coagulation bath to coagulate into a continuous fiber silk. The fiber silks formed at each spinning location are rolled up by a roller for further post-spinning processing such as drawing or directly enter post-spinning process without being rolled to yield a smooth, glossy continuous filament measured kilometers in length.
翻訳 - 英語 [57]What is claimed:
1. A combined massaging and brushing tool comprising a main body having a plurality of convexes neatly arranged on a surface thereof, a cutting line positioned suitably away from an end edge thereof and extending in both directions along said end edge wherein an opening is formed by removing said body along said cutting line, a plurality of cutting lines suitably spaced and disposed in the proximity of another end edge thereof and respectively extending downwardly from a location in the proximity of the center wherein a set of enclosures are formed by removing said body along said cutting lines.
2. The combined massaging and brushing tool of claim 1 wherein said convexes are of conical shape.
翻訳 - 英語 Material for the Preparation of PTFE Micro-Pore Film
Technical Field
This invention involves a kind of material for the preparation of PTFE micro-pore film. It is a kind of technology of high molecular material.
Technical Background
PTFE (Polytetrafluoroethylene) has excellent performance in molecular binding, good chemical stability and high resistance to strong acid, alkali and other chemicals. It also has good performance to resist a wide range of temperature, and can be long-term used under temperature from -180℃ to 260℃. This is impossible to any other high molecular material. Therefore, PTFE is called the King of plastics. Due to its good chemical stability and its safety and non-toxicity, it is used widely. The main product made of PTFE is PTFE micro-pore film, which can be made into composite laminating surface material, or used as filtering or insulating material in chemical engineering.
Steps for the preparation of PTFE micro-pore film include in turn: raw material mixing, pre-pressing, extruding and extending, de-greasing under high temperature, stretching in both direction and solidifying under high temperature. During theoretical researches and related experiments, materials used have been found to be the key point which influences the quality and technical performance of finished products. Most of the existing raw materials are the binary mixture of PTFE and coal oil solvent. The finished products of them have poor strength and poor distribution uniformity of micro-pore, especially, the rate of finished products is very low, generally lower than 85%, with the distribution of micro-pore larger than 0.5 micron. A ternary mixture was stated in Chinese patent with a title of Production Process and Technology of PTFE Micro-pore Film (publication No. CN1392180A). It used PTFE as raw material, No.3 jet fuel as solvent, and used composite of chromium alkyl-salicylate (antistatic agent) and calcium iso-octyl-succinate sulfonate as dispersant. Combining real time on-line check and computer control during production, the quality and technical performances of the finished products were all improved obviously compared those by the above binary mixture. However, the development results by combining theory and practice shows that, by using No.3 jet fuel as solvent, the semi-finished product after PTFE mixed has better extensibility and softness than those using coal oil or naphtha as solvent, but the two performances still are not satisfying; also, in this patent, the antistatic agent added into the mixture can’t obviously improved the micro-pore uniformity of the film. Therefore, both the rate of finished product in the patent and the micro-pore uniformity are still poor, the rate is lower than 90% normally, which made the cost high. Especially, the finished products can’t meet the requirement of Chemical Filter Class, which makes it difficult to expand the range of the finished products.
中国語 から 英語: Pharma sample for Traditional Chinese into English translation
翻訳 - 英語 Part I: Clinical Research Subject Informed Consent Form
Study Title:
A Multi-center, Randomized, Double-blind, Active-control, 96-week Phase III Study of the Efficacy and Safety of Clevudine (YYYY) versus Adefovir (XXXX) at Weeks 48 and 96 in Nucleoside Naïve Patients with Hepatitis B Virus Induced HBeAg Positive Chronic Hepatitis [CI-PSI-5268-06-305]
Purpose of the Study
You are being asked to participate in a clinical study. You are eligible for this study because you have had chronic hepatitis B (HBV) infection. The purpose of this study is to investigate the efficacy and safety of Clevudine (YYYY) versus Adefovir (XXXX,dipivoxil) (Hepsera®) in HBV carriers and nucleoside naïve hepatitis B patients. Adefovir (XXXXdipivoxil) is a nucleoside analogue. Other nucleoside analogues include lamivudine, emtricitabine and abacavir.
Clevudine (YYYY), as a study medication, has not been approved by U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Adefovir (XXXX dipivoxil) has been approved by U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for use as a prescription drug to treat patients with HBV.
This clinical research is funded by the study sponsor, TTTT, Inc. and the manufacturer of the study drug, Clevudine (YYYY).
B. Description of the Clinical Study
This informed consent form will tell you about the details of this study to help you decide whether you are willing to participate in this study. Please read all contents in this Form carefully before you make your decision. If you have questions or have anything that you do not understand, please ask your doctor or discuss with your family and/or your personal doctor. If you choose to participate in this clinical study, you will be required to sign this consent form.
Approximately 376 subject with HBV infection will be enrolled in this study which will be conducted at several study sites in the US, and approximately 6 subjects will be recruited in Mount Sinai. If you decide to participate in this study, you will be randomly (by chance, like randomly taking a number from a small cap) assigned to either of the following treatment groups:
Group 1 will take one capsule of 30 mg Clevudine (YYYY) together with one capsule of placebo once daily. Placebo is a capsule that does not contain any active drug ingredients, but it looks like a "real" drug capsule. Approximately two out of three subjects (67%) will receive Clevudine (YYYY) in this study.
翻訳 - 英語 Strength of Passenger Car Seats and Fasteners for Attaching the Seats to the Vehicle
1 Scope
This standard specifies the terms, definition, requirement and testing methods of passenger car seats and the fasteners for attaching the seats to the vehicle
This standard pertains to seats which are installed facing ahead in M2 and M3 cars. The vehicle should have seating fasteners for installation of these seats or other forms of seats that may be installed on these fasteners.
This standard is not applicable to seats used in Class A or Class I of M2 and M3 passenger cars.
Seats for M2 passenger cars may choose to use the technical requirements and testing methods provided in CMVDR 217 when requested by the manufacturer.
除应符合 GB 25034-2010 第 9.3.1 条规定的安装条款外,安装技术说明书还应包括以下内容:
a) 排除烟气和冷凝液方法的详细规定,必须注意避免烟道和冷凝液排出管的水平布置。应指出烟
管和冷凝液排出管的最小斜度和坡向;
b) 应采取措施避免冷凝炉从排烟系统终端连续排出冷凝液;
c) 在冷凝炉符合 6.4 排烟温度要求时,制造商应规定或提供烟道和配件。另外,制造商应规定冷
凝炉上不可连接可能要受热影响的管道(如塑料管或内部有塑料涂层的管道);
d) 声明冷凝液是否已经中和处理及排放方法;
e) 应声明排烟温度限定值。
9.3.2 用户使用和维护说明书
除应符合 GB 25034-2010 第 9.3.2 条的相关规定外,还应符合以下规定:
a) 除有关冷凝炉的特殊规范中叙述的条款外,用户使用和维护说明书应包括冷凝炉工作的简要说明。
b) 说明书上应标识不同工况下对应的热输出和热效率
c) 说明书应规定冷凝液出口不要变更或堵塞,应说明冷凝液中和装置的清洗、维护和更换的有关说明。
翻訳 - 英語 9. Designations, Warnings and Specifications
9.1 Designations
In addition to compliance with the provisions in Article 9.1 of GB 25034-2010, the nominal condensing heat output (kW) should also be specified.
9.2 Warnings
The provisions in Article 9.2 of GB 25034-2010 should be met.
For a condensing boiler without a neutralization unit, a warning sign should be provided on the product to indicate that the condensate can only be discharged into a non-metallic sewage pipe.
9.3 Manuals
9.3.1 Installation Manual
In addition to compliance with the provisions of installation in Article 9.3.1 of GB 25034-2010, the installation manual should also include the following:
(a) Detailed provisions for flue gas and condensate discharge methods, indicating that the horizontal arrangement of the flue duct and the condensate discharge pipe must be avoided. Furthermore, the minimum slope and orientation of the flue duct and condensate discharge pipe should be indicated.
(b) Proper measures should be taken to prevent the condensing boiler from continuously discharging condensate from the flue exhaust system.
(c) The manufacturer should specify or provide the flue duct and fittings if the condensing boiler satisfies the flue gas temperature requirements specified in section 6.4,. In addition, the manufacturer should specify that pipes that may be affected by heat (such as plastic pipes or pipes with internal plastic coating) should not be connected to the condensing boiler.
(d) It should be indicated that whether the condensate has been neutralized, and how it will be discharged.
(e) The limits of the flue gas temperature should be indicated.
9.3.2 Operation and Maintenance Manual
In addition to compliance with the provisions in Article 9.3.2 of GB 25034-2010, the following requirements should also be met:
(a) In addition to the provisions set out in the condensing boiler specifications, the operation and maintenance manual should briefly describe the operation of the condensing boiler.
(b) The manual should indicate the corresponding heat output and heat efficiency in different operating conditions.
(c) The manual should specify that the condensate outlet should not be changed or blocked, and how the condensate neutralization unit should be cleaned, maintained and replaced.
中国語 から 英語: Examined specification for invention patent General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: テレコミュニケーション
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A method for assigning an all-digital code as address to a computer which accesses a network, wherein said address is an all-digital code comprising a network access number, a telephone number, and a category number; said network access number is a digital number of an established network site which is specified by a country or area; the telephone number includes a combination of an IDDD code of a user’s country, an area code of a domestic DDD of the user’s area, and a telephone number of the user’s organization or home; and the category number is a digital number specified by the country or area for uniformly demarcating a respective service category.
2. A method for accessing the Internet using the address coded by the method according to claim 1, wherein a user can access a mail box or browse the Internet by inputting into a computer modem via a dial-up telephone keypad or a computer keyboard and linking the corresponding digital code, which is translated into an IP address or a domain name or a Chinese domain name system so that each all-digital code address corresponds to an existing IP address, or domain name, or Chinese domain name system.
3. The method of assigning an all-digital code as address to a computer which accesses a network according to claim 1, wherein said all-digital code address can also include a subcategory digital number to be added after the category number.
4. The method of assigning an all-digital code as address to a computer which accesses a network according to claim 1, wherein said all-digital code address can also include an encryption digital number to be added after the network access number or the telephone number.
5. The method of assigning an all-digital code as address to a computer which accesses a network according to claim 1, wherein said coding method can also be used for assigning an e-mail address, which is composed of a user name digital number and a digital number of a domain name of a mail server where the mail box is located.
中国語 から 英語: Overview of Power Capacitor Technology Development Outside China General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: エネルギー/発電
翻訳 - 英語 [Electric Power Quality] Overview of Power Capacitor Technology Development Outside China
February 05, 2010, 15:02:52; By: Jinlan Fang at Xi’an XD Power Capacitor Co., Ltd.; Source: Saier Power Quality, Issue 2 [Reproduction is permitted provided the original source is clearly indicated]
This paper reviews recent development in power capacitor technology outside China with a focus on dielectric application, noise research, environmental impact research and development of new high-voltage capacitors.
Key words: impregnating agent [1 article]; capacitor noise [1 article]; dry capacitor [1 article]; environment protection [4 articles]
Introduction
Over the past decade since the end of the last century, the high-voltage power capacitor technology has been in a plateau of development worldwide. Most capacitors available on the market are still oil impregnated film ones and no great breakthroughs were seen. However, quietly but continuously the technology has been advancing and a new-generation of products in certain aspects are emerging, which probably suggests the coming of a new era of development in the power capacitor technology. In this paper, information about capacitors developed internationally will be shared with the peer in this industry by describing the product development of three major capacitor makers, ABB, Copper and GE, as well as the development made in Japan, India and South Korea.
Against this backdrop, it is widely recognized that the power capacitor manufacturing industry in China has made a great leap forward both in technology development and in production scale over the last 10 years. In China, all-film high-voltage capacitor products are now available, and unprecedented changes have taken place in the technical and economic performance and physical appearance of capacitor products. In particular, China has made outstanding achievements in using domestic capacitor products for direct-current power transmission. However, these technical advancements are driven to some extent by international improvements in the technology, especially the advanced technical levels of Sino-foreign joint ventures in China. There are few proprietary technologies in China and these advancements only shorten the gap between the Chinese and world advanced levels and today the gap is still considerable in overall technical level. Therefore, a review of the international developments in this technology and the trend in technical development worldwide today may give us certain insight into the future development of power capacitor products in China.
1. Main materials of capacitor
1.1 Solid dielectric
Today, capacitor products all use biaxially oriented elongated polypropylene film that has a history of 40 years since it was used in power capacitors, and there is no new better alternative to this material. By processing method, the film is divided into tubular film and flat film. It is widely believed that the tubular film has the properties of high density, excellent mechanical performance, high dielectric strength and relatively inferior thickness uniformity while the flat film features high productivity, excellent thickness uniformity and high dielectric strength. These two films show no obvious difference in performance in use and it is only the traditional preference of the capacitor manufacturers. For example, ABB has been using both tubular and flat films while Cooper and GE have been using tubular films all the time. Tubular films are produced by older equipment and flat films are manufactured by newer equipment. It appears that flat films will be the future development trend. It is worth noting that the thickness of film is normally measured by weight density method outside China, and by micrometer method in China.
As the quality of film is key, a strict control of the source of polypropylene resin particles, the production conditions and the whole production process is required. It is reported that it is very important to control the content of chlorine ion in the film (no more than 5×10-6), and where possible, the core of the capacitor does not use compounds containing chlorine because a high chlorine ion content can reduce the dielectric strength of the capacitor during operation.
1.2 Liquid dielectric
In the past 10 years, C101 and SAS have been used worldwide as the most common liquid dielectric for impregnation. Although they are both mixtures, C101 consists of mono-/bi-benzyl toluene and SAS series consist of diphenylethane and mono-benzyl toluene. As they show little difference in properties, change of the impregnating agent used does not require modification to the capacitor design. Pricewise, three major international capacitor manufacturers use SAS series produced in the U.S. by the Nippon Oil Corporation. The molecular structures of these two impregnating agents are shown in Figure 1, and the main property specifications are shown in Table 1.
英語 から 中国語: Medical Translation Detailed field: 医療: 心臓病学
原書のテキスト - 英語 Quantification of cardiac chamber size, ventricular mass, and function ranks among the most clinically important and most frequently requested tasks of echocardiography. Standardization of chamber quantification has been an early concern in echocardiography and recommendations on how to measure such fundamental parameters are among the most often cited articles in the field. During the last decades, echocardiographic methods and techniques have improved and expanded dramatically. Improvements in image quality have been significant, as a result of the introduction of higher-frequency transducers, harmonic imaging, fully digital machines, left-sided contrast agents, and other technologic advancements.
Furthermore, echocardiography has become the dominant cardiac imaging technique, which, because of its portability and versatility, is now used in emergency, operating, and intensive care departments. Standardization of measurements in echocardiography has been inconsistent and less successful compared with other imaging techniques and, consequently, echocardiographic measurements are sometimes perceived as less reliable. Therefore, the American Society of Echocardiography (ASE), working together with the European Association of Echocardiography, a branch of the European Society of Cardiology, has critically reviewed the literature and updated the recommendations for quantifying cardiac chambers using echocardiography. Not all the measurements described in this article can be performed in all patients because of technical limitations. In addition, specific measurements may be clinically pertinent or conversely irrelevant in different clinic scenarios. This article reviews the technical aspects on how to perform quantitative chamber measurements and is not intended to describe the standard of care of which measurements should be performed in individual clinical studies However, evaluation of chamber size and function is a component of every complete echocardiographic examination and these measurements may have an impact on clinical management.
英語 から 中国語: Medical Equipment Translation Detailed field: 医療: 心臓病学
原書のテキスト - 英語 Cardiovascular System
The cardiovascular system is a powerful, portable multi-specialty imaging
platform that incorporates the latest generation of all-digital ultrasound technologies and proven innovations, providing solutions in flexibility, workflow and performance.
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
The powerful, all-digital core technology of the CV70 system is built on a combination of: technology migration from other XXXX™ ultrasound systems. MultiBeam Image Formation, multihertz and the XXXX integrated DIMAQ architecture.
• The all-digital architecture preserves the signal integrity of all ultrasound information throughout the entire signal path – from transducer to display.
• MultiBeam Image Formation – allows high frame rate imaging, for optimal color flow and motion visualization.
• Precision MotionCapture – utilizes the full spectrum of signal information which allow the accurate display of cardiac structures for analysis.
• DIMAQ integrated workstation – acquires, captures and stores digital dynamic clips and static images without interrupting the exam workflow. This technology is the gateway to advanced features.
User Interface
• User-centric control panel with homebase layout
• Windows® based operating principles and on-screen icons to activate most frequently used functions
• Adjustable control panel back-lit illumination
• Intuitive active stage lighting
• Digital Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) provides easy and immediate access to secondary imaging controls
• Wrist support to help reduce operator repetitive stress disorders
• Retractable alphanumeric keyboard with overhead illumination for standard text, function keys and system programming
原書のテキスト - 英語 A manufacturer fine-tunes its automatic transmissions for heavy trucks.
Moving a Class 8 tractor-trailer down the road with efficiency is a tricky business. With a rig that weighs 33,000 pounds or more, the driver has to shift 10 to 18 times just to get the truck up to highway speed. Once cruising velocity is achieved, the driver is constantly shifting among as many as four top gears as traffic or terrain mandates.
According to K. G., principal reliability engineer for E. H. D. Transmission Division, "If you have a pure manual transmission, a great driver can achieve the maximum fuel efficiency. But now, senior drivers are getting harder to come by, and average and beginner drivers are very fuel inefficient. They don't optimize the cycle."
Trucking companies are very much interested in achieving optimal fuel efficiency. A gain of 4 or 5 percent could mean annual savings of hundreds of thousands of dollars for a company with a large fleet of trucks. In addition, companies would like to increase driver retention, and one way to do so is to make the big rigs easier to drive in congested traffic.
What's more, the strength and size of drivers varies greatly, and not all of them are happy using manual transmissions. Taken together, these factors add up to the increasing demand for automatic transmissions for heavy trucks. The trucking companies want them for fuel efficiency and driver retention, and the drivers want them for ease of use.
According to A. W., senior technologist for the E.T.G., "These trucks need fast shifts. But you don't want it to be harsh, either; you want the transmission to shift smoothly so the driver doesn't get thrown around and you don't break things in the drivetrain."
翻訳 - 中国語 自动变速器制造商精调重型货车的自动变速器
在道路上有效地驾驶一辆8级牵引拖车是一件棘手的事。由于拖车重达3.3万磅或更重，因此仅仅要让拖车达到公路行驶速度，司机就必须换档10-18次。在达到了稳速行驶速度之后，根据交通或地形情况，司机还要经常在4个高速档之间换档。
按E. H. D. Transmission Division的可靠性主工程师K.G的话说：“如果使用纯手动的变速器，一位优秀的司机是能够达到最高燃油效率。但现在高级司机越来越难找，而普通司机和新手司机的燃油效率又非常低下。他们不会优化操作过程。”
货运公司对获取最佳燃油效率极感兴趣。燃油效率提高4％或5％，对于拥有一支大车队的货运公司来说，每年可以节省几十万美元。此外，公司也希望更好地留住司机，而其中一个方法就是使大型货车在交通拥挤时较易于驾驶。
再者，司机的力气和身材也大不相同，他们并非都乐意使用手动变速器。所有这些因素都日益要求重型货车使用自动变速器。货运公司想用它们是为了提高燃油效率和留住司机，而司机则是为了使用方便。
按E.T.G的高级技术专家A. W的话说：“这些货车需要快速换档。但也不希望换档太急；而是希望能够平稳地换档，这样司机就不会被甩来甩去，同时也不希望对传动系统的部件造成损坏。
英語 から 中国語: Medical technology
原書のテキスト - 英語 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Delivery Procedure
1. Prepare vascular access site according to standard practice.
2. Pre-dilate the lesion with a PTCA catheter.
NOTE: The Stent can be delivered without a pre-dilatation in patients who present with the following criteria:
• Age 18 and 75 years
• Reference vessel diameter 3.0 – 4.0 mm
• Lesions 25 mm in length
• Recent ( 6 months) history of angina
• Myocardial infarction 72 hours
• TIMI 3 flow in target vessel
• No angiographic evidence of calcium, severe tortuosity, 90 angulation at lesion
3. Maintain neutral pressure on inflation device. Open rotating hemostatic valve as widely as possible.
4. Backload Delivery System onto proximal portion of guide wire while maintaining guide wire position across target lesion.
5. Advance Delivery System over guide wire to target lesion. Utilize radiopaque balloon markers to position stent across lesion; perform angiography to confirm stent position.
NOTE: If during the process of moving the Delivery System into position you notice the stent has moved on the balloon, do not deploy the stent. The entire system should be removed as a single unit.
英語 から 中国語: Life Sciences (Pharmaceutical Indications)
原書のテキスト - 英語 What is ELIDEL?
ELIDEL is the only steroid-free prescription cream for mild to moderate eczema. You put it on your skin to control the ups and downs of this condition.
Features of ELIDEL:
• Can significantly relieve the itching and redness
• Contains no steroids
• Can be used for repeated courses as directed by your doctor
• Safe to use anywhere on the skin—including the face, neck and around the eyes
• Does not cause certain side effects, such as thinning of the skin, stretch marks, or spider veins
• Odor-free, non-greasy cream, not an ointment; it absorbs quickly and easily
• Should not stain clothing or sheets
How do I use ELIDEL?
At the first signs or symptoms of a flare-up of mild or moderate eczema, apply a thin layer of ELIDEL, twice daily, to the affected areas. Continue ELIDEL treatment until the symptoms go away. If symptoms return, start and stop ELIDEL treatment as directed by your doctor. If symptoms don’t improve within 6 weeks, or get worse, speak to your doctor.
Important patient information:
When you and your doctor find other treatments don’t work for you, there’s concern about their risks, or you simply can’t tolerate them, there’s steroid-free ELIDEL. ELIDEL can be used in patients two and above. It can go anywhere on your skin, including your face. And you can use ELIDEL for repeated courses as directed by your doctor. ELIDEL targets the key cells involved with eczema right at the site of the problem.* While there is no cure for eczema, ELIDEL can significantly relieve the itching and redness. ELIDEL was well tolerated in clinical studies. The most common side effects are a feeling of warmth or burning where applied; headache; cold-like symptoms, such as sore throat and cough; and rarely, viral skin infection. When using ELIDEL, you should protect your skin from the sun or sun lamps.
Your identity and contact details will be made anonymous by your study doctor through the use of a code number. Only the study doctor will keep your full identity and contact details for the purpose of your participation in the study. You will not be identified by your name in any file, results, publications or records kept by XYZ Company or the sponsor in relation to this study. XYZ Company, the sponsor, or their representatives, as well as regulatory authorities may, however, need to access your patient file at certain occasion in order to comply with regulatory or legal obligations.
Legal basis for the processing of your data
Your medical and health data are processed on the basis of Article 7, § 2, (j), of the Belgian Data Protection Act of December 8, 1992 when such processing is carried out under the supervision of a health professional and is necessary for the purposes of medical diagnosis, treatment or the management of health-care services and, on the basis Article 7, § 2, (a), of the Data Protection Act of December 8, 1992 (your written consent hereunder) for any other purposes described in this Patient Informed Consent Form.
Consent:
By signing this Patient Informed Consent Form and by entering this study, you agree to the above described processing and transfer of your personal data.
原書のテキスト - 英語 User′s Guide
Operation
Operate the lift using the pushbuttons on the handcontrol.
For raising and lowering the lift arm:
Press and , respectively.
Directional arrows show the direction of movement (up/dowm).
The thicker arrows on the handcontral correspond to the maximal speed and the thinner arrows correspond to a slower lifting speed (only mod. ES). Lifting motions stops as soon as the push-button is released.
For base width adjustment (only mod. EE/ES):
Press either of the two push-buttons.
Wider
Narrower
Base width adjustment (only mod. EM)
Width adjustment of the base is done manually with a lever that locks in a range of positions. Simply release the lever at the desired width and it locks in place.
To use the Emergency Stop:
Push the red Emergency Stop button on the control box.
To reset the Emergency Stop:
Turn the button in the direction of the arrows.
Electrical emergency lowering
With a narrow object, press the hole marked “EMERGENCY” on the control box.
Model ES is also equipped for electrical emergency raising.
△ The object used to press must not be sharp, since this could cause damage on the control box.
Mechanical Emergency Lowering
Mechanical emergency lowering is performed by turning the red emergency-lowering cylinder in the direction of the arrows.
Locking the wheels
The rear wheels can be locked for rotation and lateral movement. To lock the wheels press the brake lever above the wheel down with your foot. Release the wheels by pressing the top side of the lever.
During lifting, wheels should remain unlocked so that the lift may shift to the patient's center of gravity. The wheels should however be locked if there is a risk for the lift moving into the patient, for example when lifting from the floor.
△ Locked wheels during lifting increases the risk of the lift tilting over.
△ Never pull the lift by the actuator! This may result in damage to the lift and possible injury.
翻訳 - 中国語 用户指南
操作说明
使用手控器上的按钮对移动借助器进行操作。
升高与降低移动借助器的支臂：
可分别按下 和 按钮。
箭头方向即为运动方向（上/下）。
手控器上粗线箭头对应的提升速度最快，而细线箭头对应的提升速度则较相对较慢（仅适用于 ES 模式）。释放该按钮后，提升运动随即停止。
调节底座宽度（仅适用于 EE/ES 模式）：
可按下以下两个按钮中的任意一个按钮。
增加宽度
缩小宽度
调节底座宽度（仅适用于 EM 模式）
通过将一个手杆锁定于一定范围内可对底座的宽度进行手动调节。只需在释放手杆后将其移至所需宽度，然后锁定即可。
原書のテキスト - 英語 Designing the Ideal System Flow Rate
• Fully qualified technical staff available to help ensure solid solutions for your water and heating needs.
Advantages of Air Separation and Benefits:
Efficient system operation
Decreased maintenance costs
Proper application of both the pressurization (lower energy consumption expansion tanks) and air elimination (noise reduction separator) devices will solve your “System Air” problems.
Minimizes oxygen induced corrosion and costly maintenance
These key components are necessary in the design and chemical water treatment
construction of closed circulation systems.
Protects valves and mechanical seals.
• Reduces sludge creation
The tangential air separators are ASME vessels designed with tangential openings to create a low velocity vortex where entrained air is separated and removed
• Optimizes pump performance:
– Reduces pump power requirements (Kwh) from circulating water or anti-freeze in a closed system. In addition, these tangential air separators can be supplied with a stainless steel strainer to collect unwanted system separators
• More effective than conventional “straight flow” debris.
– Allows for lower pumping capacity
– Helps prevent harmful pump cavitation
The keys to efficient air separation and elimination:
• Laminar flow
• Low pressure drop across the air separator
• Recommended system fluid velocity of 6 feet/second (1.83 M/S)
1. Volume control
2. Electrical input
3. Battery compartment
4. Microphone
5. Program selector
6. Plastic snap connector
7. Attachment point for the safety line
8. Serial number
The Baha Intenso™ is a bone conduction sound processor and the most powerful of our head worn devices. The Baha® bone conduction system works by combining a sound processor with an abutment and a small titanium implant placed in the skull behind the ear. The system is based on a process of “osseointegration” through which living bone tissue integrates with titanium. Thus, the titanium implant becomes one with the bone allowing sound to be conducted via the skull bone directly to the cochlea and improving your hearing.
Please read this manual carefully to learn how to use and maintain your sound processor. Be sure to discuss any questions or concerns that you may have regarding hearing or use of this system with your hearing health care professional.
(Partly page 9)
Care and maintenance
Cleaning the abutment area
When the last dressing has been removed and the abutment is exposed hygiene continues to be very important.
Daily care
On a daily basis the area around the abutment should be cleaned to avoid debris build up. This build up around the base of the abutment is not a scab and must be removed. Cleaning this area is most easily done when you bath or take a shower as plenty of warm water and soap on the area will help to soften any crust that may have developed around the base of the abutment. A soft brush is provided together with your sound processor for this purpose.
(Page 15)
Accessories
Several accessories are available to enhance your sound experience in different contexts. To ensure the smooth operation of your Baha, only use Cochlear original accessories or accessories approved by Cochlear
Audio adapter
Allows direct input from personal stereos, TVs, MP3s and Hi-fi equipment.
MicroLink Baha FM-receiver
Enables the use of Phonak FM transmitters HandyMic, Easylink, Smartlink, TelCom and Campus S.
Telecoil unit
Improves sound quality and speech understanding in homes where there are personal loop systems installed and in other buildings with loop facilities.
英語 から 中国語: English into Traditional Chinese Detailed field: 医療: 歯科学
原書のテキスト - 英語 At first, it’s silent, practically invisible and sometimes even painless. But once periodontal disease strikes, it’s only a matter of time until it makes its presence known with uncomfortable, unsightly and quite possibly irreparable side effects.
Periodontal disease, also know as gum disease, is the major cause of tooth loss in adults. There are several types and stages of the disease, all of which start with an infection of the gums that can move into the bones and ligaments that support the teeth. In the beginning stages, it is often detected by a dentist or dental hygienist during regular checkups. If left untreated gums and bone can become so seriously damaged, that teeth can fall out or have to be removed.
More than half of all adults, and three quarters of adults over 35, have some form of periodontal disease. Even young children can exhibit signs. If you plan to make your teeth last a lifetime, it’s important to understand the causes, symptoms and best methods for treating and preventing periodontal disease.
What causes Periodontal Disease?
The major cause of periodontal disease is the interaction between the bacteria found in plaque—the sticky, virtually invisible film that collects on teeth every day – and the body’s response to that bacteria. These bacteria create toxins that irritate and inflame the gums. This inflammatory process destroys the gum tissues and causes them to separate from the teeth. If left untreated, the disease advances to damage the underlying bone.
When plaque is not removed from the teeth regularly, it forms a hard, porous substance called calculus, or tartar. If calculus forms on the roots of the teeth below the gum line, it irritates the gums even further and contributes to even more plaque collection and disease. Only a dentist or dental hygienist can remove plaque and calculus from your teeth.
Once the bacteria in plaque have created inflammation and damage to the gum tissue occurs, a number of other factors can contribute to the severity of periodontal disease and the rate at which it progresses. Among them are:
· Smoking or chewing tobacco
· Poor oral hygiene
· Poorly fitting bridges
· Badly aligned teeth
· Defective fillings
· Food impacted between teeth
· Clenching or grinding teeth
· Poor diet
· Pregnancy or oral contraceptives
· Systemic diseases such as diabetes or AIDS
· Certain medications
英語 から 中国語: CATHETER SHAFT AND METHOD OF MANUFACTURE General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療: 心臓病学
原書のテキスト - 英語 CLAIMS What is claimed is:
1. A method of manufacturing a catheter assembly, comprising the steps of:
providing a catheter shaft having a proximal end, a distal end, an outer layer, and an
inner reinforcing layer;
removing at least a portion of said outer layer from a length of the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to expose a distal segment of the catheter shaft having an exposed exterior region;
providing an inner jacket segment having a proximal end and a distal end;
axially engaging the inner jacket segment with an interior surface of the distal segment of the catheter shaft;
providing an outer jacket segment around at least the exposed exterior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft; and
bonding the distal segment of the catheter shaft to the inner jacket segment and the outer jacket segment.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the outer jacket segment and the outer layer comprise different materials with different durometer hardness values.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the catheter shaft further comprises an inner layer.
4. The method of claim 3, further comprising the step of removing at least a portion of said inner layer from a distal end of the catheter shaft to form an exposed interior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft, wherein the exposed interior region is disposed around the inner jacket segment.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the length of the exposed distal segment of the catheter shaft is at least as long as the length of the inner jacket segment.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the outer layer of the catheter shaft comprises a melt processable polymer.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the removing step comprises grinding.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the removing step comprises removing with a laser.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the inner jacket segment comprises a melt processable polymer.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the outer jacket segment has varying hardness along its length.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein the inner jacket segment further comprises a pull ring operatively connected thereto.
12. The method of claim 1, further comprising the step of applying energy to the outer jacket segment, the exposed distal segment of the catheter shaft, and the inner jacket segment to form a substantially unitary catheter shaft.
13. The method of claim 12, further comprising forming a heat-shrink tube about the outer jacket segment prior to the energy applying step.
14. The method of claim 12, further comprising applying energy to the outer jacket segment, the exposed distal segment of the catheter shaft, and the inner jacket segment in a manner that does not heat the proximal end of the catheter shaft.
15. A method of forming a catheter assembly, comprising the steps of:
providing a catheter shaft having an outer layer of a first material and an inner reinforcing layer;
removing at least a portion of said outer layer from a length of the catheter shaft in order to expose a distal segment of the catheter shaft;
providing an inner jacket segment having a proximal end and a distal end;
axially engaging the exposed distal segment of the catheter shaft with the proximal end of the inner jacket segment,
providing an outer jacket segment of a second material around the exposed distal segment of the catheter shaft; and
bonding the catheter shaft to the outer jacket segment and the inner jacket segment.
16. The method according to claim 15, wherein the inner reinforcing layer of the catheter shaft extends continuously over the entire length of the catheter shaft and the inner jacket and outer jacket segments.
17. The method according to claim 15, further comprising applying energy to the outer jacket segment, the inner reinforcing layer of the catheter shaft, and the inner jacket segment in a manner that does not heat a portion of the outer layer of the catheter shaft which is disposed away from the distal end of the catheter shaft.
18. The method according to claim 15, wherein the first material and the second material are selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polyurethanes, polyesters, functionalized polyolefins, polycarbonates, and any combinations thereof.
19. The method according to claim 15, wherein the first material and the second material are selected from the group consisting of polyamide-based thermoelastic elastomers, polyester-based thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastic polyurethanes, styrenic thermoplastic elastomers, and any combinations thereof.
20. A catheter assembly formed according to a method comprising the steps of:
providing a catheter shaft having a proximal end, a distal end, an outer layer and an
inner reinforcing layer;
removing at least a portion of said outer layer from a length of the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to expose a segment of the catheter shaft;
providing an inner jacket segment having a proximal end and a distal end;
axially engaging the exposed segment at the distal end of the catheter shaft with the inner jacket segment such that the inner jacket segment is positioned within and adjacent the exposed segment of the catheter shaft; and
forming an outer jacket segment around the exposed catheter shaft segment to operatively connect the catheter shaft to the inner jacket segment.
21. The catheter assembly according to claim 20, wherein the outer jacket segment has varying hardness along it length.
22. The catheter assembly according to claim 20, wherein the outer jacket segment has a lower durometer than the catheter shaft.
23. The catheter assembly according to claim 20, wherein the inner jacket segment further comprises a pull ring attached to an inner layer of the inner jacket segment.
24. The catheter assembly according to claim 23, wherein the pull ring is operatively connected to a plurality of pull wires which extend through the inner jacket segment and catheter shaft to a proximal end of the catheter shaft.
25. A catheter assembly comprising:
a catheter shaft having an axial length, a proximal end, a distal end, an outer layer of a first material, and an inner reinforcing layer;
an outer jacket segment of a second material having an axial length, a proximal end, and a distal end, the second material being different from the first material;
said catheter shaft operatively connected at its distal end to the proximal end of said outer jacket segment;
said inner reinforcing layer of the catheter shaft extending throughout the entire axial length of the catheter shaft and the outer jacket segment.
26. The catheter assembly of claim 25, wherein the axial length of the outer jacket segment further comprises materials of different durometer hardness.
27. The catheter assembly of claim 25, wherein the axial length of the outer jacket segment has an arcuate shape.
28. The catheter assembly of claim 27, wherein the arcuate shape of the outer jacket segment is fixed.
29. The catheter assembly of claim 27, wherein the arcuate shape of the outer jacket segment is flexible.
30. A method of manufacturing a catheter assembly, comprising:
providing a catheter shaft having a proximal end, a distal end, an outer layer of a first material, and an inner reinforcing layer;
removing at least a portion of the outer layer from a length of the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to expose a distal segment of the catheter shaft having an exposed exterior region;
providing an outer jacket segment of a second material around at least the exposed exterior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft, the second material being different from the first material; and
bonding the outer jacket segment to the exposed exterior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein bonding the outer jacket segment to the exposed exterior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft comprises applying energy to the outer jacket segment and the distal segment of the catheter shaft.
32. The method of claim 31, wherein the energy is applied in a manner that does not heat the proximal end of the catheter shaft.
33. The method of claim 30, further comprising:
providing an inner jacket segment at an interior surface of the distal segment of the catheter shaft; and
bonding the inner jacket segment to the interior surface of the distal segment of the catheter shaft.
34. The method of claim 33, wherein bonding the outer jacket segment to the exposed exterior region of the distal segment of the catheter shaft and bonding the inner jacket segment to the interior surface of the distal segment of the catheter shaft comprise applying energy to the outer jacket segment, the inner jacket segment, and the distal segment of the catheter shaft.
35. A catheter assembly comprising:
a catheter shaft having an axial length, a proximal end, a distal end, an outer layer of a first material and an inner reinforcing layer, at least a portion of the outer layer having been removed from the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to expose a distal segment of the catheter shaft; and
an outer jacket segment of a second material having an axial length, a proximal end, and a distal end, the second material being different from the first material;
wherein the catheter shaft is operatively connected at its distal segment to the outer jacket segment such that the outer jacket segment substantially replaces the portion of the outer layer that has been removed from the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to form a substantially unitary catheter shaft;
wherein the inner reinforcing layer of the catheter shaft extends throughout the entire axial length of the catheter shaft and the outer jacket segment.
36. The catheter assembly of claim 35, wherein the first material and the second material have different durometer hardness values.
37. The catheter assembly of claim 35, wherein the first material is a melt processable polymer and the second material is another melt processable polymer.
38. The catheter assembly of claim 35, wherein the catheter shaft includes an inner layer of a third material, the inner reinforcing layer being sandwiched between the outer layer and the inner layer, and further comprising an inner jacket segment of a fourth material having an axial length, a proximal end, and a distal end, the inner jacket segment being bonded to the inner layer at the distal segment of the catheter shaft.
39. The catheter assembly of claim 35, wherein the catheter shaft includes an inner layer of a third material, the inner reinforcing layer being sandwiched between the outer layer and the inner layer, at least a portion of the inner layer having been removed from the distal end of the catheter shaft at the distal segment of the catheter shaft, and further comprising:
an inner jacket segment of a fourth material having an axial length, a proximal end, and a distal end;
wherein the catheter shaft is operatively connected at its distal segment to the inner jacket segment such that the inner jacket segment substantially replaces the portion of the inner layer that has been removed from the distal end of the catheter shaft in order to form a substantially unitary catheter shaft.
40. The catheter assembly of claim 39, wherein the third material and the fourth material have different durometer hardness values.
原書のテキスト - 英語
Endoscopic Scissors Instructions for Use
Multi-Cutting Endoscopic Scissors with monopolar electrocautery.
Federal law (USA) restricts this device to use by, or on the order of a physician.
1. Product must be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
2. A ground plate is firmly attached to the patient. A sterile electrosurgical cord, which connects to both the monopolar electrocautery device and to the electrosurgical instrument, is needed to activate the electrode. A standard bovie fitting with a female connector fits this unit.
WARNINGS
1. Product must be cleaned and sterilized prior to use.
2. Prior to use, electrosurglcal devices should be examined for breaks in insulation on cord and shaft, loose or improperly attached plugs, cracks or breaks in the device housing. Any interruptions in the coating may compromise the safety of the instrument.
3. Do not activate the electrocautery when the end effectors are not in contact with tissue.
4. Not for use with CSV Bovie.
5. Excessive force applied to handle may damage unit.
6. After sterilization, Instruments must be thoroughly dried.
NOTE: Scissors are designed for multiple use, however, the life of the scissors will vary according to severity of use.
CLEANING/ DECONTAMINATION
Cover Instrument with an enzymatic presoak (such as Klenzyme) for 5 minutes. Remove and wash instrument thoroughly with a neutral pH detergent (pH 7.9) and a soft bristle to clean surgical debris from the teeth and jaw of the Instrument. Blood and debris left on the instrument will adversely affect the smooth operation of the instrument and may lead to corrosion. Use the flush port to run water through the instrument.
After cleaning, soak the Instrument in a bactericidal solution, such as 2% Glutaraldehyde, for 10 mm. to remove any debris on the inside of the instrument. Instruments may then be processed through an ultrasonic cleaner, and then rinsed, preferably with demineralized water, to ensure complete removal of surgical debris.
Instruments should be lubricated with an approved water-soluble lubricant or “instrument milk.”
After each step in the decontamination and sterilization process, instruments should be thoroughly dried.
英語 から 中国語: ACUP General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 A patient complains of a lingering headache in the occipital area. She also has dizziness, blurred vision, lassitude and a lusterless face. The headache is relieved by warmth and aggravated by cold, overstrain or mental stress. She has a weak and thready pulse and a pale tongue with a thin, white coat. The best point prescription is:
A. GV (Du) 20 (Baihui), CV (Ren) 6 (Qihai), UB 18 (Ganshu), UB 20 (Pishu), UB 23 (Shenshu), St 36 (Zusanli)
B. GV (Du) 20 (Baihui), SI 3 (Houxi), UB 67 (Zhiyin), Liv 3 (Taichong), Extra (Yintang), Sp 9 (Yinlingquan)
C. St 8 (Touwei), Extra (Yintang), GV (Du) 23 (Shangxing), LI 4 (Hegu), St 44 (Neiting), Liv 3 (Taichong)
D. Extra (Taiyang), GB 8 (Shuaigu), TW (SJ) 5 (Waiguan), GB 41 (Zulinqi), Liv 8 (Ququan), GV (Du) 20 (Baihui)
A. GV (督脈)20（百會）、 CV (任脈)6 （氣海）、UB 18 (肝俞) 、UB20(脾俞)、UB23(腎俞)、St36 (足三裏)
B. GV (督脈)20（百會）、SI3 (後溪)、UB67（至陰）、Liv3（太沖）、Extra（印堂）、Sp9（ 陰陵泉）
C. St 8 （頭維）、Extra（印堂）、GV（督脈）23（ 上星）、LI4（合穀）、St44（內庭）、Liv3（太沖）
D.Extra（印堂）、GB8(率穀)、TW(SJ)5（外關）、GB 41 （足臨泣）、Liv 8 (曲泉)、GV (督脈)20（百會）
英語 から 中国語: PCT Patent translation into Simplified Chinese Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
原書のテキスト - 英語 [0006] The blood-brain barrier protects the brain from most toxicants. Specialized cells called astrocytes possess many small branches, which form a barrier between the capillary endothelium and the neurons of the brain. Lipids in the astrocyte cell walls and very tight junctions between adjacent endothelial cells limit the passage of water-soluble molecules. Although the blood-brain barrier does allow for the passage of essential nutrients, the barrier is effective at eliminating the passage of some foreign substances and can decrease the rate at which other substances cross into brain tissue.
[0007] The placental barrier protects the developing and sensitive fetus from many toxicants that may be present in the maternal circulation. This barrier consists of several cell layers between the maternal and fetal circulatory vessels in the placenta. Lipids in the cell membranes limit the diffusion of water-soluble toxicants. Other substances such as nutrients, gases, and wastes of the developing fetus can, however, pass through the placental barrier. As in the case of the blood-brain barrier, the placental barrier is not totally impenetrable but effectively slows down the diffusion of many toxicants from the mother to the fetus in the art.
[0008] For many orally administered drugs, permeation across certain biological membranes such as the blood-brain barrier or the blood-placental barrier is highly undesirable and can result in serious side-effects such as neurotoxicity, insomnia, headache, confusion, nightmares or teratogenicity. These side effects, when severe, can be sufficient to halt the development of drugs exhibiting such undesirable brain or placental uptake. Thus, there is a need for new methods for effectively delivering drugs, and in particular small molecule drugs, to a patient while simultaneously reducing the adverse and often toxic side-effects of small molecule drugs. Specifically, there is a need for improved methods for delivering drugs that possess an optimal balance of good oral bioavailability, bioactivity, and pharmacokinetic profile. The present invention meets this and other needs.
原書のテキスト - 英語 Creating Coatings for Better Buildings
Architectural coatings are designed to provide protection and to keep wind and weather outside. The best coatings protect for decades and keep their color and finish just as long. Fluoropolymers are the toughest resins available to coatings formulators. Known under various trade names, such as Kynar® and Teflon® , they offer the best available coating performance. Fluoropolymer finishes resist many chemical hazards and retain color and gloss for decades.
Three fluoropolymer resins are commonly used in coatings. They are polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) and polyvinyl fluoride (PVF). The differences in performance and processing among these materials begins with their structure.
PVDF Properties
Crystallinity can vary from about 35% to 70%, depending on the method of preparation and thermo-mechanical history. The degree of crystallinity is important because it affects toughness and mechanical strength. The characteristics of PVDF depend on molecular weight, molecular weight distribution, extent of irregularities along the polymer chain (including main-chain defect structures and side groups) and crystalline form.
PVDF exhibits a complex crystalline polymorphism not observed in other synthetic polymers. There are four distinct crystal forms: alpha, beta, gamma and delta. The polymorphs are present in different proportions, depending on processing conditions during polymerization. The alpha and beta forms are predominant in industrial situations.
The alpha form prevails in coatings and normal melt processing of structural parts. It is the most common form of PVDF and the most thermodynamically stable. Therefore, it is the most readily obtained under a variety of conditions. The chain configuration of the alpha form is transgauche, placing the fluorine and hydrogen atoms alternately on each side of the chain — the so-called ‘crankcase’ chain structure.
The beta form develops under mechanical deformation of melt-processed materials, usually at temperatures approaching the melting transitions. The beta form configuration consists of all the fluorine atoms on one side of the chain, and the hydrogen atoms on the other side) — the ‘zigzag’ chain structure.
聚偏二氟乙烯呈现为复杂的多晶型，其他合成聚合物均无此特点。聚偏二氟乙烯有四种不同的晶型：a、b、g 和 d 晶型。多晶型以不同的比例存在，与聚合过程的工艺条件有关。在工业条件下，主要为 a 和 b 晶型。
在涂料中以及在结构部件的一般熔化加工中，a 晶型占主导。它是聚偏二氟乙烯的最常见晶型，也是热力学最稳定的晶型。因此，在各种条件下最容易获得的晶型就是 a 晶型。a 晶型的链构型为反式-旁式构型，其中氟原子和氢原子交替地出现在链的两侧 — 即所谓的‘曲轴’式链结构。
当材料在熔化加工过程中发生机械变形时会形成 b 晶型，此时的温度通常为接近熔化转变温度。b 晶型的结构是：所有氟原子都位于链的同一侧，而氢原子则位于链的另一侧 — 即“Z”字形链结构。
英語 から 中国語: Hearing implant
原書のテキスト - 英語 (Page 4)
Baha Intenso™
1. Volume control
2. Electrical input
3. Battery compartment
4. Microphone
5. Program selector
6. Plastic snap connector
7. Attachment point for the safety line
8. Serial number
The Baha Intenso™ is a bone conduction sound processor and the most powerful of our head worn devices. The Baha® bone conduction system works by combining a sound processor with an abutment and a small titanium implant placed in the skull behind the ear. The system is based on a process of “osseointegration” through which living bone tissue integrates with titanium. Thus, the titanium implant becomes one with the bone allowing sound to be conducted via the skull bone directly to the cochlea and improving your hearing.
Please read this manual carefully to learn how to use and maintain your sound processor. Be sure to discuss any questions or concerns that you may have regarding hearing or use of this system with your hearing health care professional.
(Partly page 9)
Care and maintenance
Cleaning the abutment area
When the last dressing has been removed and the abutment is exposed hygiene continues to be very important.
Daily care
On a daily basis the area around the abutment should be cleaned to avoid debris build up. This build up around the base of the abutment is not a scab and must be removed. Cleaning this area is most easily done when you bath or take a shower as plenty of warm water and soap on the area will help to soften any crust that may have developed around the base of the abutment. A soft brush is provided together with your sound processor for this purpose.
(Page 15)
Accessories
Several accessories are available to enhance your sound experience in different contexts. To ensure the smooth operation of your Baha, only use Cochlear original accessories or accessories approved by Cochlear
Audio adapter
Allows direct input from personal stereos, TVs, MP3s and Hi-fi equipment.
MicroLink Baha FM-receiver
Enables the use of Phonak FM transmitters HandyMic, Easylink, Smartlink, TelCom and Campus S.
Telecoil unit
Improves sound quality and speech understanding in homes where there are personal loop systems installed and in other buildings with loop facilities.
英語 から 中国語: MEDICAL CATHETER ASSEMBLY WITH DEFLECTION PULL RING AND DISTAL TIP INTERLOCK General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療: 心臓病学
原書のテキスト - 英語 MEDICAL CATHETER ASSEMBLY WITH DEFLECTION PULL RING AND DISTAL TIP INTERLOCK
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims priority to U.S. patent application no. 11/963,441 filed on 21 December 2007 (the '441 application). The '441 application is hereby incorporated by reference as though fully set forth herein.
BACKGROUND OF INVENTION
FIELD OF INVENTION
[0002] The present invention relates to medical catheter assemblies, and in particular to medical catheter assemblies which utilize a deflection pull ring adjacent a distal tip at the distal end of the catheter shaft to bend the deflectable catheter shaft and move the distal tip in a desired direction.
THE PRIOR ART
[0003] Medical catheter assemblies used in the diagnosis or treatment of various medical abnormalities are in common use in medical facilities throughout the world. They generally include a deflectable catheter shaft that can be inserted in and extended along a suitable vein or artery of person being diagnosed or treated to a desired site; a handle actuator which supports a proximal end of the catheter shaft; a distal tip which is connected to the distal end of the catheter shaft and which includes a specialized tip element for the appropriate diagnosis or treatment; and a pull ring assembly which includes a pull ring near the distal end of the catheter shaft and pull wires which extend from the pull ring through the catheter shaft back to the handle actuator for tilting or rocking the pull ring upon manual operation of the handle actuator and consequential pulling of the pull wires, i.e., for deflecting a distal end portion of the catheter shaft with distal tip in a desired direction.
[0004] Ablation catheter assemblies are a category of medical catheter assembly used to ablate tissue, e.g., in the treatment of heart malfunctions. They can be irrigated (discharge ablation fluid in addition to ablation energy) or non-irrigated (discharge of ablation energy but not fluid). The distal tip will include a tip electrode as the specialized tip element and an energy source will be connected to their handle actuator to supply energy to the tip electrode. In irrigated catheter assemblies a fluid manifold is attached to, or is one-piece with, the tip electrode, and a fluid source is attached to their handle actuator to supply ablation fluid thereto. In either, the distal tip can include a mounting shaft which cooperates with the distal end of the adjacent deflectable catheter shaft for connection thereto.
[0005] It has been found that the operation of such medical catheter assemblies, including irrigated or non-irrigated ablation catheter assemblies, can become compromised over time with creeping of the pull ring towards the handle actuator (and away from the distal tip) due to repeated tilting or rocking thereof by the pull wires. In addition, failure of the medical catheter assemblies can occur with separation of the pull wires from the pull rings of the pull ring assemblies due to stress failure of the braze or weld joints therebetween.
[0006] It is thus an object of the present invention to provide a medical catheter assembly (including an irrigated or non-irrigated ablation catheter assembly) which is constructed such that creeping of the pull ring towards the handle actuator (and away from the distal tip) is prevented.
[0007] It is another object of the present invention to provide a medical catheter assembly (including an irrigated or non-irrigated catheter assembly) which is constructed such that stress on the connecting joints between the pull wires and pull ring is reduced, reducing failure of medical catheter assembly due to failure of the pull ring assembly.
朝鮮語 から 英語: Korean Patent Claims translation General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 輸送/運送/海運
原書のテキスト - 朝鮮語 특허청구의 범위
청구항 1
천연가스를 생산하는 생산설비와,
상기 생산설비에서 생산된 천연가스를 액화시키는 액화장치와,
상기 액화장치에 의해 액화된 LNG를 저장하는 복수개의 저장탱크와,
상기 액화장치와 상기 복수개의 저장탱크를 각각 연결하는 연결관과,
상기 연결관으로부터 분지된 분지관에 구비되어 상기 각 저장탱크의 상부로 액화된 LNG를 분사하는 복수개의 스
프레이 노즐을 포함하는 선박.
청구항 2
제 1항에 있어서,
상기 복수개의 스프레이 노즐은 상기 각 저장탱크를 형성하는 주변 벽을 따라 최상부에 설치되는 복수개의 주
스프레이 노즐(main-spray nozzle)을 포함하는 선박.
청구항 3
제 2항에 있어서,
상기 복수개의 스프레이 노즐은 각 저장탱크를 구획하는 스와시 벌크헤드(Swash Bulkhead)의 상부에 설치되는
복수개의 보조 스프레이 노즐(sub-spray nozzle)을 포함하는 선박.
청구항 4
제 3항에 있어서,
상기 보조 스프레이 노즐의 개수는 상기 주 스프레이 노즐의 개수보다 적은 것을 특징으로 하는 선박.
청구항 5
제 3항에 있어서,
상기 복수개의 보조 스프레이 노즐 중 일부는 일측 저장탱크로 LNG를 분사하도록 설치되고, 상기 복수개의 보조
스프레이 노즐 중 일부는 타측 저장탱크로 LNG를 분사하도록 설치되는 것을 특징으로 하는 선박.
청구항 6
제 1항에 있어서,
상기 저장탱크는 독립형 저장탱크인 것을 특징으로 하는 선박.
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
Claim 1
A ship, comprising:
a production facility for producing natural gas,
a liquefying device for liquefying the produced natural gas in the production facility,
a plurality of storage tanks for storing the liquefied natural gas (LNG) depending on the liquefying device,
a plurality of connecting pipes for connecting the liquefying device to the plurality of storage tanks, and
a plurality of spray nozzles on bifurcated pipes branched from the connecting pipes, for spraying the LNG above each of the storage tanks.
Claim 2
The ship as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that
the plurality of spray nozzles comprise a plurality of main-spray nozzles disposed in the topmost portion along a circumferential wall that forms each of said storage tanks.
Claim 3
The ship as claimed in claim 2, characterized in that
the plurality of nozzles comprise a plurality of sub-spray nozzles disposed above a Swash Bulkhead that isolates each of the storage tanks.
Claim 4
The ship as claimed in claim 3, characterized in that
the number of the sub-spray nozzles is smaller than the number of the main-spray nozzles.
Claim 5
The ship as claimed in claim 3, characterized in that
a portion of the plurality of sub-spray nozzles sprays LNG to the storage tanks on one side, and another portion of the plurality of sub-spray nozzles sprays LNG to the storage tanks on another side.
Claim 6
The ship as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that
the storage tanks are separate storage tanks.
英語 から 中国語: Test Procedure General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 英語 D. WASH STEP
4. NORMAL SALINE MUST BE USED WITH WHOLE BLOOD SAMPLES.
Deionized/distilled water or normal saline can be used with serum, plasma or saliva samples.
• Remove Wand from A Tube.
• Wash bulbous end and tip by using METHOD I orII:
I.SQUIRT BOTTLE METHOD
-Direct aforceful stream of the appropriate washing agent against bulbous end and tip of Wand and work up handle
-Shake off excess water.
-Repeat 5-7 times totaling approximately 8 oz. of appropriate washing agent.
II. CUP METHOD
-Perform initial rinse of Wand with a forceful stream of appropriate washing agent.
-Swirl/Swish vigorously in 100ml of appropriate washing agentfor a minimum of 30 seconds.
-Shake off excess liquid.
-Replenish liquid between Wands.
GOOD TECHNIQUES = ACCURATE RESULTS
• Whole blood and plasma samples must contain anticoagulant.
• Hemolyzed and lipemic samples may be used, however normal saline should be used in place of distilled or deionized water in step 4. Severely hemolyzed and lipemic samples may produce background color. When in doubt, obtain a better quality sample.
• Washing is the most important step. Wands cannot be overwashed. Underwashing will result in non-specific blue color development in the B Tube.
• Prolonged incubation for more than 10 minutes in step 5 may result in non-specific blue color development. Read results at 5 minutes. If no color is seen at 5 minutes, the sample is negative. Weak or suspect positives at 5 minutes may be verified by waiting up to 10 minutes.
• Do not use the test kit past the expiration date and do not intermix components from different serial numbers.
• Store kit at 2° to 7° (36° to 45°F). Allow kit to come to room temperature before use.
英語 から 中国語: Clinical study Report General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 ABSTRACT
A Phase I, single-dose, dose-escalating, safety, tolerability, and pharmacokinetics study of IDEC-114, an anti-CD80 monoclonal antibody, was conducted in 24 patients with chronic, stable, moderate to severe plaque psoriasis. Cohorts of three to five patients each were given single doses of 0.05, 0.25, 1.0, 5.0, 10.0, or 15.0 mg/kg of IDEC-114 administered as an intravenous infusion. The patient population was 71% male and 71% Caucasian, with a median age of 43 years. A favorable safety profile was observed. Sixteen of the 24 patients experienced 78 adverse events. All but one adverse event was Grade 1 or 2; the single Grade 3 event of dyspnea occurred on Study Day 43 and was not
related to the study treatment. No Grade 4 or serious adverse events were experienced
and no deaths occurred. Fifty-one events in 14 patients were considered probably,
possibly, or of unknown relationship to the study treatment. The highest incidence of
related adverse events was asthenia (29% of patients), followed by chills (25%), headache (21%), dizziness (17%), infection (13%), and fever (13%). On the day of infusion, 16 adverse events were reported in 7 patients; 15 events in 6 patients were considered related to study treatment. The frequency and severity of adverse events did not appear to be dose-related. Six infections were reported in five patients. All of the infections were Grade 1 or 2; all patients recovered. Reductions (30% - 40%) in mean lymphocyte counts
(CD3 , CD4 , CD8 , and CD19 ) were observed at all dose levels on Study Days 2 and 3 with recovery by Study Day 15. One of the 24 patients developed a detectable, but transient, anti-IDEC-114 antibody titer on 2 visit days; anti-IDEC-114 was not detectable at study exit. An enrollment “stopping rule” of 1) a single occurrence of any related Grade 3 or greater event or irreversible organ toxicity or 2) a sustained > 50% decline in three patients’ CD4 cells was not invoked. The mean Cmax and AUC of IDEC-114 were proportional to the dose administered. The serum half-life of the IDEC-114 antibody was approximately 13 days at single doses of 5.0 to 15.0 mg/kg. Preliminary evidence of clinical activity was noted in the 10.0 and 15.0 mg/kg dose groups based on the Psoriasis Severity Scale and Psoriasis Area and Severity Index. In summary, a single intravenous
infusion of IDEC-114 (0.05 to 15.0 mg/kg) was safe and well tolerated in patients with
moderate to severe plaque psoriasis.
原書のテキスト - 英語 Our plan gives you the freedom to see any Physician or other health care professional from our Network, including specialists, without a referral. With this plan, you will receive the highest level of benefits when you seek care from a network physician, facility or other health care professional. In addition, you do not have to worry about any claim forms or bills.
You also may choose to seek care outside the Network, without a referral. However, you should know that care received from a nonnetwork physician, facility or other health care professional means a higher deductible and Copayment. In addition, if you choose to seek care outside the Network, our Plan only pays a portion of those charges and it is your responsibility to pay the remainder. This amount you are required to pay, which could be significant, does not apply to the Out-of-Pocket Maximum. We recommend that you ask the non-network physician or health care professional about their billed charges before you receive care.
原書のテキスト - 英語 External Drainage and Monitoring Accessories
Description
EDM Patient Connection Line Assembly
This nondistensible patient connection line assembly (Fig. 1), fabricated of blue-striped tubing, with patient line stopcock, latex-free injection site, and red end plug, allows connection of a ventricular or lumbar drainage catheter directly to a drainage bag (Fig. 2).
EDMS Drainage Bag
The XXX Neurosurgery XXX EDMS Drainage Bag is a vented, 700 mL drainage bag with approximate volumetric markings and anti-reflux valve for use when drainage of CSF is required. The bag is provided with the XXX EDMS, the EDM Drainage Assembly, and the EDM Drainage Kits (Ventricular and Lumbar). The bag is also available separately as an individually packaged product. The drainage bag may be replaced if necessary, or may be emptied by loosening the vented port cap assembly from the drainage bag luerlock. The individually packaged drainage bag includes a braided cord. The bag may be mounted directly to the XXX EDMS panel as shown in Figure 3. If complete system use with mounting panel is not desired, the drainage bag may be suspended with the cord and connected to the patient connection line or EDM Drainage Assembly.
EDM Drainage Bags (10-pack)
As an added convenience, EDM Drainage Bags are also available in a 10-pack box. Each drainage bag is individually sterile packaged and labeled, and includes a braided cord for suspension.
XXX EDMS Pole Clamp
The XXX EDMS Pole Clamp (Fig. 4) can be used to rigidly mount the XXX EDMS to an I.V. pole, if a rigid mounting is desired. The panel bracket of the XXX EDMS fits directly into the XXX EDMS Pole Clamp. For a secure fit, the thumb screws of the pole clamp should be oriented upwards (Fig. 5). The XXX EDMS Pole Clamp is reusable and is packaged nonsterile.
Indications:
The EDM Patient Connection Line Assembly is indicated to connect an EDM catheter to the balance of a drainage and/or monitoring system.
原書のテキスト - 英語 CAMDEN Lumbar Drainage Catheter Kit
Indications
The CAMDEN Lumbar Drainage Catheter Kit is indicated for temporary access to the lumbar subarachnoid region and, when used with other Camden devices, is designed to drain cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) and other fluids of similar physical characteristics as a means of reducing increased intracranial volume and pressure.
Contraindications
This device is not designed, sold, or intended for use except as indicated.
The placement of this catheter is not indicated in patients with cerebrospinal fluid infections or disorders of the midline of the lumbosacral spinal region (i.e. spinal dysrhaphism, myelomeningoceles, or meningoceles).
Catheter placement should not be performed in the presence of cerebrospinal fluid containing debris and blood particles, as these may obstruct the narrow lumen of the catheter.
Repeated lumbar punctures may be performed to clear the cerebrospinal fluid of such debris. The catheter can be subsequently inserted.
Warnings
To avoid damage to the catheter, care must be taken not to withdraw the catheter from the needle in order to reposition it in the subarachnoid space. If the catheter must be removed, withdraw the needle and catheter simultaneously.
Infections can occur secondary to systemic infection of the drainage mechanism. Such infections can lead to arachnoiditis and are best treated by catheter removal and appropriate antibiotic therapy.
原書のテキスト - 英語 WC-22 casing heads can be furnished with female threaded bottom or slip-on weld bottoms. Standard outlets are threaded but can be furnished as flanged or studded outlets. Available options include clamp hubs, lock-down screws, and base plates. These casing heads provide interchangeability of casing hangers (WC-21 and WC-22). If a bowl protector is required, the WC-22-BP casing head is recommended with two lock-down screws in the top flange. As an alternative, a hold-down flange with lock-down screws can be used.
Pretreating tumors with manganese dioxide nanoparticles may increase the efficacy of radiation therapy, according to a new study in mice. Tumors injected with the particles grew less after irradiation than untreated tumors did (ACS Nano 2014, DOI: 10.1021/nn405773r). The nanoparticles react with hydrogen peroxide in the tumors to correct chemical conditions that make tumors aggressive and thwart the effects of radiation.
Compared to healthy tissue, tumors have an abnormal chemical environment. Their leaky vessels do a poor job carrying in oxygen and shipping out metabolic waste, so tumors tend to be oxygen-poor and build up excess acid. These conditions can in turn make tumors aggressive, and can render them resistant to radiation and anticancer drugs.
The success of radiation therapy in particular depends on the tumor’s oxygen level. Patients with poorly oxygenated tumors don’t get as much benefit from radiation therapy because the treatment relies on oxygen molecules to produce reactive species that damage cancer-cell DNA. But these patients still get the side effects. Since about half of all cancer patients are treated with radiation, making this therapy more effective—and ideally, making it more effective at low doses that decrease side effects—would help a large number of patients, says Ralph S. DaCosta, a specialist in medical imaging and radiation oncology at the Princess Margaret Cancer Center, in Toronto.
Medical researchers have experimented with ways to deliver oxygen to tumors prior to radiation therapy, such as having patients breathe in highly concentrated oxygen or dosing them with artificial blood. But these approaches have not translated well to the clinic. And none of them address other chemical imbalances in the tumor environment, DaCosta says.
So he sought help from University of Toronto pharmaceutical chemist Xiao Yu (Shirley) Wu, who has been developing manganese dioxide nanoparticles for oxygen generation inside the body. Instead of carrying oxygen, these nanoparticles produce it by reacting with hydrogen peroxide and H+ ions, both of which are abundant in tumors. The reaction consumes the particles, releasing nontoxic manganese ions. By consuming H+ ions, the reaction also raises the pH.
To test the particles’ effects on tumors, the researchers injected them into breast cancer tumors in mice. Compared to untreated mice, animals injected with the nanoparticles had 45% higher levels of oxygenated hemoglobin in the blood vessels around their tumors. Imaging with pH-sensitive fluorescent dyes confirmed a return to normal pH levels, about 7.2, in treated tumors. And the treated tumors expressed lower levels of vascular endothelial growth factor and hypoxia-inducible factor 1, two proteins associated with aggressive tumors.
翻訳 - 中国語 二氧化锰纳米粒子提高肿瘤对放射治疗的脆弱性
根据在小鼠中进行的一项新研究显示，采用二氧化锰纳米颗粒对肿瘤进行预处理可提高放射治疗的疗效。 注入粒子的肿瘤在照射后比未治疗的肿瘤生长慢（ACS Nano 2014, DOI: 10.1021/nn405773r）。 在肿瘤中，纳米颗粒与过氧化氢发生反应，从而修正使肿瘤具有侵袭性并阻碍放射作用的化学环境条件。
与健康组织相比，肿瘤具有异常的化学环境。 其渗漏的血管不能好好地携入氧气和运出代谢废物，因此，肿瘤往往是贫氧的并积有多余的酸。 这些环境条件反过来又使肿瘤具有侵袭性，并可使肿瘤对放射和抗癌药物产生抗性。
放射治疗的成功尤其要依赖于肿瘤的氧水平。 肿瘤氧合差的患者不能从放射治疗中获取多少利益，这是因为治疗要依赖氧分子产生活性物质，去破坏肿瘤细胞的DNA。 但这些患者仍然会有副作用。 多伦多玛嘉烈癌症中心（Princess Margaret Cancer Center）医学影像和放射肿瘤学专家Ralph S. DaCosta说，由于所有癌症患者中约一半采用放射治疗，如果能够使这一疗法更有效——而较理想的是，更有效但低剂量以减少副作用——这将可帮助到大量的患者。
DaCosta说，医学研究人员已经尝试了各种办法在放射治疗前将氧输送到肿瘤，例如让患者吸入高浓度氧，或给他们输入人造血液。 但这些方法还没有很好地转化到临床中。 上述所有方法都不能解决肿瘤环境中其他化学物质不均衡的问题。
于是，DaCosta向多伦多大学（University of Toronto）的医药化学家Xiao Yu (Shirley) Wu寻求帮助，后者一直从事开发二氧化锰纳米粒子用于体内生成氧。 这些纳米颗粒并不携带氧，而是通过与过氧化氢和H+离子发生反应而产生氧气，该二者在肿瘤中都很丰富。 该反应消耗粒子，释放出无毒的锰离子。 该反应也通过消耗H+离子提高pH值。
为了测试这些粒子对肿瘤的影响，研究人员将粒子注射到小鼠的乳腺癌肿瘤中。 与未治疗的小鼠相比，注入纳米粒子的动物肿瘤周围血管中的氧合血红蛋白水平提高了45%。 pH敏感荧光染料成像证实，接受过治疗的肿瘤pH值恢复至正常水平，约为7.2。 并且侵袭性肿瘤相关的两种蛋白，即血管内皮细胞生长因子及低氧诱导因子1，在接受过治疗的肿瘤中表达水平较低。
原書のテキスト - 英語 Stem Seal
The leak-proof integrity of the valve is further enhanced by a welded bonnet design and Chevron V-ring packing that can be adjusted by a simple turn of the stem nut. Leak-free stem sealing is provided by the rings of PTFE V-ring or graphoil packing that sit on a shoulder machined on the blowout-proof stem, allowing the packing and stem to move as a unit during thermal cycles. In addition, the packing is live-loaded, retained by self compensating belleville spring washers and a packing adjustment nut. These features coupled with close tolerance machining and finish of the packing bore, provide maximum stem seal life with the minimum maintenance.
翻訳 - 中国語 阀杆密封
阀门的防漏完好性通过焊接阀帽设计和 Chevron V 形环封填进一步增强，封填的调节可通过简单地转动阀杆螺母来进行。阀杆防漏密封通过 PTFE V 形环或 graphoil 封填来实现，封填物安放在防脱出阀杆上机加工而成的凸肩上，使封填物和阀杆在热循环过程中作为一个单元整体移动。此外，封填物所受的是活负荷，并通过自补偿贝氏弹簧垫圈和封填调节螺母进行固定。这些特征再结合封填孔的紧密公差机加工和表面处理，使阀杆密封只需极少的维护即可达到最长的寿命。
翻訳 - 英語 3. Clinical Symptoms
What is often seen in clinical practice is that fatty liver is caused by excessive alcohol consumption, obesity, and diabetes. Alcoholic fatty liver is described separately in this special issue, so will not be stated here.
Fatty liver has no special symptoms and is often asymptomatic. Anorexia, abdominal fullness, easy tiredness, right upper abdominal pain, etc. are seen. Depending on the underlying diseases, symptoms unique to the underlying diseases are seen, i.e. the symptoms of diabetes such as obesity, thirsty and polyuria, and symptoms of excessive adrenocortical hormone such as full moon-like facial features and skin streaks.
Objective symptoms include hepatomegaly with a blunted margin and smooth surface, and sometimes complaints of tenderness.
4. Laboratory Findings
There are no hepatic function tests specific to fatty liver, but BSP will show abnormal retention rate, and serum cholinesterase value will show a high value. Serum GOT and GPT increase in half to 2/3 of patents. Serum bilirubin, serum protein and serum A1-P are usually normal. Compared with chronic hepatitis, cases of high colloid reaction are also few 2).
5. Diagnosis
With reference to the previous history of diabetes, obesity and drug use, if there is hepatoma or the above-mentioned laboratory findings, fatty liver will be suspected, but liver biopsy is required to establish the diagnosis.
Along with advances in imaging diagnostic methods in recent years, attempts have been made to diagnose fatty liver by ultrasound and CT examinations, which have drawn attention as new diagnostic methods replacing liver biopsy.
The characteristic of ultrasonic findings of fatty liver is that the echo level gets higher as it is known as bright liver 3). The echo level is judged by comparison with the echo level of the kidneys or spleen that is stabilized at a relatively constant level. In addition, the intrahepatic vascular system becomes unclear, and the hepatic deep echo attenuates.
When fat accumulates in the liver, the absorption of X-rays weakens and the CT value of the liver decreases, so it is diagnosed based on the change in the CT value. Actually, the liver to spleen ratio of CT values is used, and fatty liver is often present when the ratio is 0.9 or less 4).
6. Treatment
In many cases, fatty liver is a reversible and benign disease, except for severe cases such as gestational acute fatty liver. The principle of treatment is to eliminate the cause, treat the causative disease, and also give a diet therapy and exercise therapy. The so-called anti-fatty liver drugs are used as supplements and are expected to promote improvement of fatty liver or are administered when the cause is unknown.
Diffuse fat accumulation is seen in approximately half of patents with obesity 5), but the degree of obesity and the degree of fat accumulation may not be consistent. Weight loss of 2~3 kg per in 1 month is practiced. Small intestine bypass surgery such as jejuno-ilealstomy may be performed for highly obese patients, but after surgery, starting with fatty liver, a liver disorder may be developed, presenting color tissue images similar to the findings in alcoholic hepatitis such as cell infiltration, hepatocellular necrosis, Mallory body, fibrosis etc. 6). Fatty acids are mobilized from peripheral adipose tissues, and secondary bile acids such as toxin from bacteria in the intestinal tract, which becomes a blind loop, and lithocholic acid are absorbed, which is assumed to be the mechanism of developing the liver disorder. Oral amino acid preparation or IVH will be tried, and if it is ineffective, surgery will be performed again to remove the by-pass.
Approximately 25% of fatty liver cases are caused by diabetes, and fatty liver is seen in about 50% of diabetic patients, many of whom also have obesity. The incidence of fatty liver in young population with Type I diabetes is as low as 4.5% 7). It is not related to the degree of fat deposition, duration of diabetes and control status. Diet therapy, exercise therapy, and treatment of diabetes by oral hypoglycemic agent shall be performed.
Fatty liver is seen when Cushing syndrome is increasing endogenous corticosteroids or when steroids are administered at high doses for therapeutic purposes. This is considered to be caused by an increase in the supply of fatty acids to the liver due to increased fat decomposition in the periphery. There are strict indications for adrenocortical hormone, and caution must be exercised when the drug is administered at high doses for a long time.
Gestational acute fatty liver may develop nausea, vomiting and jaundice at the end of pregnancy, without histologically degenerative necrosis of hepatocytes. It is a fatty liver in the center of the lobe, and different from the cases of alcoholic lipid droplets and diabetes, small droplets exist around the nucleus 8). Although it is a relatively rare disease, it causes DIC and is often fatal. Its cause is unknown, but heparin therapy, glucagon/insulin therapy, plasma exchange, etc. are carried out based on fulminant hepatitis.
As a condition with accumulation of small lipid droplets, Reye syndrome9) is a fatty liver showing clinical findings very similar to those of gestational acute fatty liver and is seen when tetracycline 10) and its derivatives are intravenously injected at high doses. Reye syndrome is a common disease in children aged 4~12 years and is a disease with unknown cause, characterized by acute cerebral disorder and fatty liver 9). Its main treatments are early diagnosis and appropriate treatment of encephalopathy.
/5
Acute fatty liver may occur when a tetracycline antibiotic is intravenously given at 2 g or more per 1 day 10). Clinical symptoms and pathological findings are similar to those of gestational acute fatty liver except for jaundice. It may develop in both males and females other than pregnancy, but caution should be exercised when administering tetracycline drugs to pregnant women. These drugs should be discontinued immediately if there is any sign of hepatotoxicity.
英語 から 日本語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: テレコミュニケーション
原書のテキスト - 英語
Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes.
英語 から 朝鮮語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: 工学(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes.
翻訳 - 朝鮮語 폴리머를 가능성으로 전환하기
AS81914 뒤얽힌 튜브
OPIE 부스 I-33에서 왜 AS81914 뒤얽힌 튜브 이 섬유를 마모와 고열로부터 보호하기 위한 이상적인 유연한 도관인지 알아보세요. 본 제품은 피복 재료에 미치는 마찰이 적으며 여러 가지의 압출 수지, 채색 옵션 및 크기에 이용할 수 있습니다.
英語 から 中国語: Turning polymers into possibilities General field: マーケティング Detailed field: テレコミュニケーション
原書のテキスト - 英語 Turning polymers into possibilities
AS81914 Convoluted Tubing
Drop by OPIE Booth I-33 to discover why AS81914 Convoluted Tubing is the ideal flexible conduit for protecting fibers from abrasion and high temperatures. This product offers low friction for sheathing and is available in multiple extruded resins, coloring options and sizes.
翻訳 - 英語 Description of diagnosis and treatment:
Upon admission, patient completed had relevant auxiliary exams. On Aug. 6, 2015, Uuterine fibroidectomy + bilateral ovarian cystectomy + left mesosalpinx cystectomy + pelvic endometriosis electrocautery was were performed successfully. Post-op supportive treatment such as fluid infusion was given. Patient’s recovery was good. Incision wound was I/A. Patient was discharged.
Condition upon discharge
Patient was conscious and calm. Surgical wound was healing well.
Date of surgery: Aug. 6, 2015
Anesthesia method: general anesthesia
Name of surgery: Uterine fibroidectomy + bilateral ovarian cystectomy + left mesosalpinx cystectomy + pelvic endometriosis electrocautery
日本語 から 英語: EASY-TO-USE ANESTHESIA MACHINE EQUIPPED WITH ELECTRONIC ANESTHETIC GAS DELIVERY DEVICE General field: 医療 Detailed field: 工学(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Stability of Electronically Controlled Vaporizer
Since the pump used for the electronically controlled vaporizer is highly accurate, the accuracy of anesthetic gas delivery depends only on the accuracy of gas flow measurement. Like the conventional vaporizers, the influences due to changes in flow rate, temperature, etc., are not received from the structure.
(1) Flow rate changes
In terms of flow rate measurement, the flow rate is precisely measured in the range of 0.01~10.5 L/min for each gas, so there is no influence of change in the flow rate within the practical range.
(2) Temperature changes
Because anesthetic is directly placed in the vaporization chamber, it is not affected by room temperature.
(3) Atmospheric pressure changes
The flow sensor provides pressure compensation. Also, since there is no bypass passage like in a conventional vaporizer, even if an intermittent pressure is applied, it has no influence.
(4) Changes in the carrier gas composition
Basically, there is no influence from the gas composition. Also, since only the necessary anesthetic flows into the vaporization chamber in a real-time manner and no anesthetic is accumulated in the vaporization chamber, there is no dissolution of nitrous oxide in the anesthetic. As a result, the electronically controlled vaporizer is not influenced by temperature and atmospheric pressure over a wide range of flow rate, and it can maintain accuracy stably.
中国語 から 英語: A DEVICE FOR INCREASING DISSOLVED OXYGEN IN INSTANT TEA General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Description
A Device for Increasing Dissolved Oxygen in Instant Tea
Technical Field
[0001]
The present utility model relates to a device for producing and processing instant tea, and in particular to a device for increasing dissolved oxygen in instant tea.
Background Art
[0002]
During the production of instant tea, in order to improve the color of the tea beverage and to ensure the stability of the color of the tea beverage made from tea powder, it is necessary to introduce a certain amount of oxygen into the tea under certain conditions so that polyphenols and other substances in the tea leaves can be effectively oxidized into chromogenic ingredients such as theaflavins and thearubigins to produce high-quality instant tea. To do this, it is important to efficiently and stably supply oxygen to the tea as this will determine the quality of the tea beverage. The traditional method is to directly introduce oxygen into the liquid reservoir but since it is very difficult to dissolve all the oxygen in the tea within a limited time so most of the oxygen comes out of the surface of the tea beverage and volatilizes into the air before it can be dissolved to react with polyphenols in the tea, leading to much waste of oxygen, and as a result, the amount of dissolved oxygen is small and the oxygen utilization rate is low, which not only increases the production costs, but is also difficult to obtain high-quality tea with stable color.
[0003]
Some techniques and methods of the prior art can increase dissolved oxygen, and one example is the capillary absorptive oxygenator (ZL99200748.2) used by Tianjin Jiahua Company, which improves the oxygenation efficiency and effects by introducing oxygen through micropores in the capillary wall so as to be absorbed by water, but this method is only applicable to pure water and is not applicable to a reaction system requiring oxygen, such as tea; another example is the gas mixing device (ZL200310119026.X) used by Dalian Guanghui Gas Equipment Co., Ltd. for producing saturated dissolved oxygen to increase oxygen in aquaculture water, but this device is only applicable to aquaculture water and pure water and cannot satisfy the requirements on oxygenating equipment for use in mass industrial production.
中国語 から 英語: STUDY ON PREPARATION OF MAGNESIUM HYDROXIDE FROM BITTER EARTH – AMMONIUM SULFATE BY CIRCULATION METHOD General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 5 Conclusions
1. A large number of tests proved that it is totally feasible to prepare Mg(OH)2 through circulation method by preparing qualified MgSO4 solution from magnesia and ammonium sulfate, absorbing evaporated ammonia with the MgSO4 solution, and adding a suitable amount of concentrated ammonia. During this circulation process, the recovery rate of MgO in magnesia was greater than 70%, and the recovery rate of ammonia reached 68%.
2. In this process, the MgSO4 solution obtained was filtered to obtain qualified MgSO4 solution without the need for impurity removal. Tests showed that this MgSO4 solution resulted in a product purity greater than 96%. It has practical meaning from the perspective of mass production, because it provides reference for the rational utilization of magnesia resource and for the development of new methods for Mg(OH)2 preparation.
中国語 から 英語: Study on the Transformation of Lulicon from Z-Configuration to E-Configuration General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 1 Introduction
Luliconazole is an imidazole antifungal drug developed by Nihon Nohyaku Co., Ltd. The company had an early start on the non-clinical trials as well as the Phase I clinical trial and the first stage of Phase II clinical trial of the cream, and later, stopped the development process due to strategic reasons. This drug was approved in June 2005, and was marketed under the trade name of ルリコン (Lulicon) since July 20, 2005. Both the cream and lotion have the strength of 1% and are used for the following fungal infections: tinea (foot tinea, body tinea, and femoral tinea) and Candida infections (fingers erosive disease, rubbing damage, and purpura). Compared with prior anti-fungal drugs, the greatest advantages of luliconazole are high skin retention rate, short medication cycle (half of that for common drugs), good efficacy and better prevention of relapse, so it has great competitiveness.
In the synthesis process of luliconazole[1-4], there are two configurations of E and Z, in which the E-configuration has antifungal effects, and the Z-configuration has no efficacy but its use is unavoidable in synthesis process and its content is not less than 30%. If the Z-isomer (impurity) formed during the synthesis can be transformed into E- configuration (luliconazole), not only can the purification of luliconazole be facilitated, but also the configuration transformation will increase the yield of luliconazole, which will help reduce the production cost.
中国語 から 英語: Great brands are changing customer expectations General field: マーケティング Detailed field: マーケティング/市場調査
翻訳 - 英語 Great brands are changing customer expectations… Things are changing in the market place… the best brands are taking things to a whole new level
The best brands offer a great customer experience… we see it more and more in brands like Apple and Starbucks
Mere satisfaction is no longer enough… it simply is not enough anymore to just meet a customer’s needs… you have to go deeper… you have to connect with them and meet their unexpressed needs
Customer engagement is the new standard of excellence… engagement means connecting with people on an emotional level and building a relationship with them that leads to loyalty and advocacy
Engaged customers mean less discounting… because when we really connect with people… emotionally… they feel good and they value that connection more than they demand a discount
Only engaged employees can create engaged customers… because it’s the employee who creates the connection… and you will never have a customer who is more engaged than the employee is engaged
Creating a great customer experience will be the big differentiator … this is going to be one of the most important initiatives we focus on going forward. We now have the best cars and trucks we’ve ever had as a company…
Now is the time to take our consumer experience to the next level.
And if we get this right… it’ll result in greater customer loyalty and word of mouth advocacy.
日本語 から 英語: medical report General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Both oil and cream are applied to the nails. How many times are them applied in total? I see. Try to apply a little more. The diuretic is used for swelling, and the medication is still maintained at present.
There was a line or dry feeling in the nails, but there were no symptoms of nail coming off. Frozen gloves are introduced, but it is not used because of the uncomfortably chilly feeling due to peripheral neuropathy G1. I will observe the symptoms to see if frozen gloves could be introduced. For constipation, the supporting medicine is adjusted so that there is defecation every day and this care method is used as support. Lacrimation G1. There is facial erythema in addition to lacrimation, and mechanical stimulus such as wiping would be a factor to promote pigmentation of erythema in such place as cheeks, so advice is given on being careful in wiping and cleaning. There was no shortness of breath or motivation.
日本語 から 英語: Japan Telecommunications Patent General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: テレコミュニケーション
翻訳 - 英語 • Claim 1
• Cited document 2
• Remarks
A CDMA receiving apparatus is described in cited example 2, comprising a correlation value data generation means which generates correlation value data which multiplies a spread code which corresponds to spread modulation being conducted in advance and a predetermined pattern by a reception multiplex signal, a means for calculating the ratio of a desired wave level to an interference wave level which calculates the ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level of a demodulation signal of said reception multiplex signal and a reception timing correcting means (determining the next measurement time) which corrects the reception timing of said reception multiplex signal based on said correlation value data and said ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level, the receiving apparatus being substantially identical to the invention according to claim 1 of the present application.
• Claim 1
• Cited document 3
• Remarks
A CDMA receiving apparatus is described in cited document 3, comprising a correlation value data generation means which generates correlation value data which multiplies a spread code which corresponds to spread modulation being conducted in advance and a predetermined pattern by a reception multiplex signal, a means for calculating the ratio of a desired wave level to an interference wave level which calculates the ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level of a demodulation signal of said reception multiplex signal and a reception timing correcting means (by changing the oversampling speed) which corrects the reception timing of said reception multiplex signal based on said correlation value data and said ratio of the desired wave level to the interference wave level, the receiving apparatus being substantially identical to the invention according to claim 1 of the present application.
日本語 から 英語: Patient Medical Record (Outpatient) General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Pediatric Resident Note
[Previous medical history]
# 38 weeks +6 days, 3475 g, APgar 8/9
# Milk allergy
At age of 3 days, mucous blood in stool x 2
At age of 18 days, blood in stool occurs again
At age of 26 days, Elental P + breast milk
At age of 54 days, ALST: positive Casein, lactoferrin and α-lactalbumin
At age of 68 days, breastfeeding resumed.
# Vaccination
Hib (1), Prevenar (1), DTap-HepB-IPV (1), Rota (1)
[Oral medications]
No
[Social history]
# Nutrition
Dissolve 40 g of Elental P in 300 ml water x 7 times
Breast milk has been given about 5 times, but not much
# 4 people living in the family: parents, elder brother aged 4 years
#sick contact (+): The elder brother has had a cold from last week.
[History of present illness]
The child's cough and sneezing were increased since last week, and the patients were worried about this, but the child had good vitality. The child was also taking Elental and was under observation.
Today, when the patient paid an outpatient visit to Dr. Arakaki as scheduled and was observed with a fever of 38 degrees by chance, and emergency consultation was requested.
The child always has eye discharge, but had a little more than usual this time. The patient had a small amount of white nasal fluid. The child coughed up sputum.
Difficulty in sleep (+): The child can not sleep for a long time because of the cough.
Drinking Elental
No difficulty in breathing
Good general condition, waking up with stimulation
HR 144, RR 42, SPO2 99%, BT 40.2
Head and neck: Flat anterior fontanel, a/i (-), conjunctival congestion (-), much eye discharge in the left eye, pharyngeal redness (-), white coating (-), LN swelling (-), tympanic membrane redness (- ) Chest: w/c (-), no difference between the left and right, sputum accumulation (-), regular, murmur (-)
Abdomen: Liver and spleen swelling (-), slightly distended and soft, no tenderness
Limbs: rash (-), edema (-)
WBC 7600 (Mono 12.9%), Hb 9.6, Plt 45.6,
CRP 0.81, Procalcitonin 0.10
Urinary WBC
翻訳 - 英語 Brief medical history:
Right chest pain, generalized weakness, liver space-occupying lesion, and history of hepatitis B.
Examination findings:
In a fasting state, 18F-FDG was intravenously injected, and the PET/CT tomography was performed for the whole body after resting, which showed:
The brain had normal shape and structure with no abnormal density shadows in the cerebral parenchyma, and no abnormality in FDG metabolism. No widening was seen in the cerebral ventricles, sulci, fissures or cistern; no abnormality was found in the local density or FDG uptake; no shift was found in the midline structure. No significant abnormality was found in the skull bone and no increase was found in FDG uptake.
Bilateral eyeballs had normal shape and contour, with a clear posterior eyeball structure, symmetrical bilateral optic nerves, and no abnormality in FDG uptake. No thickening was found in the paranasal sinus mucosa with intact sinus wall. The nasal septum had no deflection; no significant thickening was found in the nasal mucosa; no abnormality was found in FDG uptake.
No thickening was found in the nasopharyngeal wall; no abnormality was found in FDG uptake; bilateral pharyngeal recesses were symmetrical with no stenosis of the opening of eustachian tube; the infratemporal fossa and pterygopalatine fossa had a normal structure with no abnormality in FDG uptake. No abnormalities were found in the shape and structure of bilateral palatal tonsils and laryngopharynx, with a clear parapharyngeal space. No abnormalities were found in the size, shape and density of bilateral submandibular glands and parotid glands, with physiological intake of FDG.
The thyroid gland had a normal shape and size and uniform density, with no abnormality found in FDG uptake.
Several small lymph nodes were seen in bilateral deep cervical spaces and submandibular spaces, with no abnormality found in FDG uptake.
The thorax was bilaterally symmetric; a few cord-like shadows were seen in bilateral lungs, with no abnormality found in FDG metabolism; a small nodule with the length of 0.3 cm was seen beside the oblique fissure of the right lower lobe, with no abnormality in FDG metabolism; no abnormal density shadows were seen in the remaining lung field, with no abnormality in FDG uptake. The left pleura was a little thickened with no abnormality in FDG uptake. The trachea was located in the center, and the trachea and the bronchial lumens of each lobe and segment were patent with no significant thickening of walls and no significant stenosis of lumen. No significant enlargement shadows were seen in bilateral hilar and mediastinal lymph nodes, and no significant increase was observed in FDG uptake. The heart shadow size was within the normal range, and the myocardial FDG showed normal physiological uptake. No pericardial thickening or pericardial effusion was found.
The liver had an irregular countour; an irregular low-density mass was seen in the right posterior lobe of the liver, which was sized about 11.5×9.1 cm with an ill-defined border and an increased FDG uptake and SUVmax = 5.3; the portal trunk and right branch were thickened with increased FDG uptake and SUVmax = 3.5. No dilation was found in the intra- and extrahepatic bile ducts.
The gallbladder had a normal shape and size, with slightly thickened gallbladder wall, and no positive stones and significant masses seen, and no abnormality in local FDG uptake.
The pancreas had a clear contour with normal shape and size, with significant abnormal density shadows observed, and with clear surrounding space, no widening of pancreatic duct and no abnormality in FDG uptake.
The spleen had slightly increased volume, occupying about 8 costal units, with no abnormality in density and FDG uptake.
Bilateral kidneys had normal shape and size, with no localized protrusion found in the renal margin. The plain CT scan showed no significant abnormal density shadows in the parenchyma and no significant abnormal FDG uptake. No widening was observed in bilateral pelvis, calyces and ureters; no positive stone shadows were seen in local area; no significant abnormality was seen in FDG uptake.
The perirenal space was clear, and the left adrenal gland was slightly thickened, with no abnormality in FDG metabolism; the right adrenal gland had normal shape, size and density, with no abnormality found in local FDG uptake.
No esophageal dilatation was observed and no increase of FDG uptake was found in local wall. The gastric filling was not satisfactory with no significant thickening or mass-like changes found in gastric wall; no significant abnormality was found in FDG uptake. The intestinal filling was not satisfactory, with no local mass found; no significant abnormality was found in FDG uptake.
Multiple enlarged lymph nodes were found at the lesser omental sac and hepatic portal part, between portal vena cava and around the head of pancreas, and had the maximum short diameter of approximately 1.3 cm, with no abnormality in FDG metabolism. The right upper abdominal omentum was slightly thickened with mild FDG uptake and SUVmax=2.1. No effusion was found in the abdominal or pelvic cavity.
The prostate had a normal shape and size, with basically normal FDG uptake. No filling of bladder was found, with no positive stones and significant masses in the bladder.
The spine had a normal sequence, with a little bone hyperplasia of some vertebral margins and vertebral facet joint processes, and no abnormality in FDG uptake.
Imaging Diagnosis:
1. Irregular low-density mass in the right posterior lobe of liver, with uneven increase of FDG uptake, which is considered with a high possibility of malignant tumor and primary liver cancer, and a high possibility of cancer thrombus formation at the portal trunk and right branch. Please diagnose it along with enhanced MR. There is a possibility of multiple lymph node metastasis in the abdominal cavity and retroperitoneum. There is a slight thickening of right upper abdominal omentum and mild FDG uptake, which is considered with a possibility of metastasis, and follow-up with CT is recommended.
2. Chronic cholecystitis. Splenomegaly. A high possibility of left adrenal hyperplasia.
3. A few old lesions in bilateral lungs; chronic inflammatory nodules beside the oblique fissures in the lower lobe of right lung; slight thickening of the left thoracic cavity.
4. Mild bone hyperplasia of cervical, thoracic and lumbar spines.
5. Inflammatory lymph nodes in bilateral deep cervical spaces and submandibular spaces. No abnormality is found in brain FDG metabolism.
中国語 から 英語: Distribution Agreement General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 契約
翻訳 - 英語 Distribution Agreement
Parties to the Agreement:
Company Limited (hereinafter referred to as Party A)
Company Limited (hereinafter referred to as Party B)
Party A authorizes Party B to sell and distribute Party A’s products through a store on the following terms and conditions:
I. Scope of Distributorship
Party A agrees and authorizes Party B to sell Party A’s products through a physical store managed by Party B during the term of this Agreement in Taiwan (hereinafter referred to as the “distribution region”). The store address is as follows:
In the event that the above-named store will change its location or name or have a redo, Party B shall notify Party A in advance. If Party B intends to add a store to sell Party A’s products, prior consent of Party A must be obtained.
II. Subject Matter for the Distribution
Party A authorizes Party B to sell its products listed in Annex 1 (hereinafter referred to as “Party A’s products”). The information listed in Annex 1, including but not limited to, product name, original manufacturer commodity No., size and material of a product, is a part of this Agreement, and any change to such information, including but not limited to, revision, deletion or addition, shall have no effect unless it has been agreed upon in writing by both parties.
III. Agreement on Retail Prices
Party A may provide Party B with recommended retail prices of the products which Party A authorizes Party B to sell.
Party B agrees to post the retail prices recommended by Party A to consumers at the point of sale.
When Party A changes the recommended retail prices, Party B shall make the adjustment at the same time.
Party B agrees not to include Party A’s products in any loyalty cards, membership cards, credit cards, spending cards or any other form of membership events, membership interests or cardholder events where fixed discounts are offered to retail consumers.
IV. Marketing and Commodity Inventory Supply
1. Party B sells products of Party A and bears all the costs in connection with the marketing hereof.
2. Party B shall obtain permission from Party A with respect to the way in which Party A’s products sold in the above-named point of sale shall be exhibited, displayed, priced and described in order to maintain the brand image and product images of Party A.
3. Party B must notify Party A in advance if there is any sale event involving Party A’s products.
4. Party B’s any advertisements, marketing brochures, documents and images of Party A’s products as well as any text, images or photos involving Party A’s products for use on Party B’s website or at its direct-sale store shall be made with Party A’s prior consent.
5. Party A may deliver the goods free of charge if the amount of an order or a purchase order placed by Party B reaches TWD 20,000 (excluding taxes).
6. After Party A receives a purchase order from Party B and the purchase order is determined to comply with the provisions herein upon examination by Party A, Party A shall notify Party B of the quantity that can be shipped within three workdays and deliver, at its own expense, to the store designated by Party B within five workdays thereafter.
7. Party A shall provide the goods in the standard original package of the brand.
8. Party B shall bear the delivery costs and other costs arising from sales of Party A’s products to consumers.
9. Party A may inquire Party B about information on the quantity of Party A’s products that have been sold.
V. Price and Terms and Conditions of Payment for Goods
Unless otherwise specified in Annex 1, the purchase price provided to Party B is 60% (including taxes) of the retail price offered by Party A and only applies to the products listed in Annex 1. The products listed in Annex 1 may be added, deleted or adjusted at any time if agreed upon by both parties during the term of this Agreement. Both Party A and Party B shall settle the payment and complete the reconciliation at the end of the month for the goods purposed by Party B in that month, and then Party A shall issue an invoice dated as the last day of the month. Party B agrees to pay Party A for all the goods purchased in the previous month within 30 days from the first day of the following month.
Party B shall pay Party A by remittance or sight bill.
中国語 から 英語: Technical Research and Development (Cooperation) Contract General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 法: 契約
Technical Research and Development (Cooperation) Contract
Project name: XXX Technical Support
Party A: XXX Company Limited
Party B: XXX Company Limited (representing XXX project)
Party C: N/A
Date of signing: March 2012
Place of signing: Changchun, China
Validity period: 3 years
Printed by the Ministry of Science and Technology of the People’s Republic of China
The parties herein reach the following agreement concerning matters of the project for development of XXX platform for observing by the parties, through negotiation on equal terms by truly and fully expressing their respective wishes and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Law of the People’s Republic of China.
Article 1 The requirements of the research and development cooperation project under this Contract are as follows:
Article 2 The parties hereto are respectively responsible for the following work in the research and development project:
Article 3 To ensure that this Contract can be fully performed, the parties hereto confirm that the following method will be adopted to organize, manage and coordinate the research and development work: Party B shall be fully responsible for the activities in connection with the development of XXX platform and use qualified, experienced and capable personnel to implement the project. Without the written consent of Party A, Party B shall not subcontract the work under this Contract to any third party. Party B shall designate a contact person in writing, who is authorized to contact Party A and is responsible for coordinating the matters hereunder, and particularly, the designated contact person shall serve on the project management team; as required under this Contract, Party A shall fulfill all duties, obligations and responsibilities it undertakes hereunder and designate a contact person in writing, who is authorized to contact Party B and is responsible for the matters hereunder, and particularly, the designated contact person shall serve on the project management team.
Article 4 The parties hereto acknowledge that they will provide the following technical materials and conditions for the research and development work of the project under this Contract.
Article 5 The parties hereto acknowledge that they will provide or pay the research and development fund and other investments of the project under this Contract.
Party A:
Party B:
Party C:
Article 6 The party that provides technology as its investment shall guarantee that the technology it provides does not infringe upon lawful rights and interests of any third person. In the event that any third person accuses one or more parties hereto of infringement resulting from implementation of the technology, the party that provides the technology shall provide reasonable assistance with respect to such claim. In the event that the final court ruling decides that any devices, machines, systems or products deriving from the prospect information (or a part thereof) created by the service or the party infringe upon intellectual property rights of a third party, the accused party may decide at its own discretion and expense: (i) to change, modify or adjust the devices, machines, systems or products deriving from the prospect information created by the service or the party so that the devices, machines, systems or products deriving from the prospect information or a part hereof created by the service or party will no longer infringe upon said rights; or (ii) acquire the right infringement part of the devices, machines, systems or products deriving from the prospect information created by the service or by Party B so that Party A can continued to use the devices, machines, systems or products. In any circumstance, the total amount of any compensation, cost, and/or licensing fee or loyalties to be paid by the party hereto under this clause shall be within the limit of the total contract price.
日本語 から 英語: MECHANISM OF ACTION FOR IMMUNOTHERAPY DRUGS General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 5. Cellular immunotherapy and immune gene therapy
As described in the above, the tumor cells establish a mechanism escaping the immune surveillance in the body of a cancer patient and the tumor cells are in an immunological unresponsiveness state or immunologically tolerant state. Moreover, an advanced cancer patient will show a state of generally decreased immunocompetence. Because no proper immune response could be expected in the body of patients under such a condition, a therapy was considered wherein immunocompetent cells were taken out of the body and cultured under a proper condition and then they were returned to the patient. It is called cellular immunotherapy. During the in-vitro culture of the cells, if a specific gene is introduced and expressed, it becomes a genetic immunotherapy.
The cellular immunotherapies are roughly divided into those being referred to as ‘adoptive immunotherapies’ using the immunologic effector cells, such as NK cells, NKT cells and CTLs, which is based on the same idea as the passive immunotherapy, and those of active immunotherapies using the cells participating in the immunoregulation such as dendritic cells.
The adoptive immunotherapy uses NK cells (or LAK cells activated by the cytokine represented by IL-2). Those using CTLs have been actively studied since the 1980s. It is found that those using LAK cells having no antigen specificity have only a limited effect on limited types of tumors such as malignant melanoma and renal cell cancer. Various methods of adding the means of providing tumor selectivity are studied for their effects. Specifically, the methods such as selectively proliferating the tumor-specific T-cells existing originally in the patient’s body and artificially causing the attack target of the T-cells to become tumor specific by introducing a gene are developed, and their clinical trials are being carried out.
/6
In these methods, pre-treatments (systemic chemotherapy and radiation exposure) where the transfused cells can live for a long time in vivo were often performed 13). In addition, early clinical trials of these methods using NKT cells are being carried out mainly in Japan now and the result is being awaited.
The dendritic cell therapy is different from the adoptive immunotherapy mentioned above and it prepares and utilizes a large quantity of effector cells to attack the tumor. It is a method of preparing and administering the dendritic cells having the function of controlling the directivity and intensity of the immune response in vitro. Various antigens were used as the target antigens such as tumor cells or synthesized proteins or peptides, etc. 14) The result showed that the safety was mostly guaranteed, and the immune response could be induced. However, researchers found that it was difficult to describe the effects in an integrated way because their characteristics and quality differed greatly. Nevertheless, antigens demonstrating effects were found in Phase III studies 15) and their further study is expected.
6. Tumor immunotherapy based on other immune mechanisms
As the fundamental immunology researches progress, several immunotherapies based on other mechanisms than those described above are also developed and their fundamental or preclinical developments are being carried out.
The therapy by using the inhibitory antibody milk-fat-globule-EGF-factor 8 (MFG-E8) being studies by the authors is one of these immunotherapies. The authors found that it was possible that, the original structure of not inducing useless immune response during efficient removal of normal cells which fell in apoptosis might also be used by the tumor cells. As a result, it was noted that, if the ‘eat-me’ signals, as a part of the important process of the mechanism of removing the apoptotic cells, particularly block the functions of MFG-E8 through an antibody, an effective immune response against the tumor cells 16) could be evoked. Now, further developments for clinical applications are being carried out 17).
7. Establishment of tumor immunotherapy
Now, the fundamental immunology researches are being conducted quickly and are accelerated. In order to efficiently and scientifically conduct clinical trials of tumor immunotherapies based on these results, the relevant mechanisms must be understood. A continuous and two-way information exchange between the fundamental researches and clinical researches is likely to become more and more important.
中国語 から 英語: TRANSPLANTATION OF HUMAN UMBILICAL CORD BLOOD STEM CELLS IMPROVING NEUROLOGICAL FUNCTION RECOVERY AFTER SPINAL CORD INJURY IN RATS General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 Transplantation of nervous cells has been used to investigate and improve the functional recovery from nerve injury [1]. Embryonic stem cells transplanted into different parts of cerebrospinal tissues can differentiate into different tissue phenotypes [2], and such transplantation has an amazing therapeutic effect on neurodegenerative changes, cerebral spinal cord injury and cerebral ischemic infarction [3, 4]. However, its clinical application has been greatly limited due to ethical and moral issues. Therefore, it is important to replace the embryonic tissue with another stem cell source in the nerve transplantation treatment of neurological disorders. Human umbilical cord blood has advantages, such as rich pluripotent stem progenitor cells, strong proliferation ability, abundant source, convenient collection, and capability for use even incompletely matched. Although the umbilical cord blood stem cell transplantation has been extensively used in the treatment of hematological diseases [5,6], it remains unknown if the cells can survive and develop after transplanted into the central nervous system. In this study, human umbilical cord blood stem cells were transplanted into artificially injured spinal cord of rats to investigate whether the transplanted cells could survive in the local microenvironment of a spinal cord injury, express neurospecific proteins and improve the behavioral and functional recovery from spinal cord injury.
Materials and Methods
Reagents and instruments
CD34+ separation kits were products of the MACS company, 5-bromodeoxyuridine (Brdu) was purchased from the Roche company, mouse anti-Brdu monoclonal antibody was purchased from the B-D company, and mouse anti-neuronal nuclear specific protein (NeuN ) monoclonal antibody and mouse anti -glial fibrillary acidic protein (GFAP) monoclonal antibody were purchased from the Chemicon International company. Laser scanning confocal fluorescence microscope was an Olympus IX71 model product of the Bio-Rad company , and the flow cytometer was a FACS-Vantage product of the Coulter company.
Animals and grouping
26 healthy Wistar rats were purchased from the Fourth Research Institute of the Academy of Military Medical Sciences, weighing 200~300 g, both males and females, and were randomized into an umbilical cord blood hematopoietic stem cell transplantation group
(n = 13) and a control group (n = 12). In the control group, 1 rat died from wound infection after operation.
Separation and preparation of umbilical cord blood CD34+ cells
The CD34+ cells were separated from the umbilical cord blood collected during normal delivery using the MACS kit. The interlayer cells were first separated using the lymphocyte separation fluid (Ficoll) to prepare individual nuclear cells, and the CD34 [sic! the source missing a superscripted plus sign here] antibody-binding magnetic bead reagent was added as per the operating steps of the kit and incubated for 30 min. The cell suspension was added to the sorting column buffer for elution, and the CD34+ cells were finally harvested. The steps were repeated once. After the cells were counted, they were cultured in IMDM medium with 10% fetal bovine serum. The purity of CD34+ cells was detected by flow cytometry. At
72 h prior to operation, interleukin-3 50 g/ml and interleukin-6
100 g/ml and stem cell factor 100 g/ml were added to induce CD34+ cells into their cellular phases. At the same time, Brdu (20 mol/L) was added for labeling, and Brdu could be used a tracer for DNA labeling at S phase of cells [7]. The positive rate of Brdu labeling was detected by flow cytometry and the cells were counted for future use.
Preparation of the animal model
The pentobarbital was used for intraperitoneal anesthesia. The spinal cord hemisection model was prepared using the Bregman method under the anatomical microscopy. A longitudinal incision was made on the back to expose T8-9 dura mater and perform the left hemisection of the spinal cord using ophthalmologic scissors with median blood vessel as the boundary [8]. In order to ensure a complete section, a surgical 8-0 single nylon thread was used to surround the whole left spinal cord as a ring, and the tissues within the ring were completely severed.
Cell transplantation
In the umbilical cord blood hematopoietic stem cell transplantation, the umbilical cord blood hematopoietic stem cells were injected slowly into both head and tail areas of spinal cord injury using a Hamilton microinjector, with each area injected with
3 μl containing more than 80,000 cells per μl. In the control group, both head and tail sides of the spinal cord injury were slowly injected with PBS buffer 3 μl, with the needle retained for 5 min. after injection to avoid extracellular leakage.
Motor function evaluation
All rats in transplantation group and control group were observed for lower limb motion before operation and 24 h, 1, 2, 3 and 4 weeks after operation and evaluated for neuromotor function using the modified Tarlov scoring criteria [8]. A comparison was performed on whether there was a significant difference in the neuromotor function score.
Histological and immunohistochemical determination
After observed for 4 weeks after operation, tThe animals were sacrificed by cardiac perfusion of 4% paraformaldehyde after being observed for 4 weeks after operation . The injured part of spinal cord was removed, fixed and paraffin-embedded for continuous sections of 6 μm. Routine hematoxylin-eosin staining was used to observe the injury and repair of spinal cord hemisection tissues. Immunohistochemical method was employed to detect the changes in survival, growth and differentiation of Brdu-labeled umbilical cord blood hematopoietic stem cells [9, 10]. Paraffin sections were dewaxed to water step by step, denatured for 1 h and neutralized for 10 min. in 2 mol/L HCl. After blocked with serum, the sections were added with anti-Brdu monoclonal antibody (diluted by 1:100) at 4C overnight. The rabbit anti-mouse IgG (H + L) secondary antibody was labeled with horseradish peroxidase at room temperature for 1 h, and diaminobenzidine was used for color development, and finally hematoxylin was used for re-staining.
Differentiation of Brdu-positive cells
The expression of NeuN and GFAP in umbilical cord blood hematopoietic stem cells was determined by double immunofluorescence staining method to determine their ability to differentiate into nerve cells. Paraffin sections were first treated with the first antibody, anti-Brdu monoclonal antibody, and then treated with rthodamine isothiocyanate-labeled goat anti-mouse IgG (H + L) for 1 h of secondary antibody treatment. Following that, the 2nd monoclonal antibody, anti-NeuN (diluted by 1:200) or -GFAP (diluted 1:1000) monoclonal antibody, was used for treatment at room temperature for
1 h, and the fluorescein isothiacyanate [sic! Source misspelling for “isothiocyanate”] (FITC) was added to label the rabbit anti-mouse IgG (H + L) secondary antibody effect for 1 h. The 2nd monoclonal antibody NeuN or GFAP was added for the negative control. Finally, laser
/3
scanning confocal fluorescence microscopy was performed for observation with the excitation beams at 543 and 488 nm, respectively. The percentage of double fluorescence-labeled cells in single fluorescent-labeled Brdu-positive cells was calculated. At least 20 fields were counted for each section and the mean value was calculated.
Statistical analysis
The independent samples were analyzed using t-test and the data were presented as mean ± standard deviation.
中国語 から 英語: STUDIES ON TYROSINE PROTEIN KINASE IN HUMAN BLOOD General field: 医療 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
翻訳 - 英語 Discussion
In 1986, Haas et al. [10] used pp60[illegible] antiserum to test TPK activity in human serum and blood cells, and it was found that the serum TPK activity accounted for 5~12% of the entire blood, and most TPK activity existed in lymphocytes and polynuclear cells, not platelets and red blood cells. In our experiment, the TPK activity could be detected in merely 2 µl of serum, so this method is simple and feasible.
In the experiment, we found significant differences between the serum TPK activity of different individuals. The study results of Lin et al. [8] indicated that gender and race had no significant effects on the serum TPK activity, but age had a greater effect on it. They also found that 80% of patients with malignant melanoma had a higher TPK activity. Our experiments showed that the serum TPK activity of leukemia patients was significantly higher than that of normal people control. However, it is still necessary to further study the reason for such differences and how the serum TPK activity changes in patients with different types of leukemia.
The activation of TPK by Mg2+ and Mn2+ is an important property of TPK. We found that, for serum TPK, the activation by Mn2+ was greater than that by Mg2+, the maximum activation concentration of Mn2+ was only 5 mmol/L, and adding more of it will inhibit the TPK activity. This is greatly different from the property of TPK in many normal tissues. For example, TPK activation by Mg2+ in the cells of spleen, lymphocyte and other tissues is much higher than that by Mn2+, and the required concentration is very high [11, 12]. These differences show that the serum TPK may come from a special source.
Currently the source of human serum TPK is still unknown. Because no evidence can prove that TPK is secretory, it may come from normal leakage of cells. The majority of TPK that has been found was membrane protein in cells such as PDGF, EGF and insulin receptor or was linked with the cytoskeleton insoluble in detergent [2]. The soluble enzyme protein in cells can enter serum through normal leakage of cells, but the membrane protein or those insoluble components in cells will be released only when cells are severely damaged.
/4
Lin et al. [8] found that the majority of serum TPK activity existed in the 100,000×g soluble part of serum. Wong et al. [13] discovered a soluble TPK in rat livers. Further studies proved that growth factor receptors were not the main source of serum TPK.
Serum TPK may reflect the expression level of TPK in a tissue. Therefore, the identification of serum TPK and its activity determination may help us to identify an abnormal expression of TPK in the process of tissue carcinogenesis. We changed the original tedious determination method, and our method is faster and simpler and is possible for clinical application. It can be predicted that determining the serum TPK may offer a new approach to the study of various diseases.
翻訳 - 英語 VI Characteristics of Various Agents (Fig. 4)
1. Metronidazole (Flagyl, Pfizer Sanofi-Aventis)
Metronidazole is a drug of tissue migration type and is the most commonly used 5-nitro-imidazole drug. With the mechanism of action of nucleic acid inhibition, it is effective for other protozoal diseases, anaerobes and helicobacters. Its adverse effects are mainly gastrointestinal symptoms. It has also a problem of disulfiram-like action causing nausea, vomiting, dyspnea and tachycardia after alcohol assumption, but in recent years it has been argued that this is caused by alcohol intolerance due to serotonin reaction in the brain 14). It has a half life of 6~7 hours. It is available in two dosage forms, oral and intravenous, and it is administered at 750 mg 3 times a day for 5 days for amoebic dysentery, and at 1.5~2.0 g divided into 3~4 times a day for 7~10 days for serious cases or extraintestinal amoebiasis such as liver abscess. It is administered at 7.5 mg/kg every 8 hours for children as calculated based on the dose for adults. Its safety has not been established in pregnant women, and it is contraindicated in patients with organic diseases in the cerebral spinal cord and patients with blood diseases. In Japan, the oral form is commercially available, and in severe cases, its infusion is also available through the research group of "Development and Research of Import, Storage and Treatment System of Orphan Therapeutic Agents for Treatment of Tropical Diseases and Parasitic Diseases" (http://www.miyazakimed.ac.jp/parasitology/orphan/index.html).
2. Tinidazole (Tindamax, Mission Pharmacal: Fasigyn, Pfizer)
Tinidazole is structurally similar to metronidazole (5-nitro-imidazole), and it also has similar mechanism of action and adverse effect to metronidazole. The drug is characterized by a long half life of 12~13 hours. It is administered at 1,200 mg 3 times a day for 7 days for amoebic dysentery and 1,500 mg 3 times a day for 7 days for liver abscess. The 5-nitro-imidazole drugs include ornidazole and secnidazole, but there are few articles on their treatment as compared with other drugs, and no obvious differences have been reported._____________________________________________________________________
CDC (Center for Disease Control: America Centers for Disease Control)
/5
3. Dehydroemetine (Roche)
Dehydroemetine is a chemically synthesized emetine that is one component of several alkaloids derived from the roots of Cephaelis ipecacuanha called Ipecac, which are South American plants. Compared with conventional emetine, this drug has fewer adverse effects. However, it may lead to gastrointestinal symptoms and neuralgia, as well as cardiotoxicity, hypotension, tachycardia, and change in T-wave. It is intended for patients resistant to metronidazole. It is intramuscularly administered at a dose of 1 mg/kg up to 60 mg for 4~6 days. However, abscess formation at the injection site may be common and causes pain. In recent years, Ipecac alkaloid has attracted attention for its anti-HIV action. It is also effective for leishmaniasis caused by protozoa.
4. Chloroquine (Nivaquine, Aventis)
It is an antimalarial drug and may be used a concomitant drug with high concentration in the liver. It may be available from a research group
but is usually imported as an antimalarial drug. It is administered in the form of 600 mg base (10 mg/kg) for 2 days and then 300 mg base (5 mg/kg) for 2~3 weeks.
5. Luminal agents (Diloxanide fulate: Furamide, Boots)
It has fewer adverse effects with an effective rate of 86% as demonstrated in a 13-year observation conducted by the Center for Disease Control (CDC) for asymptomatic cystic carriers 15). However, it has been reported later that its effect is inferior to that of paromomycin 13).
6. Paromomycin (luminal agents) (Paromomycin sulfate: Humatin, X-Gen
Pharmaceuticals, etc.)
It is an aminoglycoside drug that binds to 16S ribosomal RNA and inhibits protein synthesis. It is intended for asymptomatic cyst carriers because they are less absorbed by the intestinal tract. It is considered as more effective than diloxanide furoate and has been introduced by the above research group. It is administered at 15~25 mg/kg/day (900~1,500 mg/day for a body weight of 60 kg) 3~4 times a day for 5 days. The research group considers the dose of 1,500 mg/day, 3 times a day for 10 days. Its adverse effects include gastrointestinal symptoms such as diarrhea, and pseudomembranous enteritis. Iodoquinol is another luminal agent.
7. Access to metronidazole injection and paromomycin
Metronidazole injection and paromomycin may be available from the research group of "Development and Research of Import, Storage and Treatment System of Orphan Therapeutic Agents for Treatment of Tropical Diseases and Parasitic Diseases" (http://www.miyazakimed.ac.jp/parasitology/orphan/index.html). To use the drug, consent form and progress report are required as this drug has not been approved in Japan. Paromomycin is particularly useful for collective anthelmint of asymptomatic cyst carriers with nosocomial infections. To use the drug, a definite diagnosis should be established that the excreted cysts are Entamoeba histolytica.
VII Summary
Amoebic dysentery is an intraintestinal and extraintestinal infection caused by Entamoeba histolytica, which is closely related to sexual behaviors, which account for most cases in Japan. The concept of it being an infection originating overseas may be no longer applicable. When seeing a sexually transmitted disease, we should also consider amoebic dysentery or asymptomatic cyst carrier.
中国語 から 英語: TISSUE ENGINEERING AND 3D PRINTING MEAT TISSUE PRODUCTION AND PROCESSING SYSTEM AND PROCESSING METHOD General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system, characterized in that: the system comprises one or more culture chambers (1), a stimulating unit (2) that is connected to the culture chamber (1) and provides multiple stimulation factors, and a culture fluid circulation system (3) connected to feed inlets and material outlets of the culture chambers (1), the culture chamber (1) comprising a culture fluid and meat tissues immersed in the culture fluid, a nutrient regulating unit (4) being provided to add nutrients into a gas, the culture fluid, and/or the meat tissues in the culture chamber (1) through pipeline opening and closing and switching, a temperature control unit (5) being set in the culture chambers (1) to adjust the temperature through a feedback regulating unit (6), the feedback regulating unit (6) being also connected to the nutrient regulating unit (4) to control its opening and closing as well as the flow.
2. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the stimulating unit (2) comprises a mechanical stimulating unit (2-1) that provides the meat tissues with mechanical stimulation, an acoustic stimulating unit (2-2) that provides the meat tissues with acoustic stimulation, an optical stimulating unit (2-3) that provides the meat tissues with optical stimulation, and an electromagnetic stimulating unit (2-4) that provides the meat tissues with electromagnetic stimulation.
3. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 2, characterized in that: the mechanical stimulating unit (2-1) comprises a stretching unit, a shearing unit, a compressing unit, and a vibrating unit for stimulating the meat tissues.
4. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the nutrient regulating unit (4) comprises a spice bottle (4-1), a nutrient bottle (4-2), an acid and alkali bottle (4-3), a CO2 bottle (4-4), and an O2 bottle (4-5).
5. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the feedback regulating unit (6) comprises a sensor (6-1) set in the culture chamber (1), a signal feedback unit (6-2) connected to the sensor (6-1), a signal processing unit (6-3), a device control unit (6-4), and a parameter input unit (6-5) connected to the device control unit (6-4), the device control unit (6-4) being connected to the nutrient regulating unit (4) and temperature control unit (5).
6. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the culture chamber (1) is a sterile closed environment and the culture chamber (1) and all the parts contacting the culture fluid and meat tissues in the culture chamber (1) are food-grade materials.
7. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: a pump and a regulating valve are set on the pipeline between the culture fluid circulation system (3) and the culture chamber (1) to adjust the flow and flow rate and apply flow shearing to the meat tissues.
8. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the stimulating unit (2) and the nutrient regulating unit (4) are used to control genetic expression and regulate cell proliferation, extracellular matrix composition, and tissue structure; tenderness, water-holding capacity, flavor, fragrance, and color of the meat tissues; nutrient content and contents of meat constituting components.
9. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to claim 1, characterized in that: the processed products of the meat tissues are edible meat and are composed of non-human cells, extracellular matrices and degradable and/or non-degradable non-toxic supporting materials.
10. A processing method of the tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized by comprising the following steps:
step 1: fix meat tissues obtained from tissue engineering and 3D printing into the culture chamber (1) and inject the culture fluid into the culture chamber (1) through the culture fluid circulation system for culture and in vitro expansion, with the culture fluid just covering the upper surface of the meat tissues;
/3
step 2: input parameters for control into the device control unit (6-4) through the parameter input unit (6-5) and control the temperature control unit (5), the nutrient bottle (4-2), the acid and alkali bottle (4-3), the CO2 (4-4) bottle, and the O2 bottle (4-5) through the device control unit (6-4); the sensor (6-1) sends the temperature, pH value, CO2 concentration, and O2 concentration in the culture chamber (6-1) to the signal processing unit (6-3) through the signal feedback unit (6-2) and to the device control unit (6-4) and makes the environment in the culture chamber (1) reach culture conditions needed by the meat tissues through control provided by the device control unit (6-4);
step 3: stretch, shear, compress, and vibrate the meat tissues and carry out the optical, acoustic and electromagnetic stimulation for the meat tissues through the simulating unit (2); apply stimulation factors continuously or intermittently, wherein the frequency, amplitude, and action time are related to the texture of the meat tissues, the electromagnetic field of the electromagnetic stimulation comprises constant, pulsed and alternating electric field and magnetic field, and the compression comprises static compression and dynamic compression; in addition, control the types and contents of nutrients in the meat tissues and the culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit (4); and
step 4: adjust the taste when the meat tissues approach the last maturation phase of culture, add spices and nutrients to the meat tissues and culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit (4), and continue to implement some operations of steps 1-3 as required until the meat tissues become mature.
11. The processing method according to claim 10, characterized in that: the nutrients in step 4 are selectively added as required through the nutrient regulating unit (4) and comprise necessary amino acids needed by human body, necessary amino acids for conditioning, non-necessary amino acids and glucose, and 18 microelements and all vitamins needed by human body as well as one or more food components that can prevent, suppress or treat diseases and are harmless to human body, and/or healthcare ingredients and their extractives or their components, and/or food plants such as vegetables and fruits and their derivatives, one or more of a saltiness agent, a sweetener, an acidulant, a flavor enhancer and a spicy agent that are used in daily life and exist in one or more forms of solid, liquid, gas, and ion, as well as CO2, O2, and acid-base regulator needed by cell proliferation.
/4
Description
Tissue Engineering and 3D Printing Meat Tissue Production and
Processing System and Processing Method
Technical Field
[0001]
The present invention relates to the field of 3D printing and food production and specifically to a tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system and processing method.
Background Technology
[0002]
Meat is a main source of nutrients for human being; however, the restriction of animal husbandry technologies and animal rearing and meat production process cause destruction of the ecological environment. Using tissue-engineered meat to replace natural tissues of animals as diet consumables is a long-term effective method for solving food shortage. Tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues are built on the foundation that animals are not killed. Therefore, this is also a preferred method for people who choose not to kill animals to supplement nutrients such as proteins and amino acids. In addition, tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues are more flexible in supplementing nutrients needed by human body and can, based on different requirements of different people for various nutrients, produce tissues that are rich in some substances or have some substances removed through a system.
[0003]
In vitro culture of tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues is very important for ensuring expansion, nutrition, and taste of the tissues. At present, there is no dedicated processing system or processing method nor is there any sound in vitro culture solution available for making tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues edible and similar to natural meat. Therefore, there is great significance in inventing and creating a system for making the nutrition value of tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues meet food requirements and deliver a good taste.
Summary of the Invention
[0004]
To resolve the foregoing technical issues, the present invention is intended to provide a tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system and processing method for in vitro expansion and maturation of tissue-engineered, 3D printing meat tissues to relief human dependence on animal meat tissues and to meet different requirements of different people for meat.
[0005]
To achieve the foregoing objective, the present invention adopts the following technical solution:
[0006]
A tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system, including one or more culture chambers 1, a stimulating unit 2 that is connected to the culture chamber 1 and provides multiple stimulation factors, and a culture fluid circulation system 3 connected to feed inlets and material outlets of the culture chambers 1; the culture chamber 1 includes a culture fluid and meat tissues immersed in the culture fluid, a nutrient regulating unit 4 is provided to add nutrients to the gas, culture fluid and/or meat tissues in the culture chamber 1 through pipeline opening and closing and switching, a temperature control unit 5 is set in the culture chambers 1 to adjust the temperature through a feedback regulating unit 6, and the feedback regulating unit 6 is also connected to the nutrient regulating unit 4 to control its opening and closing as well as the flow.
[0007]
The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system is characterized in that: the stimulating unit 2 comprises a mechanical stimulating unit 2-1 that provides the meat tissues with mechanical stimulation, an acoustic stimulating unit 2-2 that provides the meat tissues with acoustic stimulation, an optical stimulating unit 2-3 that provides the meat tissues with optical stimulation, and an electromagnetic stimulating unit 2-4 that provides the meat tissues with electromagnetic stimulation.
[0008]
The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system is characterized in that: the mechanical stimulating unit 2-1 comprises a stretching unit, a shearing unit, a compressing unit, and a vibrating unit that stimulate the meat tissues.
/5
[0009]
The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system is characterized in that: the nutrient regulating unit 4 includes a spice bottle 4-1, a nutrient bottle 4-2, an acid and alkali bottle 4-3, a CO2 bottle 4-4, and an O2 bottle 4-5.
[0010]
The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system is characterized in that: the feedback regulating unit 6 includes a sensor 6-1 set in the culture chamber 1, a signal feedback unit 6-2 connected to the sensor 6-1, a signal processing unit 6-3, a device control unit 6-4, and a parameter input unit 6-5 connected to the device control unit 6-4, the device control unit 6-4 being connected to the nutrient regulating unit 4 and the temperature control unit 5.
[0011]
The culture chamber 1 is a sterile closed environment and the culture chamber 1 and all the parts contacting the culture fluid and the meat tissues in the culture chamber 1 are food-grade materials.
[0012]
A pump and a regulating valve are set on the pipeline between the culture fluid circulation system 3 and the culture chamber 1 to adjust the flow and flow rate and apply flow shearing to the meat tissues.
[0013]
The stimulating unit 2 and the nutrient regulating unit 4 are used to control genetic expression and regulate cell proliferation, extracellular matrix composition, and tissue structure; tenderness, water-holding capacity, flavor, fragrance, and color of the meat tissues; nutrient content and contents of meat constituting components.
[0014]
The processed products of the meat tissues are edible meat and are composed of non-human cells, extracellular matrices and degradable and/or non-degradable, non-toxic supporting materials.
[0015]
A tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue processing method based on the foregoing system includes the following steps:
[0016]
Step 1: Fix the meat tissues obtained from the tissue engineering and 3D printing into the culture chamber 1 and inject the culture fluid into the culture chamber 1 through the culture fluid circulation system for culture and in vitro, with the culture fluid just covering the upper surface of the meat tissues;
[0017]
Step 2: Input parameters for control into the device control unit 6-4 through the parameter input unit 6-5 and control the temperature control unit 5, the nutrient bottle 4-2, the acid and alkali bottle 4-3, the CO2 4-4 bottle, and the O2 bottle 4-5 through the device control unit 6-4; the sensor 6-1 sends the temperature, pH value, CO2 concentration, and O2 concentration in the culture chamber 6-1 to the signal processing unit 6-3 through the signal feedback unit 6-2 and to the device control unit 6-4 and makes the environment in the culture chamber 1 reach the culture conditions needed by the meat tissues through control provided by the device control unit 6-4.
[0018]
Step 3: Stretch, shear, compress, and vibrate the meat tissues and carry out the optical, acoustic and electromagnetic stimulation for the meat tissues through the simulating unit 2; apply the stimulation factors continuously or intermittently, wherein the frequency, amplitude, and action time are related to the texture of the meat tissues, the electromagnetic field of the electromagnetic stimulation includes constant, pulsed and alternating electric field and magnetic field, and the compression comprises static compression and dynamic compression; in addition, control the types and contents of nutrients in the meat tissues and culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit 4.
[0019]
Step 4: Adjust the taste when the meat tissues approach the last maturation phase of culture, add spices to the meat tissues and culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit 4, and continue to implement some operations of steps 1-3 as required until the meat tissues become mature.
[0020]
The ways of regulating nutrients in the meat tissues and culture fluid described in step 4 specifically include directly injecting corresponding nutrients into the meat, adding corresponding nutrients to the culture fluid, and adding corresponding nutrients to the air in the culture chamber.
[0021]
The nutrients described in step 4 are selectively added as required through the nutrient regulating unit 4, including necessary amino acids needed by human body, necessary amino acids for conditioning, non-necessary amino acids and glucose, and 18 microelements and all vitamins necessary for human body, as well as one or more food components that can prevent, suppress or treat diseases and are harmless to human body, and/or healthcare ingredients and their extractives or their components, and/or food plants such as vegetables and fruits and their derivatives, and one or more of a saltiness agent, a sweetener, an acidulant, a flavor enhancer and a spicy agent that are used in daily life and exist in one or more forms of solid, liquid, gas, and ion, as well as CO2, O2, and acid-base regulator needed by cell proliferation.
/6
[0022]
Compared with the prior art, the present invention has the following advantages:
[0023]
1. The tissue engineering and 3D printing meat tissue production and processing system according to the present invention combines multiple stimulation factors and integrates the culture, nutrition, and taste of the meat tissues for more convenience and higher efficiency.
[0024]
2. The edible meat produced by the production and processing system and processing method according to the present invention is built on the foundation that animals are not killed so it can be accepted by animal protectionists, compared to the traditional way of obtaining animal meat tissues.
[0025]
3. Producing edible meat using the production and processing system and processing method according to the present invention avoids killing and processing of livestock and animals, which will damage the ecological environment.
[0026]
4. The meat tissues produced using the method according to the present invention are applicable to more people and can meet people with special requirements, which is hard for traditional animal meat tissue processing methods to achieve.
[0027]
5. The meat tissues produced using the method according to the present invention are richer in nutrients compared with traditional animal meat tissues and the types of nutrients are adjustable, which is hard for the traditional animal meat tissue processing methods to achieve.
Brief Description of the Drawings
[0028]
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of the production and processing system according to the present invention; and
[0029]
Fig. 2 is a production and processing flow chart according to the present invention.
Detailed Description of Embodiments
[0030]
The following describes the present invention in detail referring to accompanying drawings and specific embodiments, but the embodiments described here are used only for illustrating the present invention and are not intended to limit to the present invention.
[0031]
As shown in Fig. 1, the system includes one or more culture chambers 1, the stimulating unit 2 that is connected to the culture chamber 1 and provides multiple stimulation factors, and the culture fluid circulation system 1 connected to feed inlets and material outlets of the culture chambers 1. The culture chamber 1 includes the culture fluid and meat tissues immersed in the culture fluid, the nutrient regulating unit 4 adds nutrients to the culture fluid and/or meat tissues in the culture chamber 1 through pipeline opening and closing and switching, the temperature control unit 5 is set in the culture chambers 1 to adjust its temperature through the feedback regulating unit 6, and the feedback regulating unit 6 is also connected to the nutrient regulating unit 4 to control its opening and closing as well as the flow.
[0032]
As shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, the processing method of the processing system mainly includes the following steps:
[0033]
Step 1: Fix the meat tissues obtained from tissue engineering and 3D printing into the culture chamber 1 and inject the culture fluid into the culture chamber 1 through the culture fluid circulation system for culture and in vitro expansion, with the culture fluid just covering the upper surface of the meat tissues.
[0034]
Step 2: Input parameters for control into the device control unit 6-4 through the parameter input unit 6-5 and control the temperature control unit 5, the nutrient bottle 4-2, the acid and alkali bottle 4-3, the CO2 4-4 bottle, and the O2 bottle 4-5 through the device control unit 6-4. The sensor 6-1 sends the temperature, pH value, CO2 concentration, and O2 concentration in the culture chamber 6-1 to the signal processing unit 6-3 through the signal feedback unit 6-2 and to the device control unit 6-4 and makes the environment in the culture chamber 1 reach the culture conditions needed by the meat tissues through the control provided by the device control unit 6-4.
[0035]
Step 3: Stretch, shear, compress, and vibrate meat tissues and carry out the optical, acoustic and electromagnetic stimulation for the meat tissues through the simulating unit 2, apply stimulation factors continuously or intermittently wherein the frequency, amplitude, and action time are related to the texture of the meat tissues, the electromagnetic field of electromagnetic stimulation includes constant, pulsed, and alternating electric field and magnetic field, and the compression comprises static compression and dynamic compression; in addition, control the types and contents of nutrients in the meat tissues and the culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit 4.
/7
[0036]
Step 4: Adjust the taste when the meat tissues approach the last maturation phase of culture, add spices to the meat tissues and culture fluid through the nutrient regulating unit 4, and continue to implement some operations of steps 1-3 as required until the meat tissues become mature.
[0037]
Embodiments
[0038]
Specifically, the meat tissues produced according to the embodiment target at patients who suffer from arteriosclerosis and lack vitamin C. The patients hope to eat fatty meat but hope not to deteriorate the disease. The patients are old and tend to eat tender meat tissues.
[0039]
3D printing tissue blocks (40 20 10 mm) mixing cells and scaffold materials are used as immature meat tissues for tissue engineering and 3D printing, and the tissues are fixed in the culture chamber through a clamp.
[0040]
Step 1: Open the culture fluid circulation system so that the culture fluid just covers the upper surface of the meat tissues.
[0041]
Step 2: Start the stimulating unit to accelerate cell proliferation and extracellular matrix formation through the combined action of the stimulating unit, wherein the fluid shearing and stretching simulation makes fiber distribution controllable, the fluid shear stress applied onto the meat tissue surface through the culture fluid is 1.5 Pa, and the shear stress should be applied continuously; in addition, stretch the meat tissues in the flow direction of the culture fluid and set the tensile strain to 5%, the frequency to 1 Hz, and the stretch stimulation time to 12 hours/day.
[0042]
Step 3: Start the nutrient regulating unit and feed 200 mg vitamin C and 200 mg n-3 unsaturated fatty acid to the culture chamber, with one half of the nutrients added to the culture fluid and the other half injected to the meat tissues; after the tissues are basically mature and the support materials basically degrade, perform the next step.
[0043]
Step 4: Feed MSG and honey to the culture chamber through the nutrient regulating unit; because the patients are older, so the taste is adjusted to make it lighter; feed 6 g MSG and 10 g honey, with one half added to the culture fluid and the other half injected into the meat tissues.
[0044]
Repeat some of the operations in steps 1-3 to apply the dynamic shearing and acoustic wave on the meat tissues through the stimulating unit to destroy the fiber structure of the meat tissues and make the meat products tender, wherein the frequency and amplitude of the dynamic shearing are respectively 1 Hz and 12 Pa, the applied sound stimulation is ultrasonic simulation, the stimulation frequency is 2 MHz, and the power is 12 W/cm2; stretch the meat tissues stretch in all directions through the stretching unit to promote penetration of the flavor and nutrients into the meat tissues, wherein the tensile strain is 10% and the frequency of change is still 1 Hz; finally treat the tissues with ultraviolet to reduce cholesterol in the meat products, wherein the ultraviolet intensity is 70 μW/cm2 and the wavelength is 365 nm, and the main part for the treatment is the marbling (namely fat) of the meat products.
日本語 から 英語: STEM CELL SYSTEMS FORMING HAIR FOLLICLE AND THEIR MOLECULAR REGULATORY MECHANISMS General field: 医療 Detailed field: 動物学
翻訳 - 英語 IV. Identification of Melanocyte Stem Cells and Their Regulatory Mechanism
1. Identification of melanocyte cells
c-Kit receptor, a tyrosine kinase type receptor for membrane protein, binds to its specific ligand SCF (stem cell factor, also called MFG, KL, steel factor), and transmits the signals such as proliferation, survival and migration in cells. The gene mutation of c-Kit receptor and its ligand is associated with vitiligo, so the signal transmitted from c-Kit receptor is known to play an important role in the survival, differentiation and proliferation of melanocyte cells 31).
To investigate the in vivo functions of the signals transmitted from the c-Kit receptor, the authors have produced an anti-c-Kit monoclonal antibody. In mice administrated with this antibody, whitening of body hair along with anemia and spermatogenesis had been observed 31). This antibody induces cell death by specifically acting on signal-dependently proliferating melanocyte cells from the c-Kit receptor 2). In mice administered with this antibody immediately after birth, the initially growing body hair was white (originally black mice), but the body hair returned to back from the 2nd cycle of administration. Thus, the fact that the once-whitened body hair reversibly returned to the original body color indicates that there was a mechanism for regenerating the melanocyte cells which were lost due to administration of anti-c-Kit antibody. Based on this result, the authors speculate that there are stem cell systems in melanocyte cell lines, and have tried to identify them.
To detect individual melanocyte cells in tissues with high sensitivity, the authors used transgenic mice expressing β-galactosidase (LacZ) in the downstream of melanocyte cell specific promoter (Dct or TRP2 promoter). Dct is 1 of the enzymes involved in the synthesis pathway of melanin pigment. It is known that Dct starts to express from precursors of undifferentiated embryonic melanocyte cells during melanocyte cell development and then express on melanocyte cell lines at all differentiation stages. The investigation of LacZ-positive melanocyte cells in the hair follicles of this mouse has revealed that the melanocyte cells are localized at 2 sites, i.e., the hair matrix and the bulge site of the hair follicle. The immunohistochemical staining of melanocyte cells present in this bulge part using the differentiation markers of several types of melanocyte cells has revealed that these cells are undifferentiated and are at quiescence phase. In addition, the investigation of the sites of melanocyte cells in the hair follicle after administration of anti-c-Kit antibody has shown that melanocyte cells of the hair matrix are killed and only melanocyte cells at the bulge site remain after the administration. These cellular properties suggest that the cells present in bulge be equivalent to the stem cells of c-Kit signal-independent undifferentiated melanocyte cells 2).
Then, the authors tried to transplant the undifferentiated melanocyte cells at this bulge. Generally, experiments to investigate the potential of tissue regeneration and reconstruction by transplantation are the most determinative method for identifying stem cells. The authors cut the mouse beard hair follicles (derived from black mice) into 3 parts and transplanted them into the skin of neonatal mice (albino mice) to see which of the 3 parts that were transplanted had black hair growing from the mice. The result shows that black hair grew only when the bulge part of the hair follicles was transplanted, indicating that cells with the ability to regenerate melanocyte cell line were present only in this part. These findings prove that the undifferentiated melanocyte cells present in the bulge part have the capacity as stem cells 2).
2. Mechanism of regulating proliferation and differentiation of
melanocyte stem cells Mutations in genes involved in melanocyte cell function and maintenance appear with changes in hair color, so it is easy to detect such mutations, and more than 90 genes have been identified so far. Among these genes, Wnt1, Wnt3a, steel factor (SCF, Kit ligand) and endothelin-3 have been identified as factors involved in the maintenance of proliferation and differentiation of melanocyte cells.
In mice with Wnt1 and Wnt3a mutations, melanocyte precursor cells have disappeared in 11.5 days after birth 32). In vitro experiments have demonstrated that these factors are the factors that determine the differentiation of melanocyte precursor cells from neural crest cells 32).
Genetic mutation of SCF or its receptor has been identified as an Sl or W variant. Many analyses have shown that the c-Kit signal system can act in various aspects of melanocyte cells, including proliferation, survival, migration, differentiation etc.
Genetic mutations of endothelin-3 and its receptor EdnrB can lead to vitiligo. Endothelin-3 is considered to support the proliferation of melanocyte precursor cells 33). Shin et al have prepared a knock-in mouse whose expression of endothelin-3 can be regulated by tetracycline at the endothelin-3 locus, and have defined the time period required for endothelin-3 to proliferate and differentiate the melanocyte precursor cells at fetal stage. The result shows that the melanocyte cells recover only when endothelin-3 is expressed during the period of 10-12.5 days after birth, thus suggesting that endothelin-3 can regulate the proliferation and differentiation of melanocyte precursor cells from neural crest cells only during a very short period of the fetal period 33).
It is not well known which signal system has maintained the melanocyte stem cells and regulated their proliferation and differentiation in adult hair follicles, as compared to the signal system involved in melanocyte cell development. According to experiments of anti-c-Kit antibody administration, the signal from the c-Kit is considered essential for the proliferation and differentiation of melanocyte cells. However, it remains unknown the degree of involvement of other signal systems than the c-Kit. In addition, sometime, the melanocyte stem cells do not disappear even after administration of anti-c-Kit antibody, so the involvement of other factors than the c-Kit signal in the maintenance of these stem cells should also be considered. Currently, the authors are trying to separate cells around melanocyte stem cells (stem cell niche), and to identify molecules involved in melanocyte stem cell maintenance by analyzing the gene expression patterns.
日本語 から 英語: ELECTRODE STRUCTURE OF SOLID POLYMER FUEL CELL General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
[Claim 1]
An electrode structure of as solid polymer fuel cell which comprises an anode electrode, a cathode electrode, and a polymer electrolyte membrane sandwiched between them, wherein
said two electrodes respectively comprise a catalyst layer contacting said polymer electrolyte membrane and a gas diffusion layer contacting the catalyst layer,
the catalyst layer of said cathode electrode comprises a Pt-Co catalyst having a Pt-Co alloy being supported on a conductive material, an ion conductive material and a pore-forming material for improving water drainage property,
and the gas diffusion layer of said cathode electrode comprises a water retention layer contacting said catalyst layer.
[Claim 2]
The electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell according to claim 1, wherein said pore-forming material is a crystalline carbon fiber.
[Claim 3]
The electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell according to claim 1 or 2, wherein said water retention layer comprises a polymer electrolyte, a crystalline carbon fiber and conductive carbon particles.
[Claim 4]
The electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell according to any of claims 1 to 3, wherein the surface of the gas diffusion layer of said cathode electrode contacting said catalyst layer has a surface roughness (Ra) of no higher than 0.65 μm as determined by a tracer method.
[Claim 5]
The electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell according to any of claims 1 to 4, wherein the water absorption of the gas diffusion layer of said cathode electrode under saturated water vapor pressure at 70C is from 45% to 85% as expressed by the following formula 1.
[Value 1]
Water absorption = (Mass of gas diffusion layer under saturated water vapor pressure at 70C) - (Mass of dried gas diffusion layer)
100 … (Formula 1)
Mass of dried gas diffusion layer
[Claim 6]
The electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell according to any of claim 1 to claim 5, wherein the gas diffusion layer of said cathode electrode produces a differential pressure between 60 mmaq and 120 mmaq as determined by a differential pressure measuring method.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention relates to an electrode structure of a solid polymer fuel cell, particularly to an electrode structure of a solid
polymer fuel cell which has high initial performance and is hardly changed by environmental factors.
[Prior art]
[0002]
In recent years, as a method of inhibiting global warming and environmental damages as well as a next-generation of power-generation system, fuel cells are highly expected and are actively researched and developed. Fuel cells generate electric energy via an electrochemical reaction between hydrogen and oxygen. For example, they can be a phosphoric acid fuel cell, a molten carbonate fuel cell, a solid electrolyte type fuel cell, a solid polymer fuel cell, etc. Among them, the solid polymer fuel cell attracts attention as a power source for automobiles (two-wheeled and four-wheeled) and a portable power source because they can start up at normal temperature, have small sizes and can produce high output.
[0003]
The solid polymer fuel cell is used as a stack (assembled battery) which is formed by dozens to hundreds of unit cells where the electrode
/3
structure as the basic constituting unit is sandwiched by a separator. The electrode structure as the basic constituting unit of the stack is formed by two electrodes including one anode (fuel electrode) and one cathode (air electrode) as well as a polymer electrolyte membrane sandwiched between the electrodes. Usually, the two electrodes respectively consist of a catalyst layer contacting the polymer electrolyte membrane to carry out the oxidation and reduction reactions and a diffusion layer contacting the catalyst layer. The solid polymer fuel cells formed in this way generate electric energy by supplying fuel containing hydrogen to the anode (fuel electrode) and supplying oxygen or air to the cathode (air electrode).
[0004]
So far, the cathode of the solid polymer fuel cell usually uses a platinum catalyst with the platinum being supported on a carbon carrier and the catalytic activity is enhanced by improving the carrier characteristics, micronizing the platinum and enhancing the dispersion of platinum. Nevertheless, because these methods have their limits in improving the characteristics, it was proposed that a Pt-Co catalyst having a platinum-cobalt alloy being supported on carbon in the catalyst layer be used to improve the cathode activity from a viewpoint different from a conventional one (referring to patent literature 1). Because this Pt-Co catalyst has the effect of inhibiting the particle size from increasing through sintering the catalyst, it has a higher catalytic activity than those common platinum catalysts conventionally used. Thus, a solid polymer fuel cell having excellent power generation performance can be provided by using such a Pt-Co catalyst as the cathode catalyst.
日本語 から 英語: ELECTRIC UTILITY BUSINESS PROFIT AND LOSS ANALYSIS SYSTEM, METHOD AND PROGRAM General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: コンピュータ: ハードウェア
翻訳 - 英語 /2
Claims
[Claim 1]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system which analyzes an electric utility business related profit and loss by a computer, wherein
the electric utility business profit and loss analysis system comprises
a profit and loss calculation means which calculates the electric utility business related profit and loss through a Monte Carlo simulation for a specified number of trials,
a 1st data calculation means which calculates a 1st data which contains a statistics data or a risk index data by statistically processing said profit and loss which has been calculated with said profit and loss calculation means, and
a 2nd data calculation means which calculates a 2nd data which contains a statistics data or a risk index data by applying a specified derivative to said 1st data which has been calculated with said 1st data calculation means.
[Claim 2]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system according to claim 1, wherein
said profit and loss calculation means comprises a future temperature data calculation means which calculates a future temperature data.
[Claim 3]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system according to claim 1 or claim 2, wherein
said profit and loss calculation means comprises a consumer withdrawal amount calculation means which calculates a demand withdrawal amount.
[Claim 4]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system according to any of claim 1 through claim 3, wherein
the electric utility business profit and loss analysis system further comprises
a parameter changing means which calculates multiple kinds of said profit and loss by repeatedly executing said Monte Carlo simulation with changing parameter values.
[Claim 5]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system according to any of claim 1 through claim 4, wherein
the electric utility business profit and loss analysis system further comprises
a price model parameter table which, for calculating said profit and loss based on a model which considers a correlation of fuel prices in a plurality of markets, stores parameters of said model, wherein
said profit and loss calculation means corrects said profit and loss which has been calculated based on said model, in response to variations in said correlation.
[Claim 6]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis system according to any of claim 1 through claim 5, wherein
said 2nd data calculation means calculates multiple kinds of said 2nd data by applying multiple kinds of said specified derivative to said 1st data.
[Claim 7]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method which analyzes an electric utility business related profit and loss by a computer, wherein
the electric utility business profit and loss analysis method comprises
a profit and loss calculation process which calculates the electric utility business related profit and loss through a Monte Carlo simulation for a specified number of trials,
a 1st data calculation process which calculates a 1st data which contains a statistics data or a risk index data by statistically processing said profit and loss which has been calculated in said profit and loss calculation process, and
a 2nd data calculation process which calculates a 2nd data which contains a statistics data or a risk index data by applying said derivative to said 1st data which has been calculated in said 1st data calculation process.
[Claim 8]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to claim 7, wherein
/3
said profit and loss calculation process comprises a future temperature data calculation process which calculates a future temperature data.
[Claim 9]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to claim 7 or claim 8, wherein
said profit and loss calculation process comprises a consumer withdrawal amount calculation process which calculates a consumer withdrawal amount.
[Claim 10]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to any of claim 7 through claim 9, wherein
said profit and loss calculation process comprises a process which calculates multiple kinds of said profit and loss by repeatedly executing said Monte Carlo simulation with changing parameter values.
[Claim 11]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to any of claim 7 through claim 10, wherein
said profit and loss calculation process comprises a process which calculates said profit and loss based on a model which considers a correlation of fuel prices in a plurality of markets, and
a process which corrects said profit and loss which has been calculated based on said model, in response to variations in said correlation.
[Claim 12]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to any of claim 7 through claim 11, wherein
said 2nd data calculation process comprises a process which sequentially calculates multiple kinds of said second data by sequentially applying multiple kinds of said specified derivatives to said 1st data.
[Claim 13]
An electric utility business profit and loss analysis program which executes said various processes in the electric utility business profit and loss analysis method according to any of claim 7 through claim 12 in a computer.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention relates to an electric utility business profit and loss analysis system, method and program for analyzing the influence of each varying risk factor on future profits and losses in the electric utility sector, and especially relates to a method for reducing risks.
[Background technology]
[0002]
When an electric utility operator conducts its business, it is necessary to analyze the profit and loss of the business plan because it receives effects from such risk factors as fuel prices, exchange rates, and demand level.
[0003]
A conventional technique which learns about the risk level is the method which calculates the risk index of the service business by using the Monte Carlo simulation (patent literature 1 for example).
[0004]
[Patent literature 1] Official Gazette for Patents No. 2002-259655
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
[0005]
When an electric utility operator conducts its business, the profit and loss of the business plan varies due to the influences from such risk factors as fuel prices, exchange rate, and demand level. When working out an operation plan or managing the business, it is necessary to understand the influences of these risk factors and quantitatively analyze the levels of their influences. To understand the risk level, there are methods for modeling the correlation of the risk factors and probabilistically calculating the risk level through the Monte Carlo simulation, but simply calculating the risk level cannot specifically reveal a policy for reducing the risks even if we can understand the risk level.
中国語 から 英語: Investigation on Real Herb of Mugwort Leaf and the Standard of its Processing for Moxibustion General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 中国語 [摘要]艾叶是传统的灸疗材料,古人对灸用艾叶的产地及艾绒的加工有许多详尽的记述｡但目前灸用艾绒的质量及加工混乱,无统一标准,严重影响艾灸疗法的推广应用｡本文对艾叶和艾绒道地药材､加工方法､质量判定方法,从古代文献､现代研究及临床应用等角度进行了较全面的分析,认为市售艾绒的加工缺乏规范,现有报道中采用挥发油评判艾叶质量的观点有待商榷,灸艾叶及艾绒的质量控制需要从物理性状､化学特性多方面进行深入研究｡
[关键词]艾叶,道地药材,炮制,标准
艾叶来源于菊科植物艾(Artemisa argyi Levl. Et Vant)的干燥叶,药用广泛,是传统的灸疗材料｡古人对灸用艾叶的产地及加工有许多详尽的记述,但目前灸用艾绒的质量及加工混乱,无统一标准｡《中华人民共和国药典》[1] (2005年版)对艾叶描述的文字很少,外用法中只提了“外用适量,供灸治或熏洗用”,没有提及艾绒｡灸用艾叶的质量因为产地､采摘时间､存放及炮制工艺的不同而有所差别｡针对这些问题,笔者对灸用艾叶的道地药材及加工标准进行了初步探讨｡
1艾叶的道地产地及品质研究
1.1艾叶的道地产地
早在梁代陶弘景的《名医別录》就提到“(艾叶)生田野”.但没有明确提出道地产地｡最早提出艾叶道地产地的是宋代苏颂《本草图经》载:“艾叶,旧不著所出州土,但云生田野｡今处处有之,以复道(今河南安阳市汤阴县境内)者为佳｡”到明弘治年间定稿的《本草品汇精要》载:“图经云,生田野,今处处有之｡道地:蕲州(今湖北蕲春县)､明州(今浙江宁波及鄞县附近)｡”明代陈嘉谟《本草蒙筌》中描述“其治病症,遍求蕲州所产独茎､圆叶,背白有芒者,称为艾之精英,倘有收藏,不吝价买｡彼处仕宦,亦每采此,两京送人,重纸包封,以示珍贵｡名益传远,四方尽闻｡”可见,时人对蕲艾相当重视,但直到明代李时珍父子才提出了“蕲艾”一词｡李时珍的父亲李言闻曾著有《蕲艾传》,可惜已经亡佚｡明代李时珍的《本草纲目》对艾叶的道地产地做了详细的描述,“艾叶本草不著土产,但云生田野｡宋时以汤阴复道者为佳,四明者图形｡近代唯汤阴者谓之北艾,四明者谓之海艾｡自成化以来,则以蕲州者为胜,用充方物,天下重之,谓之蕲艾｡相传他处艾灸酒坛不能透,蕲艾一灸则直透彻为异也｡”但也有对道地药材蕲艾提出异议的｡如陈嘉谟在《本草蒙筌》中提到“(蕲艾)今以形状考之,九牛草者即此｡人多不识,并以艾呼”,并不承认蕲艾道地药材的地位,而且《本草述钩元》《本草备要》等均认为其不是艾种｡
李时珍《本草纲口•九牛草》指出:“陈嘉漠《本草紫筌》以此为蕲艾,谬矣｡”梅全喜[2]考证,《本草蒙筌》所附蕲州艾叶图与现代蕲艾十分吻合,但其记载的形态“独茎､圆叶､背白有芒”完全套用《图经》中九牛草的特征,以致于图文矛盾,认为蕲艾并非九牛草｡从现代生药学角度看,蕲艾与艾叶(Artemisa argyi levl, et Vant的干燥叶)很相似,完整叶片展平后呈卵状椭圆形,羽状深裂,裂片椭圆状,披针形,边缘有不规则的粗锯齿,微小区别是叶片较艾叶大而厚,上表面黄绿色白色腺点多,下面有厚绒毛层｡由此可以肯定蕲艾并非九牛草,是艾的一种｡所以,从古今文献来看,明代至今蕲艾一直为公认的道地药材,而且其地位是很稳固的｡
翻訳 - 英語 [Abstract]
Mugwort leaf is a traditional herb being used for moxibustion. Although there have been many detailed descriptions of the origin of mugwort leaf used for moxibustion and its processing to obtain mugwort floss in ancient literatures, there is no uniform standard with respect to the quality of mugwort floss and its processing until now, which seriously affects its popularity and application in moxibustion. In this paper, a thorough analysis has been conducted on the data from ancient literatures, modern researches and clinical applications in terms of authentic medicinal mugwort leaf and mugwort floss, processing methods and quality judgment. Based on the analytic results, the authors believe that there is no standard in the processing of commercially available mugwort floss, and it is arguable to judge the quality of mugwort leaf by its volatile oil as proposed in the existing reports, suggesting that further in-depth studies be conducted on the quality control of mugwort leaf and mugwort floss for use in moxibustion from various aspects, such as physical and chemical properties.
[Key words] Artemisia argyi, authentic medicinal herb, processing,
standard
Mugwort leaf is derived from the dried leaves of Artemisa argyi Levl. Et Vant [sic! the English word “Artemisa” in the source is likely a typo for “Artemisia”], and extensively used in medicines. It is a traditional material for moxibustion. Although there have been many detailed descriptions of the origin and processing of mugwort leaf for moxibustion in ancient literatures, there is no uniform standard to regulate the quality of mugwort floss and its processing as of today. In the Pharmacopoeia of the People's Republic of China [1] (2005 Edition), there are very few words describing mugwort leaf, "it is to be used externally in proper amount and is used for moxibustion or fumigation cleansing" regarding its external use, and there is no mention of mugwort floss. The quality of mugwort leaf for moxibustion may vary depending on the place of origin, the time of picking, the storage condition and the processing technique. In view of these issues, the authors have conducted a preliminary investigation into the crude medicinal material of authentic mugwort leaf for moxibustion and the standard for its processing.
1 Research on Place of Origin and Quality of Authentic Mugwort Leaf
1.1 Place of origin of authentic mugwort leaf
Early mentioning of mugwort leaf is in the Supplementary Records of Famous Physicians by Tao, Hong-jing in Liang Dynasty, stating “(mugwart leaf) grows in the field”, but its authentic origin was not clearly specified. The authentic origin was first mentioned in the Bencao Tujing (Illustrated Classics of Materia Medica) by Su, Song in Song Dynasty, which states, “In the past, there was no mentioning of the place of origin of mugwort leaf, except that it grew in the field. Now it grows everywhere, with the best one being from Fudao (now Tangyin County, Anyang City, Henan Province)”. In the Collected Essentials of Species of Materia Medica finalized during the Hongzhi years ofin Ming Dynasty, it states "Illustrated Classics of Materia Medica says that it grew in the field and now it grows everywhere. Its authentic places of origin include Qizhou (now Hunchun County, Hubei Province) and Mingzhou (now approximately Yin County, Ningbo City, Zhejiang Province)." The Materia Medica Companion by Chen, Jia-mo in Ming Dynasty describes, "it can be used for treatment of diseases, and the best mugwort is from Qiz Zhou, which has a single stem, round leaves, and white back with awns and is invaluable for collection. Officials there also like to collect them and give them as a precious gift wrapped in expensive paper to those in the two capital cities. Its name is thus spread even farther, and it is known everywhere. " According to these statements, people back then valued Qizhou Mugwort, but it was not until the Ming Dynasty when Li, Shi-zhen and his father proposed the name, "Qizhou Mugwort". Li, Yan-wen who was Li, Shi-zhen’s father, once wrote a book, About Qizhou Mugwort, but unfortunately this book became lost over time. In the Compendium of Materia Medica by Li, Shi-zhen in Ming Dynasty, there is a detailed description about the authentic place of origin of mugwort leaf, stating that “authentic mugwort leaf is not produced in the local place, but it grows in the field. In Song Dynasty, it is said the best mugwort is from Tangying Fudao, and it also grows in Siming. In modern medicine, the mugwort from Tangying Fudao is called North Mugwort, and the one from Siming is called Hai Ai (sea mugwort). Since the Chenghua years, the Mmugwort from Qizhou has isbeen considered better and used in prescriptions, and it has been valued widelyextensively and is called Qi Ai (Qizhou Mugwort). It was said that moxibustion with mugworts from other places cannot penetrate through a wine jar, and that moxibustion with Qizhou Mugwort can penetrate through right away." However, there are also objections to the view of considering Qizhou Mugwort as the authentic medicinal herb. For example, the Materia Medica Companion by Chen, Jia-mo mentioned that “(Qizhou Mugwort) is the root of Hupeh Euphorbia by its shape. Many people do not know what it is
know what it is and call it mugwort”, and it did not accept Qizhou Mugwort’s status of authentic crude medicinal herb. It is also considered as not a species of mugwort in Bencao Shu Gou Yuan (Outline of Matea Medica Description) and Essentials of Matea Medica. Li, Shi-zhen pointed out in the book Compendium of Materia Medica - Root of Hupeh Euphorbia that “the Materia Medica Companion by Chen, Jia-mo regards it as Qizhou Mugwort, which is wrong.” Mei, Quan-xi [2] has conducted a verification study and thinks that the picture of Qizhou Mugwort leaf in the book Materia Medica Companion is very consistent with that of modern Qizhou Mugwort, but the description of “single stem, round leaves, and white back with awns" is completely taken from the characteristics of the Root of Hupeh Euphorbia recorded in the Illustrated Classics of Materia Medica, which leads to a contradiction between the description and the picture, so he believes that Qizhou Mugwort is not the Root of Hupeh Euphorbia. From the point of view of modern pharmacognosy, Qizhou Mugwort is similar to the dry leaf of Artemisia argyi levl, et Vant. When the leaf is flattened, it has an oval and elliptic shape, a pinnate and elliptic deep fissure that is lanceolate, and has irregular thick serrations in the margin. The minor differences are that Qizhou Mugwort has larger and thicker leaves than Artemisia argyi, with yellowish green and white gland points on the surface and a thick villous layer under the surface. According to this, it can be confirmed that Qizhou Mugwort is not the Root of Hupeh Euphorbia, but a kind of Artemisia argyi levl, et Vant. Based on the descriptions in both ancient and modern literatures, Qizhou Mugwort has been recognized as an authentic medicinal herb since Ming Dynasty, its status being very stable.
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the utility model
Valve shaft bearing structure
2. Registered claims of the utility model
A valve shaft bearing structure which is provided with a bearing hole for rotatably supporting a shaft neck part of a valve shaft which has an intake control valve for controlling the opening degree of an intake passage in a support body which has a cast-molded intake passage, characterized in that a casting window is provided on the support body between the intake passage and the outer surface of the support body, and the casting window exposes the middle portion of the shaft neck part to the outside of the bearing hole.
/3
3. Detailed description of the utility model
A. Purpose of the utility model
(1) Field of industrial use
The present invention relates to a valve shaft bearing structure, wherein a cast-molded support body having an intake passage is provided with a bearing hole for rotatably supporting a shaft neck part of a valve shaft which has an intake control valve for controlling the opening degree of the intake passage.
(2) Prior Art
Sometimes, the space between the intake passage and the outer surface of the support body may need to be relatively large, so conventionally a relatively long bearing hole is bored in the support body, and the shaft neck part of the valve shaft is rotatably inserted into the bearing hole.
(3) Problems to be solved by the utility model
However, when the length of the solid portion is large during casting of the support body, it is easy to generate casting voids, and when the bearing holes are bored in the portions where voids are present, it will not only become difficult for processing, but also cause swarf remaining in the voids which may interfere with the operation of the valve shaft or cause abrasion of the valve shaft.
/4
The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, it is an objective of the present invention to provide a valve shaft bearing structure which not only prevents the generation of voids in the support body as much as possible and to improve the processability of the bearing hole while enabling smooth operation of the valve shaft and preventing its abrasion.
B. Configuration of the utility model
(1) Means for solving problems
According to the present invention, a casting window which exposes the middle portion of the shaft neck part to the outside of the bearing hole is provide in the support body between the intake passage and the outer surface of the support body.
(2) Function
By providing the casting window, the length of the solid portion of the support body is reduced, and the generation of casting voids can be avoided as much as possible. Moreover, the effective span for supporting the shaft neck part is not reduced.
(3) Embodiments
An embodiment of the present invention applicable for a V-type 6-cylinder engine will be described below with reference to the drawings. In Fig. 1 which shows one embodiment of the present invention, in a
/5
cast-molded support body 1, the 1st~6th high-speed intake passages 2a~2f and the 1st~6th low-speed intake passages 3a~3f which have a diameter smaller than that of the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f are bored to be in parallel with each other. The support body 1 is integrally coupled with blocks (not shown) disposed at the front and back of the support body 1 to constitute intake manifolds.
The engine body, which is not shown in the figure, is configured by arranging the left and the right 3 cylinders in a V shape, and the 1st~3rd high-speed intake passages 2a~2c and the 1st~3rd low-speed intake passages 3a~3c are paired with the intake ports of each cylinder on one side and then they are connected. The 4th~6th high-speed intake passages 2d~2f and the 4th~6th low-speed intake passages 3d~3f are paired with the intake ports of each cylinder on the other side and then they are connected.
In the support body 1, the 1st~3rd high-speed intake passages 2a~2c and the 1st~3rd low-speed intake passages 3a~3c, and the 4th~6th high-speed intake passages 2d~2f and the 4th~6th low-speed intake passages 3d~3f are arranged symmetrically between left and right in 4 stages, one stage over
/6
another. That is, in the uppermost stage, starting from the right side, the 3rd, 2nd, 5th and 6th low-speed intake passages 3c, 3b, 3e, 3f are arranged in order. In the 2nd stage, staring from the right side, the 3rd, 2nd, 5th and 6th high-speed intake passages 2c, 2b, 2e and 2f are arranged in order. In the 3rd stage, starting from the right side, the 1st and 4th high-speed intake passages 2a and 2d are arranged in order. In the bottommost stage, starting from the right side, the 1st and 4th low-speed intake passages 3a, 3d are arranged in order.
The length of each of the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f is set to a value that can maximize the filling efficiency by the intake inertia effect at the time of a high-speed operation of the engine, and the length of each of the low-speed intake passages 3a~3f is set to a value that can maximize the filling efficiency by the intake inertia effect at the time of a low-speed operation of the engine. That is, each of the low-speed intake passages 3a~3f is used during a low-speed operation of the engine, and at this time each of the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f is closed. The high-speed intake passages 2a~2f are used during high-speed operations of the engine. When each of the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f is opened, the intake air is mainly distributed to the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f due to the small intake resistance, nevertheless the low speed intake passages 3a~3f are opened.
/7
The 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f for opening and closing the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f are disposed as intake control valves respectively. The 1st and 4th butterfly valves 4a, 4d horizontally traverse the 1st and 4th high-speed intake passages 2a, 2d and are fixed to the 1st valve shaft 5 which is rotatably supported on the support body 1. The 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th butterfly valves 4b, 4c, 4e, 4f horizontally traverse the 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th high-speed intake passages 2b, 2c, 2e, 2f and are fixed to the 2nd valve shaft 6 which is rotatably supported on the support body 1.
Referring also to Fig. 2, on each extension of the arrangement direction of the 1st and 4th high-speed intake passages 2a, 2d and the arrangement direction of the 3rd, 2nd, 5th and 6th high-speed intake passages 2c, 2b, 2e, 2f, boss portions 7 and 8 are provided and protruded on an outer surface 1a of the support body 1, and one end of the 1st and 2nd shafts 5 and 6 protrude from the boss portions 7 and 8. In addition, an actuating lever 9 is fixed to the protruding end of the 2nd valve shaft 6, and a spring
/8
10 for biasing the valve in the valve opening direction is interposed between the actuating lever 9 and the support body 1. Further, on the protruding end of the 1st valve shaft 5, an actuating lever 11 is fixed, an auxiliary lever 12 which can be engaged with the actuating lever 11 and can rotate within a restricted range is mounted, and a spring 13 is interposed between the actuating lever 11 and the auxiliary lever 12 to exert a spring force in a direction to engage both levers. Furthermore, a spring 14 for energizing the valve in the valve opening direction is interposed between the auxiliary lever 12 and the support body 1. Furthermore, the actuating lever 9 and the auxiliary lever 12 are connected by a connecting link 15, and both valve shafts 5, 6 are energized in the valve opening direction and interlocked with each other.
A negative pressure actuator 16 is connected to the actuating lever 9 which is fixed to the 2nd valve shaft 6. That is, the negative pressure actuator 16 is configured to contract the drive rod 17 in response to an increase in the introduced negative pressure, and to extend the drive rod 17 in response to a decrease in the negative pressure. The drive rod 17 is connected to the actuating lever 9 in such a manner that the actuating
/9
lever 9 is pivoted in the valve closing direction when it is contracted. Moreover, a boost negative pressure is introduced to the negative pressure actuator 16 which increases in accordance with the low-speed operation of the engine; therefore, at low speed operations of the engine, both valve shafts 5 and 6 are turned to the valve closing direction against the spring force of the springs 10 and 14.
In Fig. 3, the 1st and 4th high-speed intake passages 2a, d [sic! the source seems to be missing a number “2” before the letter “d”] are arranged close to each other, and there is a relatively large space between the intake passages 2a, 2d and both outer side surfaces 1a, 1b of the support body 1. This part only needs to fulfill the function of bearing the 1st valve shaft 5, and if it is made solid, it will cause an increase in weight, that is, an increase in the metal material for casting. Also, in order to prevent the generation of casting voids as much as possible during casting, it is preferable that the volume of the solid parts should be as small as possible.
From these points of view, the support body 1 is provided with recesses 20 and 21 dug from two sides to provide ribs 18 and 19 in the middle between the outer side surfaces 1a, 1b and the intake passages 2a, 2d. Furthermore, casting windows 22 and 23 are provided in the ribs 20, 21 in the area close to the middle portion of the shaft neck part 5a
/10
of one end of the 1st valve shaft 5 and in the area close to the other end of the 1st valve shaft 5. Moreover, in the recess 21, a boss portion 24 for supporting the other end of the 1st valve shaft 5 is integrally provided.
Thus, the 1st valve shaft 5 is rotatably supported by a bearing hole 25 bored in the boss portion 7, a bearing hole 26 provided between the casting window 22 and the 1st high-speed intake passage 2a, a bearing hole 27 provided between the passages 2a and 2d, and a bearing hole 28 bored in the boss portion 24 between the 4th high-speed intake passage 2d and the casting window 23. In addition, the 1st valve shaft 5 is biased toward one end by the spring 14, and the other end of the 1st valve shaft 5 is fitted with a snap ring 29 that abuts on the boss portion 24 to restrict axial movement.
The 1st valve shaft 5 is directly supported by the bearing holes 25, 26, 27, 28, and at one end, a seal member 30 is interposed between the 1st valve shaft 5 and the boss portion 7. Further, on the extension of the bearing hole 28, a through hole 31 is bored between the casting window 23 and the outer surface 1b for the necessity of drilling machining. Furthermore, since there is no seal structure provided between the other end of the 1st valve shaft 5 and the bearing hole 28, to prevent leakage
/11
of the gas, which is transmitted from the 4th high-speed intake passage 2d to the casting window 23, the through hole 31 is closed by a blind lid 32.
Next, the structure of mounting the 1st and the 4th butterfly valves 4a, 4d to the 1st valve shaft 5, and the structure of mounting the 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 6th butterfly valves 4b, 4c, 4e, 4f to the 2nd valve shaft 6 will be described. Since all of the mounting structures are basically the same, only the mounting structure, that is, the structure of mounting the 1st butterfly valve 4a to the 1st valve shaft 5 will be described below in detail.
In Fig. 4 which shows the valve’s closed state, in the part of the 1st valve shaft 5 close to the 1st high-speed intake passage 2a, a mounting surface 33 parallel to the axis O of the 1st valve shaft 5 is provided by notching an area with a central angle α of less than 180 degrees, and the 1st butterfly valve 4a is fixed to the 1st valve shaft 5 by a pair of screw members 35 with one of its surface 34 contacting the mounting surface 33.
On the other hand, the other surface 36 of the butterfly valve 2a intersects the outer peripheral surface of the 1st valve shaft 5 at 2
/12
locations, and of these two intersections 43, 44, only the intersection 43 can pass through the virtual plane 37 which passes through the axis O of the 1st valve shaft 5 and is orthogonal to the high-speed intake passage 2a in response to the rotation of the 1st valve shaft 5. A tapered portion 38 is provided in the 1st high-speed intake passage 2a, and its diameter is smaller at least at the position corresponding to said intersection point 43 when the 1st butterfly valve 4a is the fully-closed state, and its diameter increases as it is closer to the virtual plane 37. The tapered portion 38 is set to a steeper gradient than a general tapered gradient for casting.
In Fig. 5, the 1st butterfly valve 4a is formed in a basically circular shape corresponding to the 1st intake passage 2a which has a circular cross section; however when the valve is in the fully-closed state, gaps 41, 42 are formed between the inner surface of the 1st high speed intake passage 2a and the two end edges 39, 40 of the valve along the direction of the 1st valve shaft 5. In the fully-closed state, the length ℓ1 between the two end edges 39, 40 along the direction of 1st valve shaft 5 on the plane surface of the 1st butterfly valve 4a is smaller than the distance ℓ2 between the inner surfaces of the 1st high-speed intake passage 2a at the corresponding position. Moreover, the difference (ℓ2-ℓ1) is set to be gradually smaller as it moves away from the 1st valve shaft 5.
/13
To deal with any increase of leakage due to the provision of the gaps 41, 42, a molybdenum paint can be applied to the two end edges 39, 40 of the 1st butterfly valve 4a and one or both of the inner surfaces of the 1st high-speed intake passage 2a.
The shapes of the 2nd~6th butterfly valves 4b~4f and their mounting to the 1st and 2nd valve shafts 5, 6 are also basically the same as the shape of the 1st butterfly valve 4a and its mounting to the 1st valve shaft 5 as described above.
Next, the function of this embodiment will be described. During a low-speed operation of the engine, the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f are fully closed under the action of the negative pressure actuator 16. Therefore, the 1st~6th high-speed intake passages 2a~2f are closed, and the air distributed to the 1st~6th low-speed intake passages 3a to 3f is supplied to the engine body.
When the engine enters a predetermined high-speed operation state, the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f are opened respectively to open the 1st~6th
/14
high-speed intake passages 2a~2f. Thus, the air mainly flows through the 1st~6th high-speed intake passages 2a~2f which have a small intake resistance and is supplied to the engine main body.
In such an intake control device, since the gaps 41 and 42 are formed between the end edges 39, 40 and the inner surfaces of the 1st~6th high-speed intake passages 2a to 2f, along the direction of the valve shafts 5, 6 of the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f which are in the fully-closed state, even if there is a difference in thermal expansion between the valve shaft 5, 6 and the support body 1, the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f are prevented from galling on the inner surfaces of the 1st~6th high-speed intake passages 2a~2f, and the operation can be smoothly transitioned from the valve fully-closed state to the valve opening state.
Further, in the valve fully-closed state, until the portions (as shown in Fig. 4) of all the butterfly valves 4a~4f from the virtual plane 37 to the intersection 43 pass through the virtual plane 37 during valve opening operations, the distances ℓ2 between the corresponding inner surfaces of the high-speed intake passages 2a~2f are gradually reduced,
/15
and galling tends to occur. However, since a tapered portion 38 is provided in each high-speed intake passage 2a~2f whose diameter is smaller at least at the position corresponding to the intersection point 43 in the fully-closed state and is larger when the intersection is being moved towards the virtual plane 37, which, combined with the gaps 41 and 42 makes it possible to have a smooth operation to prevent the galling of the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f.
Moreover, in order to mount the respective butterfly valves 4a~4f onto the 1st and 2nd valve shafts 5, 6, the mounting surfaces 33 by notching an area with a central angle α of less than 180 degrees are provided on the 1st and 2nd valve shafts 5, 6. Because the solid portions of 1st and 2nd valve shafts 5, 6 cover a range of more than 180 degrees of the central angle at the mounting positions of the 1st~6th butterfly valves 4a~4f, the strength against bending, stretching, compressing, twisting and the like can be increased, and deformation during machining can be reduced to ensure straightness.
Furthermore, at the portions corresponding to the 1st valve shaft 5, the casting windows 22, 23 are provided in the support body 1 between the 1st and 4th high-speed intake passages 2a, 2d and the outer surfaces 1a, 1b of the support body 1. Hence it is possible not only to reduce the raw material for the casting of the support body 1 and achieve weight reduction;
/16
but also to prevent the formation of casting voids at the time of casting and facilitate the drilling of the bearing holes 25~28. Moreover, by preventing the formation of voids, casting void openings on the inner surfaces of the respective bearing holes 25~28 can be avoided to prevent swarf from remaining in the casting voids, so the 1st and 2nd valve shafts 5, 6 can have smooth operations.
In another embodiment of the present invention, the portions of the 1st valve shaft 5 corresponding to the bearing holes 26, 27 may be partially reduced in diameter, to avoid the increase of friction loss as a result of the increased shaft supporting points due to the provision of the casting windows 22, 23.
Fig. 6 and Fig. 7 show yet another embodiment of the present invention, for the butterfly valve 4a', the portions extending from both sides of the valve shaft 5 are formed in a shape that matches a diameter line of the valve shaft 5. This further prevents galling on the inner surface of the intake passage 2a. Moreover, the two end edges 33a and 33b in the
/17
longitudinal direction of the mounting surface 33 of the valve shaft 5 are rounded, whereby the strength of the valve shaft 5 is further improved.
C. Effects of utility model
As described above, according to the present invention, since the casting windows exposing the middle portion of the shaft neck part to the outside of the bearing hole are provided in the support body between the intake passages and the outer surface of the support body. The solid portion is reduced, which not only achieves the reduction of casting raw material and the weight of the support body, but also prevents the formation of casting voids to improve machinable and enables the smooth operation of the valve shaft. Moreover, the effective span for supporting the shaft neck part will not be decreased.
中国語 から 英語: Research Advance on Vaccine Candidates Against Streptococcus suis Serotype 2 General field: 科学 Detailed field: `冶金/鋳造
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract:
Streptococcus suis is a globally serious zoonotic pathogen and its infj ection is difficult to control because of the lack of an effective vaccine. Vaccine research is currently focused on serotype 2, which is the most widely spread. Methods for Streptococcus suis vaccine research include the construction of gene expression library, immunoproteomics method, reverse vaccinology method, and other traditional methods. This article reviews the candidate molecules for Streptococcus suis serotype 2 vaccines that have been identified and evaluated so far, including whole-cell bacterial vaccine, capsular polysaccharide, and protein antigens. Many of these vaccine candidate molecules have protective effects in mice or pigs, but more effort is needed to obtain a universal vaccine against more serotypes.
Key words: Streptococcus suis; vaccine; serotype 2; protective antigen
Streptococcus suis serotype 2 can cause sepsis, meningitis, arthritis and bronchitis, etc. in pigs. People exposed to sick (dead) pigs and their raw meat products can also be infected with Streptococcus suis, and clinical manifestations such as meningitis, sepsis, endocarditis, etc. appear after onset. Since Denmark first reported human infection with Streptococcus suis in 1968, cases of Streptococcus suis infections have been reported in some countries in Europe and the United States, but they mainly occurred sporadically, and no outbreak or prevalence was seen. In 1998 and 2005, two outbreaks of human infections with Streptococcus suis serotype 2 respectively in Jiangsu and Sichuan provinces, China caused 14 deaths and 38 deaths respectively [1, 2]. Different from the foreign infection cases which had the main characteristic of meningitis, most of the death cases in China were shock type, whose characteristics were acute onset, serious illness, short course of disease, and high mortality. Vaccine is one of effective methods to prevent and control infectious diseases. This paper is intended to summarize the research on candidate molecules for Streptococcus suis serotype 2 vaccine at home and abroad and provides a future development outlook.
1 Full bacteria vaccine
Some researchers used formalin-inactivated Streptococcus suis bacteria for intravenous injection which could stimulate pigs to produce opsonized antibodies [3], and some researchers screened for non-virulent Streptococcus suis mutants, such as temperature-sensitive mutant, Streptomycin dependent mutant and the like to obtain a protective whole-cell bacterial vaccine [4-6]. Pallares FJ et al. [6] used the method of cefotaxime inactivation to prepare a whole-cell bacterial vaccine, and significant difference in mortality and morbidity of pigs was found between its vaccination group and the control group. Fitipaldi N et al. [7] constructed the strain S735 which is aromatic amino acid-deficient and capsule-deficient, and mild clinical symptoms were observed after it was used for immunization in pigs. The survival rate of the immunized group using S735 was 100%, as compared to 57% in the control group. A whole-cell bacterial vaccine generally has a good protective effect on the homologous strain and has a poor protection effect on the heterologous strain with significant side effects.
2 Traditional virulence factors
Bacterial virulence factors interact with host cells during bacterial pathogenesis, usually have good immunogenicity and are often used to try the immunoprotective effects.
2.1 CPS
Capsular polysaccharide has anti-phagocytic activity and plays a role in the pathogenesis of Streptococcus suis. Like other bacterial capsules, the capsule of S. suis serotype 2 also exhibits weak immunogenicity [8]. In order to effectively stimulate the body's immune response it needs to be combined with other proteins. Baums CG et al. [9] used a serotype 2 capsule-conjugated BSA-immunized pig to obtain a high-priced serum and evaluated its opsonic bactericidal activity.
2.2 MRP (lysozyme releasing protein) and EF (extracellular factor)
Vecht U et al. [10] analyzed 180 strains of Dutch Streptococcus suis serotype 2 isolated from sick pigs and patients and healthy pigs, respectively.
_____________________________________________________________________
The results showed that the strains isolated from sick pigs contained 2 proteins, namely MRP and EF, which were identified as virulence related proteins, but the specific functions of these two proteins are still unclear. Wisselink HJ et al. [11] obtained the recombinant expressing MRP and EF and immunized pigs with it, and the vaccine showed good protective effect. 8 of the 9 tested pigs survived and had few clinical symptoms.
2.3 SLY (suilysin)
Streptococcus suis hemolysin, also known as suilysin, is a family of thiol-activated toxins and it dissolves red blood cells by acting on cholesterol on the erythrocyte membrane. Jacobs AA [11, 12] purified natural SLY from the culture supernatant of Streptococcus suis P1/7 and detected its hemolytic activity. The purified SLY, concentrated supernatant, and other supernatant fractions with the SLY removed were used to immunize mice, and then the homologous strains were used to challenge intraperitoneally. The results showed that the purified SLY and the concentrated supernatant were completely immunoprotective but the other supernatant fractions with the SLY removed were not protective. Partial protection was obtained by using isolated and purified SLY to immunize pigs [l3].
3 Other protective antigens
3.1 38 kD protein
Okwumabua O [l4] used a recombinant DNA library method and found a 38 kD protein which bound to a rabbit polyclonal antibody of Streptococcus suis serotype 2 and expressed and purified it. Western Blot proved that the antibody was present in the serum of sick pigs; nucleic acid hybridization confirmed that the gene was widely present in 31 serotypes. After the purified protein was used to immunize pigs, it had immunological protection against the strains of Streptococcus suis serotype 2. 5 pigs were tested, and only one was ill and there was no death; in the 5 pigs of the control group, 5 were ill and 3 died.
3.2 6PGD (6-phosphogluconate dehydrogenase)
6PGD is an enzyme of the pentose phosphate cycle. Tan C et al. [27] expressed and purified this protein, and immunized CD-1 mice with it, and then used the strain SC19 to challenge. The results showed that the mice of the control group were all dead, while the survival rate of the immunized group was 80%. An adhesion inhibition test proved that the protein was related to the adhesion of the strain SC19 to Hep2 [sic! possible source typo for “Hep-2”] and HeLa cells, and Western Blot initially proved that the protein was present on the surface of the bacteria.
3.3 Sao
Li Y et al. [15] used the strain S735 genome to construct an expression library and used the convalescent pig serum infected with the strain S735 to screen positive clones and found a 110 kD protein which was named Sao. It was testified by immunoelectron microscopy that the protein was expressed on the surface of the bacteria. Western Blot proved that 28 of the 33 serotypes tested were detected, and 25 of the 26 serotype 2 isolates were detected. Sao is polymorphic between serotype 2 isolates from different regions, and its molecular weight is smaller in the strains 31533 and 166 than in the strain S735. An opsonocytophagic test in rabbit anti-Sao serum proved that it has bactericidal activity against serotype 2 strains 31533 and 166, and it was proved in the CD-l mouse model that it is protective against the strain 31533. The survival rate of the immunized mouse group was 100%, and that of the control group was 20%. It was proven in the pig model that it can provide protection against the strain 166. The survival rate of the immunized porcine group was 82% and that of the control group was 42%, indicating that Sao is also protective against strains expressing the Sao variant [16].
3.4 Enolase
Enolase is an enzyme which is related to glycolysis and gluconeogenesis. Esgleas M et al. [17] proved that Streptococcus suis enolase has fibronectin and plasminogen binding activity, and its antibodies can inhibit the adhesion and invasion of the strain SS166' to/into PBMEC (pig brain microvascular endothelial cells). It was testified by immunoelectron microscopy that enolase localizes to the bacterial surface. Western Blot proved that it is present both on the cell wall surface and in the cytoplasm and is present in all Streptococcus suis serotypes. Zhang A. et al. [18] expressed and purified enolase and demonstrated that it could effectively activate humoral immunity on a mouse model and had protective effects against Streptococcus suis serotype 2 and Streptococcus suis serotype 7. RT-PCR proved that enolase is an inducible expression antigen in vivo. Indirect immunofluorescence and inhibition tests have proved that enolase can adhere to Hep-2 cells.
3.5 Lipoprotein
Aranda J et al. [26] identified three divalent cation-binding lipoproteins and expressed and purified them, all of which could react with the serum of mice infected with the strain 89/1591. 8 BALB/c mice were immunized respectively, and then 20 times LD50 dose of the strain 89/1591 was used to challenge. All of mice in the control group and the SsuiDRAFT 0174 group died, the survival rate of the SsuiDRAFT 1237 immunization group was 50%, and the survival rate of the SsuiDRAFT 0103 immunization group was 87.5%, the differences being statistically significant.
4 The screening for vaccines against high-virulence Streptococcus suis
serotype 2 in China
Almost at the same time, three research groups in China, including our laboratory, used immunoproteomics methods to screen for domestic high-virulence strains of immune antigens, with differences in the preparation of cell wall samples [19-22]. Zhang W et al. [21] used Triton X-l14 method to extract and prepare the cell wall samples of domestic virulent strain HA9801. Zhang A et al. [20] used pressure disruption, ultracentrifugation, combined with lysozyme to release the cell wall protein of strain ZYS, and our laboratory [19] used a method of 25% hypertonic sucrose in combination with lysozyme to release the cell wall protein of strain 98012. Zhang A [20] expressed seven proteins of MRP, SSU98_0197, SSU98_1675, SSU98_1036, Sao, putative cyclo-nucleotide phosphodiesterase and IF2. Except for SSU98_1675 and SSU98_1036, the other five proteins demonstrated by Western blot that their antibodies were present in the pig convalescent sera, and immunofluorescence electron microscopy confirmed that they were on the cell wall surface. ELISA verified that antibody levels against the three antigens of SSU98_0197, IF2 and putative cyclo-nucleotide phosphodiesterase were significantly elevated in the sera of 22 sick pigs compared to the levels in the sera of 20 healthy pigs. Except for MRP, 9 antigens were expressed in our laboratory [19], and rat antiserum was prepared. The results of a bactericidal test in rat serum-opsonized [sic! “serum-opsonized” is possibly a typo in source for “antiserum-opsonized”] human whole blood showed that the antiserum-opsonized bactericidal rates were above 50% against SSU98_0171, SSU98_0197, SSU98_0267, SSU98_1094, SSU98_1819 and SSU1664. Western blot was used to verify the presence of the screened antigens in 16 strains of Streptococcus suis serotype 2, and the results showed that there were no differences in the expression of the 5 proteins of SSU98_0171, SSU98_1094, SSU98_1549, SSU98_1819 and SSU1664 between the 16 strains and there were differences in the expression of four antigens of SSU98_0197, SSU98_0201, SSU98_0267 and SSU98_1675 between different strains. ELISA was used to compare the presence of antibodies in serum between patients and healthy people, before and after infections in pigs, and before and after immunization in pigs, respectively. SSU98_0197, SSU98_1094, and SSU1664 were finally determined as the targets for further research. The results of the above three test groups are slightly different but mutually confirm and complement each other, which increases the stability and reliability of the test results and provides a basis for subsequent research. Liu L [23] identified 153 protective antigen genes using reverse vaccinology, and selected 10 from them for expression and purification, immunized BALB/c mice with them and challenged them. The results showed that RfeA, ESA, IBP, and SLY have obvious protective effects. A further analysis showed that RfeA, ESA, and IBP mainly cause humoral immunity, and SLY can effectively stimulate humoral immunity and cellular immunity.
5 Outlook
There are 35 serotypes of Streptococcus suis, and serotype 2 is highly pathogenic and has the widest scope of prevalence, while the other serotypes shows regional differences in their distributions. Wisselink HJ et al. [24] identified 411 strains of European sick pig isolates, found that serotype 2 accounted for 32%, serotype 9 accounted for 20%, serotype 1 accounted for 12%; Wei Z et al. identified the isolates of Chinese sick pigs in the years of 2003 to 2007 and found that serotype 2 accounted for 43.2%, serotype 3 accounted for 14.7%, and serotype 4, 8, 5, 7, and 1/2 accounted for 3.2-6.4%, respectively. Even with the same Streptococcus suis serotype 2, there are phenotypic differences in antigenic proteins between the strains from different regions. For example, European strains
/3
are mainly MRP+, EF+, and SLY+, while Canadian strains are mainly MRP-, EF-, and SLY- [25], so vaccines with MRP, EF, and SLY as main components are difficult to have a protective effect for the latter.
At present, the research of Streptococcus suis vaccines mainly focuses on serotype 2, but it is hoped that each vaccine candidate molecule has a broader protection to protect against not only serotype 2 strains from different sources, but also other serotypes so that it can be a candidate for a universal vaccine. Baums CG [9] used SS2 whole-cell bacterial vaccine to immunize pigs, and it has protective effect against serotype SS2 and has no obvious protective effect against serotype SS9. Consistent with this, antiserum has no opsonophagocytic activity on the strain SS9, suggesting that the vaccine has no cross-protection effects. The 38 kD protein is widely present in 31 serotypes, but its cross-protection has not been evaluated; Sao [15, 16] has proved that it has protective effects on serotype 2 strains which express Sao variants, but it was not evaluated for other serotypes; enolase [17] is widely present in different serotype strains, but currently it only has a protective effect on serotype 2 and serotype 7. The proteins SSU98_0197 and SSU98_0267 [19] screened in our laboratory are also polymorphic, and the effect of such polymorphism on immune protection needs further verification.
The methods of immunoproteomics and reverse vaccinology provide a large number of candidate molecules for Streptococcus suis vaccine research, and in-depth evaluation and screening of these candidate molecules is underway. The research on the pathogenesis of Streptococcus suis is also making progress, which will provide more clues and evidences for the screening of vaccine candidate molecules.
日本語 から 英語: Life Sciences Patient Medical Report General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Case Description
We read it directly and confirmed that there was no problem with eligibility. Meeting with another doctor, who is the attending doctor, at the next visit was scheduled to confirm the content.
● Course of hospitalization
(Names of injuries or diseases in medical record)
Prostatic hyperplasia Mar. 4, 2002-
Suspected prostate cancer Jul. 10, 2002-
Neurogenic bladder Aug. 14, 2002-
Acute prostatitis Aug. 14, 2002-
Suspected hematuria/urinary bladder cancer Sep. 12, 2003-
Urethritis Sep 16, 2003-
Cervical spondylotic radiculopathy Cervical Nephropathy Oct. 04, 2004-
Left carpal tunnel syndrome Feb. 20, 2006-
(Cardiology)
[At the first visit] Hospitalized from Mar. 04 to Jun. 04, 2002
The subject had sudden left hemiplegia during breakfast on March 4. Brain CT: no bleeding, MRI: no changes.
MRI on Mar. 11 revealed lesions in the right and middle cerebral artery regions.
After admission, the subject had unstable condition due to left hemiplegia caused by cerebral infarction and had insomnia during night, and it was quite dangerous for the subject to try to move without support. The patient could walk with a cane after rehabilitation and was discharged from the hospital.
=> Discharge diagnosis: cerebral infarction, atrial fibrillation and hyperlipidaemia
=> Prescription of warfarin was started
From Aug. 18 to Aug. 29, 2002, the patient was admitted to another hospital due to right carotid artery occlusion and multiple cerebral infarctions.
The condition became better with treatment of thrombosis, and the prescription of Bayaspirin is being given. (According to the patient referral document dated Aug. 23, 2002)
Oct. 25, 2002, ophthalmology found narrowing of the vision field → scheduled to confirm it with another doctor whether it was sequelae of cerebral infarction.
Mar. 22-Mar. 23, 2005 Hospitalized for PSG due to suspected SAS → SAS denied
Jul. 23, 2007, participated in the study DU-176b
May 9-May 10, 2008 Hospitalized for PSG due to suspected SAS → SAS denied
Jul. 11, 2008, participated in a study of Apixaban
(Urology)
Jul. 10, 2002, post cerebral infarction, poor cutting of urinary flow, difficulty urinating +
Prescription: Harnal
Jul. 23, 2002, PSA 1.62 → OK (prostate cancer denied), difficulty urinating +
14Aug2002, feeling of urinary urgency
Prescription: BUP-4
Sep. 12, 2003, detailed examinations for suspected hematuria/bladder cancer
Examinations results → Echo: hydro-, stone-, tumor-
Cytology: Class III, atypical cells with increased nuclear chromatin and irregular nuclear forms were observed.
Diagnosis: urethritis
Nov. 25, 2003, cytology: class III
Jan. 30, 2004, cytology: class I
Apr. 10, 2004, cytology: class I, atypical cells not seen in the sumer this time. -> bladder cancer denied
● Screening: Oct. 8, 2009
Date obtaining the consent: Oct. 9, 2009
Vital signs: blood pressure 120/62 mmHg, pulse rate 72, weight 65.7 kg, an Asian patient
CHADS2 score: 3 (aged 75 years or above, past history of cerebral infarction/TIA)
Past history of smoking and alcohol use of 3 units/week
Physical findings: no organ dysfunction
ECG: Clinically significant abnormality (AF)
In-hospital INR: 2.15
◎ Prescription at screening
Warfarin potassium, Ribitol, Symmetrel, Bayaspirin, Selbex, Halfdigoxin-KY, Vasolan, Pursennid, Seltouch, Calblock, Diovan, and Restamin Kowa Ointment
Monitor’s comments
First approver’s comments
Second approver’s comments
First approver’s instructions
Second approver’s instructions
Monitor’s corresponding actions
日本語 から 英語: Life Sciences Patient Medical Report General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療(一般)
翻訳 - 英語 Case Description
We read it directly and confirmed that there was no problem with eligibility. Meeting with another doctor, who is the attending doctor, at the next visit was scheduled to confirm the content.
● Course of hospitalization
(Names of injuries or diseases in medical record)
Prostatic hyperplasia Mar. 4, 2002-
Suspected prostate cancer Jul. 10, 2002-
Neurogenic bladder Aug. 14, 2002-
Acute prostatitis Aug. 14, 2002-
Suspected hematuria/urinary bladder cancer Sep. 12, 2003-
Urethritis Sep 16, 2003-
Cervical spondylotic radiculopathy Cervical Nephropathy Oct. 04, 2004-
Left carpal tunnel syndrome Feb. 20, 2006-
(Cardiology)
[At the first visit] Hospitalized from Mar. 04 to Jun. 04, 2002
The subject had sudden left hemiplegia during breakfast on March 4. Brain CT: no bleeding, MRI: no changes.
MRI on Mar. 11 revealed lesions in the right and middle cerebral artery regions.
After admission, the subject had unstable condition due to left hemiplegia caused by cerebral infarction and had insomnia during night, and it was quite dangerous for the subject to try to move without support. The patient could walk with a cane after rehabilitation and was discharged from the hospital.
=> Discharge diagnosis: cerebral infarction, atrial fibrillation and hyperlipidaemia
=> Prescription of warfarin was started
From Aug. 18 to Aug. 29, 2002, the patient was admitted to another hospital due to right carotid artery occlusion and multiple cerebral infarctions.
The condition became better with treatment of thrombosis, and the prescription of Bayaspirin is being given. (According to the patient referral document dated Aug. 23, 2002)
Oct. 25, 2002, ophthalmology found narrowing of the vision field → scheduled to confirm it with another doctor whether it was sequelae of cerebral infarction.
Mar. 22-Mar. 23, 2005 Hospitalized for PSG due to suspected SAS → SAS denied
Jul. 23, 2007, participated in the study DU-176b
May 9-May 10, 2008 Hospitalized for PSG due to suspected SAS → SAS denied
Jul. 11, 2008, participated in a study of Apixaban
(Urology)
Jul. 10, 2002, post cerebral infarction, poor cutting of urinary flow, difficulty urinating +
Prescription: Harnal
Jul. 23, 2002, PSA 1.62 → OK (prostate cancer denied), difficulty urinating +
14Aug2002, feeling of urinary urgency
Prescription: BUP-4
Sep. 12, 2003, detailed examinations for suspected hematuria/bladder cancer
Examinations results → Echo: hydro-, stone-, tumor-
Cytology: Class III, atypical cells with increased nuclear chromatin and irregular nuclear forms were observed.
Diagnosis: urethritis
Nov. 25, 2003, cytology: class III
Jan. 30, 2004, cytology: class I
Apr. 10, 2004, cytology: class I, atypical cells not seen in the sumer this time. -> bladder cancer denied
● Screening: Oct. 8, 2009
Date obtaining the consent: Oct. 9, 2009
Vital signs: blood pressure 120/62 mmHg, pulse rate 72, weight 65.7 kg, an Asian patient
CHADS2 score: 3 (aged 75 years or above, past history of cerebral infarction/TIA)
Past history of smoking and alcohol use of 3 units/week
Physical findings: no organ dysfunction
ECG: Clinically significant abnormality (AF)
In-hospital INR: 2.15
◎ Prescription at screening
Warfarin potassium, Ribitol, Symmetrel, Bayaspirin, Selbex, Halfdigoxin-KY, Vasolan, Pursennid, Seltouch, Calblock, Diovan, and Restamin Kowa Ointment
Monitor’s comments
First approver’s comments
Second approver’s comments
First approver’s instructions
Second approver’s instructions
Monitor’s corresponding actions
日本語 から 英語: EFFECT OF LIQUID ADDITIVES AND BEHAVIOR OF ALUMINA POWDER IN ULTRAFINE GRINDING OF ALUMINA General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 1 Introduction
Research has been conducted for a long time in the cement industry on grinding aids that can dramatically improve grindability by adding only in small amounts, and many useful findings 1) have been obtained so far. However, because grinding aids commonly used are the third component, their use in fields other than cement industry is extremely limited due to problems of contamination of the ground products and insufficient systemic understanding of the action mechanism of grinding aids, and we still have to rely on experience when using them 2, 3).
In powder production by the breakdown method, wet grinding is more advantageous for producing small-sized grinding products and, can, in fact, relatively easily produce submicron-sized particles 4). However, if the ground product is to be used in the dry state, it is necessary to dry the ground product after wet grinding and then to crush the coagulated mass, which makes the whole process complicated. On one hand, dry grinding is extremely advantageous in terms of operability and economy, but on the other hand, it is difficult to obtain submicron-sized ground products, and the grinding efficiency is also a problem. Now it has been noted that there are grinding aids that can significantly improve grindability when added in just small amounts. It is believed that they should be used more actively for dry-grinding operations, which are extremely energy inefficient, particularly for ultrafine dry-grinding operations. The biggest problem is the contamination of the ground products by the addition of the grinding aids, but we should be able to substantially overcome this issue by selecting or designing a grinding aid that does not pose any problems to subsequent processes.
日本語 から 英語: ELUCIDATION OF PHYSIOLOGICAL FUNCTIONALITY OF CCL25 IN MILK FOR THE ENHANCEMENT OF GUT IMMUNITY IN NEONATE General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 健康管理
翻訳 - 英語 1. Background at Start of the Research
CCL25 is a chemokine that is known to play a central role in intestinal immunity, particularly in intestinal IgA secretion involved in prevention of bacterial infections in the intestinal tract. The applicant considered CCL25 to be involved in IgA secretion in colostrum and examined CCL25 expression in mammary gland tissues. Despite of CCL25 expression in mammary gland tissues, no results are available to suggest its direct involvement in IgA production in colostrums.
For this sake, mouse colostrum was collected and tested for whether CCL25 was present in milk. The results confirmed for the first time in the world that CCL25 was present in colostrum.
The expression of CCL25 and its receptor CCR9 in the intestinal tract of infants has been reported in pigs (F. Merrens, et al, 2006). So far, no studies have been conducted on the changes in their expression over time in the intestinal tract of infants, changes in CCR9 expression in the intestinal tract caused by CCL25 in milk, and stimulation of lymphocytes or IgA-producing cells, which further promotes IgA secretion and development of small immune organs in intestinal tract.
2. Research Purpose
CCL25 is one of chemokines known that have been found to be involved in homing of lymphocytes and IgA secreting cells to the thymus and small intestine and is believed to be greatly involved in intestinal immunity. Our recent study has revealed that CCL25 is contained mouse milk. However, the physiological role of chemokine CCL25 in milk has not been reported. In the present study (1), the appearance time of IgA-producing cells and the expression time of CCL25 and CCR9 in the intestinal tract of mouse neonates were confirmed. In the study (2), to clarify the role of CCL25 in milk on the development of the intestinal tract in neonates, especially on the development of the intestinal immune function, mouse neonates were fed with a mouse formula to which CCL25 was added to investigate the effect of such formula on the intestinal immunity and development of immune system organs such as spleen and thymus.
3. Research Methods
In the study (1), ddY strain neonatal mice were used and divided into six 6 groups, i.e., postnatal day 0, postnatal day 1, postnatal day 2, postnatal day 5, postnatal day 10 and postnatal day 21 groups. On these days, the intestine was removed from each mouse to analyze the temporal changes in the CCL25 and CCR9 mRNA expression levels in the small and large intestine tissues. Moreover, immunohistochemical staining was used to investigate the presence of CCL25 and IgA-secreting cells in the small intestine tissues over time.
In study (2), ddY strain neonatal mice were breastfed to 2 days of age and were fed with a formula with or without CCL25 from 3 days of age. After the mice were artificially fed for 7 days till 10 days of age, they were dissected to determine the weight of the small intestine and large intestine, spleen and thymus as well as the number and size of Peyer patches in the small intestine. Thereafter, CCL25 and CCR9 gene expression levels were analyzed to investigate the presence of IgA producing cells in small intestine tissues using immunohistochemical staining.
日本語 から 英語: Effect of Adding Glycerol on Gel Electrophoresis for DNA Preparation General field: 医療 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
翻訳 - 英語 Materials and methods
1. Devices and materials
The electrophoresis tank (buffer volume: 1.5 l) having a gel column with an inner diameter of 2 cm (3.14 cm2) adopted Genofit (Geneva, Switzerland) consisting of 2 upper and lower tanks made of acrylic resin. The vertical mini-slab electrophoresis device was manufactured by Hoefer (San Francisco, CA), and the submarine mini-slab gel electrophoresis apparatus was Mupid (Advance, Tokyo). Samples for Sodium dodecyl sulfate-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (SDS-PAGE) was DynaMarker® Protein Multicolor (Code No. 081205) purchased from BioDynamics Laboratory (Tokyo). Acrylamide, bisacrylamide, Molecular Ruler 100 bp: 100-1000 bp (Cat. No. 170-8202), Amplisize: 50-2000 bp (Cat. No. 170-8200), Low Range Ultra Agarose (Cat. No. 161- 3106) were obtained from Bio-Rad (Hercles, CA). The Hind III marker was obtained from Nippon Gene (Toyama). The Visking tube (Cat. No. UCC-150) used as a semipermeable membrane for dialysis was purchased from Sanko Junyaku (Tokyo), and Millipore VS 0.025 m (Cat. No. VSWPO2500) was purchased from Nippon Millipore (Tokyo). The marker dye mixture solution (magenta, bromophenol blue (BPB), light blue) was made by Owl (Woburn, MA).
2. Methods
1) Separation and preparation of pre-stained proteins by SDS-PAGE using
a Visking dialysis membrane as pump
10 ml of the mixture solution of 13% or 10% gels for SDS-PAGE (height 3.0 cm) was poured onto the gel column, and 1 ml of deionized water was poured to cover it and allow it to gelate. 5 hours after the gel preparation, removed the base plate, and placed, in turn, the tulle, the Visking dialysis membrane, and the O-ring, and screwed on the screw cap. The buffer for the gel and electrodes adopted a Laemmli 8) system. Diluted the 10 Tris / Glycine (Bio-Rad, Cat. No. 161-3106) buffer 10 times with Milli-Q water at the time of use, and further used a pump to degas it under a reduced pressure while immersing it in an ultrasonic water bath to prevent bubbles from forming during electrophoresis. Filled the upper and lower electrode tanks with the degassed buffer solution (1.5 l) and removed any air bubbles from the lower surface of the gel by suction with a J-shaped bath tool pipette, and then connected the eluate collection tube to the fraction collector. Covered the gel surface with a layer of 300 l of sample (ProteinMalticolor) and performed electrophoresis with the upper tank as a cathode and the lower tank as an anode.
2) Effect of adding glycerol on agarose gel electrophoresis for analysis
Poured the heated and dissolved 1.8% agarose solutions to which glycerol was not added (0%) or was added to a concentration of 5%, 10% and 15%, respectively, into two sets of glass tubes with an inner diameter of 5 mm, and leaved them at room temperature to gelate. The buffer for the gel and electrodes adopted a Tris / Borate / EDTA (TBE) system. Diluted the 10 TBE (Bio-Rad, Cat. No. 161-0733) buffer 10 times with Milli Q water at the time of use, performed electrophoresis on one set under the same conditions those for the 3-color dye (magenta, BPB, light blue) mixture solution, then removed the gel from the glass tubes, and placed on an image scanner. On the other set, performed electrophoresis in the same way using 5 l of 100-1000 bp marker DNA (Molecular Ruler 100 bp) as the sample, removed the gel, and stained it with ethidium bromide for 20 minutes, then destained for 30 minutes, and then placed on a UV transilluminator to take photographs.
/3
3) Separation and preparation of DNA by agarose gel electrophoresis using
pumps of Millipore VS 0.025 m
To prepare the DNA separation gel, 10 ml (3.0 cm height) of 80°C agarose solution heated and dissolved in 1 TBE was poured onto the gel column, and 1 ml of warm deionized water was poured on top of it. To prepare the gel with glycerol added, replaced glycerol with deionized water. Agarose gel can easily lose water and shrink because it has electroosmotic activity itself, so Millipore VS 0.025 m, which is a membrane allowing a large electroosmotic flow, was used as the membrane pump. The electrode tanks were filled with the degassed 1 TBE buffer solution and 10 g of the DNA sample (Molecular Ruler 100 bp, 200 l) was laid over the gel surface, and then electrophoresis was performed at a constant voltage of 75V with the upper tank as the cathode and the lower bath as the anode. After migration for about 30 minutes at room temperature, the upper and lower buffer AC pumps were started, and migration and fractionation further continued. The collected fractions were analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis on a submarine electrophoresis device Mupid.
4) Preparation of low molecular weight DNA by polyacrylamide gel
electrophoresis
10 ml of 5% acrylamide mixture solution was poured onto the gel column and 1 ml of deionized water was gently poured over the surface. The gel and electrode buffer solutions were gelated with 1 TBE for 5 hours, and then electrophoresis was performed for the marker DMA (Amplisize: 50-2000 bp, 200 l) in the same way as described in 3), and the collected fractions were analyzed by agarose gel electrophoresis on a Mupid device.
Results and Discussion
1) Separation of pre-stained proteins by SDS-PAGE
The SDS-PAGE was performed in a Laemmli 8) buffer solution by using a pre-stained protein size standard as the sample so that sample collection could be made while the behaviors of the bands migrating on the disc gel were observed. It took about 3.5 hours from the start of migration until the BPB was eluted. After completion of the electrophoresis, the eluted fractions of BPB were analyzed with 10 l each as No. 1 by 13% slab SDS-electrophoresis. Since the molecular weights of the marker proteins spanned across a wide range of 6 components from 16.0 kDa to 94.7 kDa, it was difficult to isolate all the components with 1 gel concentration, so purification was performed using 2 types of gels, i.e., 13% and 10% gels. As a result, in the 13% gel, 4 components of low molecular weight proteins were isolated (Fig. 1-A), and in the 10% gel, 3 components of high molecular weight proteins (Fig. 1-B) were isolated, and solutions of enough concentrations could be collected without enhancement of CBB staining, etc. Generally, samples collected by an electrophoresis system have the issue of being diluted and low concentrations, which is a major reason for them not being widely accepted. Therefore, for an ideal electrophoresis for sample preparation, it is important to be able to collect samples of high concentrations without having to remixing the gel separated bands. Visking tubes are inexpensive and large sized tubes like Cat. No. UC 150 are also thick and easy to handle, so they are suitable for use as a membrane pump, and as the amount of eluate is small, so it is possible to minimize the dilution of the collected sample. In this experiment, a gel with a diameter of 2 cm was used and the flow rate for 20 minutes was only 150 l, but the proteins were separated and recovered without remixing. In addition, the flow rate can be easily increased to 270 l for 20 minutes by replacing the Visking dialysis membrane with a cellophane membrane, if necessary 2).
日本語 から 英語: A valve device for a hermetic compressor General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 機械工学
翻訳 - 英語 Prior art
In the prior art, this type of valve device for hermetic compressor has a construction that is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Utility Model Paten Publication No. S49-40807, as shown in Fig. 2.
In the figure, 1 is the cylinder [sic! a correction of source certified by the seal of the agent] main body having a valve seat, 2 is the discharge hole and is drilled in the main body 1. 3 is a discharge valve for closing the valve seat, and 4 is a valve presser. 5 is a bolt, which tightens the stacked-up discharge valve 3 and
/3
valve presser 4 onto the main body 1.
Its operation will be described below.
In the compression stroke of the piston, the gas pressure in the discharge hole 2 which forms a part of the internal space of the cylinder rises, and the discharge valve 3 is pushed up to start the discharge stroke. The discharge valve 3 is displaced along the valve presser 4, but in the first half of the discharge stroke, there is a large pressure difference before and after the discharge valve 3 due to the characteristics of the hermetic compressor, and the discharge valve 3 presses against the valve presser 4. That is, the valve presser 4 prevents the excessive displacement of the discharge valve 3. However, in the second half of the discharge stroke, the pressure difference across the discharge valve 3 decreases due to the characteristics of the hermetic compressor, and the discharge valve 3 moves away from the valve presser 4 by its own force, that is, its own spring force, to close the discharge hole 2.
Problems to be solved by the utility model
However, in the above configuration, the spring force used by the discharge valve to close the discharge hole 2 is weak, and as a result, the discharge valve 3 does not close even after the discharge stroke of the piston is finished and the next stroke is started, and the so-called
/4
delayed closing occurs. Therefore, the backflow of gas into the internal space of the cylinder occurs in the discharge valve 3. This phenomenon is particularly noticeable in high load operations such as high-speed operations of a variable speed hermetic compressor. As a result, problems occur such as lowered refrigeration capacity of the hermetic compressor or inability to achieve sufficient refrigeration capacity even if the rotational speed is increased.
In view of the above-mentioned problem, the present invention provides a valve device for a hermetic compressor that does not have delayed closing of the discharge valve.
Means to solve the problem
In order to solve the above problem, the valve device of the hermetic compressor of the utility model comprises a cylinder [sic! a correction of source certified by the seal of the agent] main body with a valve seat, a reed-like valve body facing the valve seat, and a valve pressing plate with a guide portion that regulates the stroke of the reed-like valve body, wherein a part of the guide portion of the valve pressing plate is made of a bimetal.
Functions
According to the above-mentioned configuration of the utility model, the ambient temperature of the valve pressing plate rises as the rotational
/5
speed of the hermetic compressor increases, and the bimetal effect accompanying the ambient temperature rise causes the guide portion of the valve pressing plate to deform, which in turn changes the support state of the reed-like valve body, thereby increasing the spring constant and the inherent vibration number of the reed-like valve body. As a result, the timing to start closing the reed-like valve body in high speed operations of the hermetic compressor becomes earlier, and its falling speed becomes higher, so the timing to fully close the reed-like valve body is earlier than that in the prior art and the problem of delayed closing of the reed-like valve body can be solved.
Embodiments
Next, the valve device for a hermetic compressor according to an embodiment of the utility model will be described with reference to the drawings.
Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the valve device for a hermetic compressor according to an embodiment of the utility model. In Fig. 1, 6 is the valve seat, 7 is the cylinder [sic! a correction of source certified by the seal of the agent] main body having the valve seat 6, and 8 is the discharge hole drilled in the main body 7. 9 is the discharge valve comprising a reed-like valve body and is disposed opposite to the valve seat 6. 10 is the valve pressing plate, and 11 is the guide part that regulates the stroke of the discharge valve 9. The tip part of the guide portion 11, that is, the part corresponding to the upper part
/6
of the discharge hole 8 is formed by a bimetal 12. The bimetal 12 is set such that it warps toward a direction away from the discharge hole 8 as the ambient temperature of the valve holding plate 10 rises, and the root position A of the bimetal 12 corresponds to the position of a node of the secondary vibration mode of the discharge valve 9. 13 is a tightening bolt, which tightens both the valve pressing plate 10 and the discharge valve 9 onto the main body 7.
The operation will be described below.
In a variable speed hermetic compressor, the discharge temperature rises when the refrigerant circulation amount increases as the rotation speed is increased. Therefore, during high rotational speed operations, the guide portion 11 of the valve pressing plate 10 in the discharge space has a radius of curvature on the tip side smaller than the radius of curvature on the bolt side at the position A due to the effect of the bimetal 12. In such a state, the gas pressure in the discharge hole 8 forming a part of the internal space of the cylinder is increased by the compression action of the piston, and the discharge valve 9 is pushed up to start the discharge stroke.
In the first half of the discharge stroke, there is a large pressure
/7
difference before and after the discharge valve 9 due to the characteristics of the hermetic compressor, and the discharge valve 9 is displaced along the guide portion 11 of the valve pressing plate 10. When the displacement of the discharge valve 9 reaches or exceeds a predetermined value, the discharge valve 9 shifts to a state of being supported by the valve pressing plate 10 at the position A. That is, since the radius of curvature of the bimetal part is small at the position A, the discharge valve 9 at the bolt 13 side which has been in close contact with the bimetal part at the position A departs, the support of the discharge valve 9 is in the second vibration mode, and the spring constant and the inherent vibration number of the valve 9 are greatly increased. As a result, in the second half of the discharge stroke, when the pressure difference across the discharge valve 9 decreases due to the characteristics of the hermetic compressor, the discharge valve 9 attempts at closing the valve seat 6 by itself, but the timing of the start of the closing becomes earlier due to the increased spring constant, and the falling speed is higher, so the timing of fully closing the discharge valve 9 is satisfactorily earlier than that in the prior art. Therefore, the delayed closing does not occur.
As described above, according to this embodiment, a part of the guide portion 11 of the valve pressing plate 10 is made of the bimetal 12, and the root of the bimetal 12 is the position of a node of the secondary
/8
vibration mode of the discharge valve 9 which is the reed-like valve body so that it is possible to increase the refrigeration capacity at the time of high-speed operation of the variable speed hermetic compressor. In addition, since there is no delay in closing, the discharge valve 9 does not accelerate due to the pressure difference before and after the valve, and since it is fully closed by itself, its velocity of colliding onto the valve seat can be greatly reduced, which not only improves the reliability of the hermetic compressor but also makes it possible to improve noise characteristics. In addition, during start-up or low-speed operations, the ambient temperature of the valve pressing plate 10 is low, and the bimetal 12 deforms toward the direction of the discharge hole 8, thereby reducing the stroke of the discharge valve 9. That is, the passage resistance of the discharge valve 9 is increased and the input is increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the start-up characteristics of the heating operation of the air conditioning apparatus using the hermetic compressor.
On the other hand, when the compressor is in high-load operations at a certain speed, that is, even in situations where the compression ratio is large, and the impact of a closing delay is large, the same function and effect as described in the above can also be obtained because the ambient temperature is high.
Almost the same function and effect as described in the above can be obtained even if the bimetal is provided at the root or in the central area of the guide portion of the valve pressing plate.
/9
Effects of the utility model
As described above, the utility model comprises a cylinder [sic! a correction of source certified by the seal of the agent] main body with a valve seat, a reed-like valve body disposed opposite to the valve seat, and a valve pressing plate with a guide portion that regulates the stroke of the reed-like valve body, wherein a part of the guide portion of the valve pressing plate is made of a bimetal, such that it is possible to increase the refrigeration capacity of a variable speed hermetic compressor and to improve the noise characteristics and the reliability of the compressor. Further, the start-up performance in the heating operation of the air conditioner can also be improved.
4. Brief description of the drawings
Fig. 1 is a cross-sectional view of a valve device for a hermetic compressor according to an embodiment of the utility model, and Fig. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a conventional valve device for a hermetic compressor.
6 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Valve seat, 7 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Cylinder body, 9 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Discharge valve (lead valve body), 10 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Valve retainer plate, 11 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Guide part, 12 ∙∙∙∙∙∙ Bimetal.
日本語 から 英語: SEMICARBAZIDE CURING AGENT AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING THEREOF General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 Background Art
[0002]
In recent years, aqueous emulsions have attracted attention as raw materials for converting from an organic solvent system to an aqueous system in the coating field. However, aqueous emulsions still have not exhibited adequate physical properties such as water resistance, stain resistance, and hardness, in comparison with organic solvent-based paints.
[0003]
In order to improve the physical properties, a functional group is generally introduced into the aqueous emulsion, so that a coating film composed of a crosslinked polymer (hereinafter referred to as "crosslinked coating film”) can be formed. As an aqueous emulsion used to form a crosslinked coating film, a cold-curing, one-pack type which is a mixture of a curing agent and a polymer, capable of forming a solidified film with the evaporation of an aqueous medium even without heating when applied, is highly demanded in consideration of its workability and processability. In response to the demand, a hydrazone crosslinked aqueous emulsion obtained through a dehydration condensation reaction between a carbonyl group and an acylhydrazine group has attracted attention in recent years.
[0004]
For example, Patent Literature 1 (Japanese Patent Publication No. S46-20053), Patent Literature 2 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S57-3850), Patent Literature 3 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S57-3857), Patent Literature 4 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S58-96643), and Patent Literature 5 (Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. H4-249587) disclose the following: a method for providing a coating composition having both of the cold-curing ability and the storage stability, excellent hardness and stain resistance, etc., by adding dicarboxylic acid dihydrazide as a curing agent into a carbonyl group-containing aqueous polymer dispersion. In this method, however, the dicarboxylic acid dihydrazide for use as a curing agent is hydrolyzed during the storage of the coating composition, resulting in lowered
/3
cross-linking ability (curing properties). In other words, the ability to form a cross-linked coating film having excellent hardness, stain resistance, and solvent resistance is lowered over time. Furthermore, in the above patent literature, a compound having low compatibility with a carbonyl group-containing copolymer and high hydrophilic properties such as adipic acid dihydrazide is used as the dicarboxylic acid dihydrazide, so it has a disadvantage, which is that the obtained cross-linked coating film has remarkably low water resistance.
[0005]
Since the curing properties of a conventional aqueous resin composition containing a conventional curing agent and a polycarbonyl compound deteriorate over time, the composition cannot exhibit adequate curing performance when coated onto a substrate surface. Furthermore, use of a dicarboxylic acid dihydrazide having low compatibility with a polycarbonyl compound as the curing agent causes a problem, which is that the coating film obtained by coating has remarkably low water resistance. Further, in Patent Literature 6 (PCT 96/01252), a semicarbazide composition comprising at least one member selected from the group consisting of a semicarbazide derivative and a terminal-blocked product thereof obtained by the reaction between a polyisocyanate having 3~20 isocyanate groups (hereinafter referred to as “NCO group”) and hydrazine or a derivative thereof, or a mixture of a non-terminal-blocked product and a terminal-blocked product thereof; at least one member selected from the group consisting of the semicarbazide derivative and a terminal-blocked product thereof, and at least one material selected from a hydrophilic group-containing compound and a terminal-blocked product thereof is proposed as a curing agent. However, the coating film obtained by coating an aqueous resin composition containing this curing agent onto a substrate surface and then curing has the disadvantage of easy yellowing caused by an alkaline solution.
[0006]
Patent Literature 1: Japanese Patent Publication No. S46-20053
Patent Literature 2: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S57-3850
Patent Literature 3: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S57-3857
Patent Literature 4: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. S58-96643
Patent Literature 5: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. H4-249587
Patent Literature 5: PCT/96/01252
[Disclosure of the Invention]
[Problem to be Solved by the Invention]
[0007]
The objective of the present invention is to provide an aqueous resin composition containing a semicarbazide curing agent used to obtain a coating film with excellent alkali yellowing resistance.
[Solution for the Problem]
[0008]
In order to achieve the aforesaid objective, the inventors of the present invention have conducted extensive researches and found that a coating film with excellent alkali yellowing resistance can be obtained by using a semicarbazide curing agent, which is characterized in that 1.0 g of an aqueous semicarbazide curing agent solution with the semicarbazide group adjusted to 0.1 mmol/g, 5.0 g of ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, and 1.0 g of 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution are mixed, and after being placed at 20°C for 24 hours, the mixture has an absorbance of less than 1.0 abs. at 425 nm when measured in a 1 cm square quartz cell.
[0009]
The present invention includes the following claims (1) to (7).
(1) a semicarbazide curing agent, characterized in that a mixture solution containing 1.0 g of 0.1 mmol/g aqueous semicarbazide curing agent solution, 5.0 g of ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, and 1.0 g of 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution has an absorbance of less than 1.0 abs. when measured in a 1 cm square quartz cell at 425 nm after storage for 24 hours at 20°C.
(2) A method for producing the semicarbazide curing agent according to claim 1, characterized in that the whole production process for the semicarbazide curing agent is conducted at a temperature lower than 50°C.
(3) The method for producing the semicarbazide curing agent according to claim 2, characterized in that in the production process for the semicarbazide curing agent, solvent removal is achieved by crystallization.
/4
(4) The method for producing the semicarbazide curing agent according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the semicarbazide curing agent is synthesized by reacting isophorone diisocyanate with a hydrazine derivative.
(5) A semicarbazide curing agent, characterized in that the production method thereof is the method according to any one of claims 2 to 4.
(6) An aqueous resin composition comprising the semicarbazide curing agent according to claim 1 or 5, and an aqueous resin.
(7) A composite, wherein the aqueous resin composition according to claim 6 is coated onto a substrate.
[Effects of the Invention]
[0010]
The present invention provides an aqueous resin composition containing a semicarbazide curing agent with excellent alkali yellowing resistance.
[Particular Embodiments]
[0011]
The present invention is described in detail below.
[0012]
Whether the semicarbazide curing agent is able to form a coating film having excellent alkali yellowing resistance can be verified in the following manner: 1.0 g of an aqueous semicarbazide curing agent solution with the semicarbazide group adjusted to 0.1 mmol/g is mixed with 5.0 g of ethylene glycol monobutyl ether and 1.0 g of 1 N aqueous sodium hydroxide solution; after being placed at 20°C for 24 hours, the mixture solution is determined to have an absorbance of less than 1.0 abs. at 425 nm when measured in a 1 cm square quartz cell. The semicarbazide group of the semicarbazide curing agent obtained can be determined by, for example, redox titration by using potassium iodate.
[0013]
Further, this semicarbazide curing agent can be synthesized by reacting, for example, the organic compound (A) having 2 or more NCO groups with hydrazine or a hydrazine derivative (B). The whole process in this synthesis method refers to the process in which the compound (A) reacts with the compound (B), the semicarbazide curing agent is extracted and the solvent is removed from the reaction solution, the extracted semicarbazide curing agent is dried and diluted to a predetermined concentration with a suitable solvent.
[0014]
Examples of the organic compound (A) having 2 or more NCO groups include a diisocyanate compound having 2 NCO groups, and a polyisocyanate compound having 3 or more NCO groups. Examples of the diisocyanate compound include an alkylene diisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate; a cycloalkylene diisocyanate such as 4,4’-methylene-bis(cyclohexyl isocyanate) (hydrogenated MDI), isophorone diisocyanate (IPDI), dimethyl cyclohexane diisocyanate (hydrogenated XDI); an arylene diisocyanate such as 2,4-tolylene diisocyanate, 2,6-tolylene diisocyanate and a mixture thereof (TDIs), diphenylmethane-4,4'-diisocyanate (MDI), naphthalene-1,5-diisocyanate (NDI), 3,3-dimethyl-4,4-biphenylene diisocyanate(TODI), crude TDIs, polymethylene polyphenyl polyisocyanate, crude MDI, and phenyl diisocyanate; and an aralkylene diisocyanate such as xylene diisocyanate (XDI); and a combination thereof. Examples of the polyisocyanate having 3 of more NCO groups include 3-mers to 20-mers oligomerized from a diisocyanate compound by forming a biuret bond, a urea bond, an isocyanurate bond, a urethane bond, an allophanate bond, or a urethdione bond.
[0015]
For further information on the method for producing these polyisocyanate compounds or the bonds in polyisocyanate compounds, refer to, for example, “Polyurethane Handbook” edited by G. Oertel (Hanser Publishers, Germany, 1985). Of them, isophorone diisocyanate is preferred, because the semicarbazide curing agent obtained from isophorone diisocyanate has high water solubility.
/5
[0016]
Examples of the hydrazine or the hydrazine derivative (B) include a hydrazine and a hydrate thereof; a monoalkyl-substituted hydrazine compound such as monomethyl hydrazine, monoethyl hydrazine, monobuthyl hydrazine; a dihydrazide compound such as ethylene-1,2-dihydrazide, propylene-1,3-dihydrazide, butylene-1,4-dihydrazide; a dicarboxylic acid dihydrazide such as oxalic acid dihydrazide, malonic acid dihydrazide, succinic acid dihydrazide, glutaric acid dihydrazide, adipic acid dihydrazide, sebacic acid dihydrazide, maleic acid dihydrazide, fumaric acid dihydrazide, itaconic acid dihydrazide, isophthalic acid dihydrazide, and phthalic acid dihydrazide; a tricarboxylic acid trihydrazide such as trimellitic acid trihydrazide, and a mixture thereof.
[0017]
Furthermore, as to the functional group ratio between the compounds (A) and (B), the ratio of {NCO group in the compound (A)}/the compound (B) is preferably 1 or more. For the purpose of inhibiting side reactions, the ratio is more preferably greater than 1, further preferably between 1.5 and 5.0. A ratio below 5.0 is preferred, because the semicarbazide curing agent can be easily extracted from the solution after termination of the reaction. A suitable solvent may be used for their synthesis reaction on an as-needed basis.
[0018]
Examples of the solvent for use include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, butyl cellosolve, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether; esters such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate and butyl acetate; ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether; ketones such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone; and amides such as dimethylformamide and dimethylacetamide. Among them, ketones cause dehydration condensation with a semicarbazide compound, so that hydrolysis with water is required after reaction.
[0019]
Furthermore, since both the compound (A) and the compound (B) need to be dissolved, the solvent is preferably alcohols, more preferably methanol, ethanol, butyl cellosolve and propylene glycol monopropyl ether. These solvents may be used alone or in the form of a mixture of 2 or more solvents. Although these reactions may be performed at any temperature, the temperature is preferably from 10 to 100°C, more preferably from 10 to 50°C, because a high temperature causes yellowing of the curing agent synthesized in the presence of an alkali.
[0020]
Although mixing of the compound (A) with the compound (B) may be achieved by any method, a method of slowly adding the compound (A) into the compound (B) to effect synthesis, a method of simultaneously adding the compound (A) and the compound (B) into a solvent, or a reaction method of simultaneously adding the compound (A) and the compound (B) are preferred from the viewpoint of suppressing side reactions. It should be noted that these compound (A) and (B) may be added as is or in the form of solution.
[0021]
Examples of the extraction method include distillation, crystallization, and column chromatography. However, an extraction operation requiring no heating, e.g., crystallization, column chromatography, is preferred, because extraction by heating causes yellowing of the semicarbazide curing agent in the presence of alkali, and furthermore, crystallization is more preferred, because a large amount can be handled at one time.
[0022]
The solvent for use in crystallization is not particularly limited as long as the solvent does not react with the semicarbazide curing agent, and examples thereof include alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, 1-butanol, 2-butanol, butyl cellosolve, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether, esters such as methyl acetate, ethyl acetate and butyl acetate, ethers such as diethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, dimethoxyethane, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, and amides such as dimethylformamide and dimethylacetamide. Of them, ethers with a
/6
solubility of the semicarbazide curing agent being greatly different depending on temperature are preferred, and further, dioxane, tetrahydrofuran, and dimethoxyethane are more preferred.
[0023]
The semicarbazide curing agent of the present invention may be directly used after extraction or may be diluted with a solvent for use. Though examples of the appropriate diluting solvent include water, alcohols such as methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, and butanol, and coalescing agent such as butyl cellosolve, Texanol, and butyl carbitol, water is preferred as it reduces the volatile organic solvent. Moreover, various additives may be added during dilution to improve stability or prevent yellowing of the semicarbazide curing agent in the presence of an alkali, although the anti-yellowing mechanism is still unknown.
[0024]
Examples of additives for use include coalescing agent, surfactant, and antioxidant, and examples of the coalescing agent include butyl cellosolve, Texanol, butyl carbitol, butyl carbitol acetate, diethylene glycol diacetate, ethylene glycol-mono-2-ethylhexyl ether, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, propylene glycol n-butyl ether, dipropylene glycol n-butyl ether, tripropylene glycol n-butyl ether, dipropylene glycol methyl ether, tripropylene glycol methyl ether.
[0025]
Examples of such a surfactant include an anion-type surfactant such as fatty acid soap, alkyl sulfonate, alkyl sulfosuccinate, alkyl succinate, polyoxyethylene alkyl sulfate, and polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl sulfate or a non-reactive nonionic surfactant such as polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ether, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester, an oxyethylene oxypropylene block copolymer, and a reactive nonionic surfactant such as α-[1-[(allyloxy))methyl]-2-(nonylphenoxy)ethyl]-ω-hydroxypolyoxyethylene (such as Adekalia Soap NE-20, NE-30, NE-40).
[0026]
Examples of such an antioxidant include ascorbic acid, dialkyl dithiocarbamate, and a compound having a dialkyl semicarbazide group such as HN-130, HN-200, HN-300F and HN-300P (manufactured by Japan Finechem Co., Inc.), ADK STAB PEP-4C, ADK ADK STAB PEP-4C, ADK STAB PEP-8, ADK STAB 11C, ADK STAB PEP-36, ADK STAB HP-11, ADK STAB 260, ADK STAB 522A, ADK STAB 329K, ADK STAB 1500, ADK STAB C, ADK STAB 135A, ADK STAB 3010, ADK STAB AO-23, ADK STAB AO-30 (all made by Asahi Denka Co. Ltd.), and
[0027]
Irganox PS800FL, Irganox PS802FL, Irganox 245, Irganox 259, Irganox 565, Irganox 1010, Irganox 1035, Irganox 1076, Irganox 1098, Irganox 1222, Irganox 1330, Irganox 1425, Irganox 3114, Irganox 1520, Irganox 1135, Irganox 1141, Irgafos 38, Irgafos P-EPQ, Irgafos 126 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals Inc.), Sumilizer TPM, Sumilizer TP-D, Sumilizer TL, Sumilizer MB, Sumilizer BHT, Sumilizer MDP-S, Sumilizer GA-80, Sumilizer BBM-S, Sumilizer WX-R, Sumilizer GM, Sumilizer GS, Sumilizer TNP, Sumilizer TPP-P, Sumilizer P-16 (made by Sumitomo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and
[0028]
/7
2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol, 2-tert-butyl-4,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-butylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-isobutylphenol, 2,6-dicyclopentyl-4-methylphenol, 2-(α-methylcyclohexyl)-4,6-dimethylphenol, 2,6-bis(octodecyl)-4-methylphenol, 2,4,6-tricyclohexylphenol, 2,6-dinonyl-4-methylphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxymethylphenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-(1’-methyl-undecyl-1’-yl)-phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-(1’-methyl-heptadecyl-1’-yl)-phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-6-(1’-methyl-tridecyl-1’-yl)-methyl and mixtures thereof, and
[0029]
2,4-bis(octylthiomethyl)-6-tert-butylphenol, 2,4-bis(octylthiomethyl)-6-methylphenol, 2,4-bis(octylthiomethyl)-6-ethylphenol, 2,6-bis(dodecylthiomethyl)-4-nonylphenol and mixtures thereof; 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methoxyphenol, 2,5-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, 2,5-di-tert-pentylhydroquinone, 2,6-diphenyl-4-octodecyloxphenol, 2,6-di-tert-butylhydroquinone, 2,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanisole, 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanisole, 3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl stearate, bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)adipate and mixtures thereof, and
[0030]
2,4-bis(octylthio)-6-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanilino)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-octyltio-4,6-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanilino)-1,3,5-triazine, 2-octyltio-4,6-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyanilino)-1,2,3-triazine, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-isocyanurate, 1,3,5-tris(4-tert-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl)-isocyanurate, 2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenylethyl)-1,3,5-triazine, 5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenylpropionyl)-hexhydro-1,3,5-triazine, 1,3,5-tris(3,5-dicyclohexyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-isocyanurate, 2,2’-methylene-bis(6-tert-butyl-4-methylphenol), 2,2’-methylene-bis(6-tert-butyl-4-ethylphenol), 2,2’-methylene-bis(4,6-di-tert-butylphenol), 2,2’-ethylene-bis(6-tert-butyl-4-isobutylphenol), 4,4’-methylene-bis(2,6-di-tert-butylphenol), and
[0031]
4,4’-methylene-bis(6-tert-butyl-2-methylphenol), 1,1-bis(5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-2-methylphenyl)butane, ethylene glycol bis[3,3’-bis(3’-tert-butyl-4’-hydroxyphenyl)butyrate], 1,3,5-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxylbenzyl-)2,4,6-trimethylbenzene, 1,4-bis(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-2,3,5,6-tetramethylbenzene, 2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tet-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)phenol.
[0032]
The amount of the additives added is not limited, but is preferably less than 1/10, more preferably less than 1/20, relative to the weight of the semicarbazide curing agent from the viewpoint of improving the mixing properties of the aqueous resin for use as paint.
[0033]
The aqueous resin composition of the present invention comprises a semicarbazide curing agent and an aqueous resin. Preferably, the aqueous resin composition further comprises a polycarbonyl compound and/or a polyepoxy compound as the aqueous resin. In the aqueous resin composition,
/8
a polycarbonyl compound is particularly preferred, because when it is combined with a semicarbazide composition, excellent storage stability can be achieved and a coating film with excellent weather resistance, water resistance, stain resistance, hardness, etc., can be produced at a relatively low temperature.
[0034]
Examples of the polycarbonyl compound include a carbonyl group-containing copolymer, carbonyl group-containing polyurethanes made from raw material mono- or poly-alcohol having a carbonyl group such as hydroxyacetone described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. H2-238015, acetoacetylated polyvinyl alcohol, a polyvinyl alcohol resin having a diacetone group in a side chain described in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. H9-324095, acetoacetylated hydroxyalkyl cellulose, and a combination thereof.
[0035]
Of these polycarbonyl compounds, a carbonyl group-containing copolymer produced by copolymerization of a carbonyl group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer (α) and an ethylenically unsaturated monomer (β) co-polymerizable with the carbonyl group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer (α) is preferred, and a carbonyl group-containing copolymer produced by copolymerization of 0.1~30 mass% of a carbonyl group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer (α) and 70~99.9 mass% of an ethylenically unsaturated monomer (β) copolymerizable with the monomer (α) is more preferred.
[0036]
Examples of the carbonyl group-containing ethylenically unsaturated monomer (α) include diacetone acrylamide, diacetone methacrylamide, acrolein, vinyl methyl ketone, acetoacetoxyethyl methacrylate, acetoacetoxyethyl acrylate, and formylstyrol, or a combination thereof.
[0037]
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer (β) copolymerizable with the monomer (α) include acrylic acid ester, methacrylic acid ester, ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a carboxyl group, ethylenically unsaturated monomers having an epoxy group, acrylamide monomer, methacrylamide monomer, and vinyl cyanides; and examples of the methacrylic acid ester include methacrylic acid alkyl ester with an alkyl portion having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, methacrylic acid hydroxyalkyl ester with an alkyl portion having 1 to 18 carbon atoms, poly(oxyethylene methacrylate) having 1~100 ethylene oxide groups, poly(oxypropylene methacrylate) having 1~100 propylene oxide groups, and poly(oxyethylene dimethylacrylate) having 1~100 ethylene oxide groups.
[0038]
Specific examples of the (meth)acrylic acid ester include methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, methylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, dodecyl (meth)acrylate, and adamantly (meth)acrylate. Specific examples of the (meth)acrylic acid hydroxyalkyl ester include 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxycyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and dodecyl (meth)acrylate.
[0039]
Specific examples of the (poly)oxyethylene (meth)acrylate include ethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, ethylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate, tetraethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, and tetraethylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate.
[0040]
/9
Specific examples of the (poly)oxypropylene (meth)acrylate include propylene glycol (meth)acrylate, propylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate, dipropylene glycol (meth)acrylate, dipropylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate, tetrapropylene glycol (meth)acrylate, and tetrapropylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate. Specific examples of the (poly)oxyethylene di(meth)acrylate include ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, diethylene glycol methoxy (meth)acrylate, and tetraethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate.
[0041]
Specific examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomers having a carboxyl group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, a half ester of maleic acid, and crotonic acid, examples of the (meth)acrylamide monomers include (meth)acrylamide, N-methylol (meth)acrylamide, N-butoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, and examples of the vinyl cyanide include (meth)acrylonitrile.
[0042]
Specific examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomers having an epoxy group include glycidyl (meth)acrylate, (2,3-epoxycyclohexenyl) (meth)acrylate, allyl glycidyl ether.
[0043]
Specific examples of the ethylenically unsaturated monomer (β) copolymerizable with the monomer (α) other than the above include olefins such as ethylene, propylene, and isobutylene, dienes such as butadiene; halo-olefins such as vinyl chloride and vinylidene chloride, carboxylic acid vinyl esters such as vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, vinyl n-butyrate, vinyl benzoate, p-tert-butyl vinyl benzoate, vinyl pivalate, vinyl 2-ethyl hexanoate, vinyl versatate, and vinyl laurate, carboxylic acid isopropenyl esters such as isopropenyl acetate and isopropenyl propionate, and vinyl ethers such as ethyl vinyl ether, isobutyl vinyl ether and cyclohexyl vinyl ether, and
[0044]
aromatic vinyl compounds such as styrene and vinyl toluene, allyl esters such as allyl acetate and allyl benzoate, allyl ethers such as allyl ethyl ether and allyl phenyl ether, γ-(meth)acryloxy propyltrimethoxysilane, 4-(meth)acryloyloxy-2,2,2,2-tetramethylpiperidine, 4-(meth)acryloyloxy-1,2,2,2,2-pentamethylpiperidine, perfluoromethyl (meth)acrylate, perfluoropropyl (meth)acrylate, perfluoropropylomethyl (meth)acrylate, vinylpyrrolidone, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, and allyl (meth)acrylate, and a combination thereof.
[0045]
The polycarbonyl compound of the present invention is preferably obtained by suspension polymerization, emulsion polymerization, or solution polymerization, and more preferably obtained from a carbonyl group-containing waterborne dispersion (emulsion) by emulsion polymerization, because the aqueous resin composition obtained does not contain a large amount of organic solvents.
[0046]
Further, a carbonyl group-containing acrylic copolymer dispersion obtained using acrylic monomers is preferred, because the aqueous resin composition obtained exhibits excellent properties for use as paint. The polycarbonyl compound is preferably obtained as an emersion by copolymerization in the present of an anion-type ethylenically unsaturated monomer (γ) selected from the group consisting of an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a sulfonic acid group or a sulfonate group, an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a sulfonic acid ester group, and a mixture thereof, because the coating film obtained by applying the aqueous resin composition exhibits excellent water resistance.
[0047]
To obtain a coating film with improved water resistance, the ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a sulfonic acid group or a
/10
sulfonate group is a compound having radically polymerizable double bonds and a sulfonic acid group or a sulfonate group, preferably a compound having groups partially substituted with the group of ammonium salt, sodium salt or potassium salt of a sulfonic acid group. Further, a compound having a substituent group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1~20 carbon atoms, an alkyl ether group having 2~4 carbon atoms, a polyalkyl ether group having 2~4 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or 10 carbon atoms, and a succinic acid group is more preferred. Moreover, a vinyl sulfonate compound having a vinyl group to which the group of ammonium salt, sodium salt, or potassium salt of a sulfonic acid group is bonded is also preferred.
[0048]
The ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a sulfonic acid ester group is a compound having radically polymerizable double bonds and a sulfonic acid ester group. A compound having groups partially substituted with the group of ammonium salt, sodium salt or potassium salt of a sulfonic acid ester group partially is preferred, and a compound having a substituent group selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group having 1~20 carbon atoms, an alkyl ether group having 2~4 carbon atoms, a polyalkyl ether group having 2~4 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 or 10 carbon atoms is more preferred.
[0049]
Specific examples of the compound having a succinic acid group partially substituted with the group of ammonium salt, sodium salt and potassium salt of a sulfonic acid group include allyl sulfosuccinate, such as the compounds represented by formulas (1), (2), (3), and (4).
中国語 から 英語: RESEARCH PROGRESS OF NANOSILVER COATED FABRICS General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 1.3 In Situ Synthesis Method
In situ synthesis of nanosilver coated fabric is to coat a silver precursor on a fabric and reduce silver ions in situ to obtain a nanosilver fabric. Zhi Song Lu et al. [11] exposed a silk fabric that had been immersed in silver nitrate and sodium bicarbonate to ultraviolet irradiation to reduce the silver ions into elementary substance silver. The nanosilver silk fabric exhibited excellent antibacterial activity and improved thermal degradation performance. The γ-ray reduction method for preparing nanosilver coated fabrics is a process in which water molecules in a silver nitrate solution are decomposed into free radicals, electrons, hydrogen peroxide and hydrogen under γ-ray irradiation, and electrons and free radicals reduce the silver ions on the fabric surface into elementary substance silver. Truong Thi Hanh et al. [15] prepared a nanosilver cotton fabric by reducing a silver nitrate solution and depositing silver onto a cotton fabric with γ-ray using chitosan as a stabilizer. The nanosilver particles with a diameter of 12 nm were able to resist 40 washes and were non-toxic to skin.
1.4 Reduction Method with Reducing Agent
Bing Tang et al. [16, 17] prepared nanosilver particles of a triangle shape, a circular disc shape and a rod shape using sodium borohydride as the reducing agent and polyvinylpyrrolidone as the stabilizer and dyed wool fabrics to obtain nanosilver wool fabrics of different colors and excellent antibacterial effects. Guangyu Zhang et al. [18, 19] obtained a nanosilver silk fabric having excellent antibacterial activity and washing resistance by mixing and reacting silver nitrate with a polyamine compound at room temperature, immersing the silk fabric in a mixture solution, and finally performing steam fixation. Majid Montazer et al. [20] prepared a nanosilver coated fabric by ultrasonically mixing and dispersing a silver nitrate solution and a sodium hydroxide solution to form small silver oxide particles, adding ammonia to form a silver ammonia solution, immersing a polyamide fabric in the silver ammonia solution, and subjecting the fabric to a high-temperature treatment. With a particle size ranging from 20 to 150 nm, the nanosilver particles exhibited great size stability, antibacterial activity and washing resistance. S. X. Jiang et al. [21] obtained a nanosilver silk fabric having antistatic property, UV blocking effect, water repelling and antibacterial effects by immersing the fabric in a silver ammonia solution and adding a reducing sugar (glucose) under heating to deposit nanosilver particles on the fabric through silver mirror reaction. Mohammad R. Nateghi et al. [22, 23] prepared a nanosilver cotton fabric using the immersion-drying method by immersing the cotton fabric in a mixture solution containing silver nitrate and ethylene glycol with ethylene glycol as the reducing agent. The nanosilver cotton fabric had a surface resistance of 27.4 Ω/sq only and displayed remarkable antibacterial activity, UV blocking effect and water repellent capability. Ronghui Guo et al. [24, 25] used the microwave-assisted technology to deposit nanosilver on a silane modified cotton fabric under microwave heating with trisodium citrate as the reducing agent and silver nitrate as the precursor. The nanosilver cotton fabric obtained has excellent UV blocking effect and water repellent capability. S. Ravindra et al. [26-28] prepared a nanosilver coated cotton fabric having excellent antibacterial effect by reducing a silver nitrate solution at room temperature using extracts from the leaves of Indian banyan and eucalypt as the reducing agent.
1.5 Supercritical Carbon Dioxide Method
The supercritical carbon dioxide method for preparing nanosilver coating fabrics is a process in which supercritical carbon dioxide is used as a solvent to dissolve a silver precursor, the metal is deposited on the fabric surface under reducing hydrogen atmosphere, and the supercritical carbon dioxide swells the fabric, allowing more nanosilver ions to enter the gaps between fibers. The sample and the silver precursor are added into a reaction vessel equipped with a heating device, carbon dioxide is introduced through a carbon dioxide pump to reach the supercritical state at a desired pressure, and then hydrogen is pumped into the reaction vessel through another pump to reduce the silver precursor for preparing a nanosilver coated fabric. Shaun D. Gittard et al. [26-28] obtained a nanosilver coated cotton fabric with excellent antibacterial effect by dissolving a silver precursor in supercritical carbon dioxide, reducing the silver precursor with hydrogen gas to obtain nanosilver particles, and depositing the nanosilver particles on the surface of the cotton fabric through rapid release of pressure.
2 Pretreatment Methods
There is no chemical bond between nanosilver and fibers, so
/3
researchers have used the methods of pretreating fabrics with a crosslinking agent, etching the surface of the fibers to increase the surface roughness, introducing functional groups into the plasma, and introducing active free radicals through vacuum-UV mediated deposition, thereby successfully increasing the bonding force between nanosilver and fabrics.
2.1 Vacuum-UV Mediated Deposition
The vacuum-UV mediated deposition method was used by T. Yuranova et al. [30] to pretreat a fabric under vacuum and UV irradiation using a 185 nm low-pressure mercury lamp, wherein active groups such as atomic oxygen and gaseous oxygen free radicals were introduced onto the surface of the polyester/polyamide composite fabric to give the surface functionalities, and silver nitrate was reduced by a chemical reducing agent onto the functionized fabric. Results show that the vacuum-UV mediated deposition method improved the bonding strength between the nanosilver particles and the fabric and that a nanosilver coated fabric having antibacterial effect and nanosilver particles with a diameter of up to 5 nm could be obtained.
2.2 Laser Etching
Laser itching is a method of etching the surface of a fabric by using high-energy carbon dioxide laser beams to roughen the fabric surface to increase the area of contact and adsorption between nanosilver particles and the fabric, leading to improved bonding strength between them. Shirin Nourbakhsh et al. [31] etched the surface of a cotton fabric by using carbon dioxide laser to increase the surface roughness of the fiber and further introduced functional groups such as hydroxyl group and detected the presence of the hydroxyl group with methylene blue. The surface of the untreated cotton fabric was smooth, whereas there were deep grooves on the surface of the laser-treated cotton fabric. A nanosilver cotton fabric was obtained at room temperature by coating the laser-pretreated cotton fabric with a nanosilver solution, and the fabric was determined to have an antibacterial rate of 98.3% after 5 washes, whereas the nanosilver coated fabric without the laser pretreatment exhibited an antibacterial rate of only 23.3%, which means that the etching pretreatment gave an excellent antibacterial effect to the nanosilver coated fabric.
2.3 Plasma Treatment
Plasma pretreatment introduces active groups and free radicals into the fabric surface, oxidatively cleaves the chemical bonds of the fabric and forms free radicals which are reactable with plasma to form hydroxyl, carbonyl and carboxyl groups, these polar groups form hydrogen bonds, van der Waals forces or dipole-dipole interactions between the fabric surface and the coating layer to increase the adsorption between the coating layer and the substrate of the fabric. In addition, plasma also etches the surface of the fabric substrate to increase its surface roughness, and as shown in Fig. 1, the surface roughness of the fabric increases as the power of the plasma increases, leading to improved bonding strength between the metal coating and the fabric surface and increased bonding force between the coating and the fabric substrate. S. X. Jiang et al. [32, 33] performed a pretreatment for a silk fabric with radio-frequency oxygen plasma and argon plasma and found that the amount of nanosilver deposited was significantly increased and the nanosilver silk fabric prepared exhibited excellent antibacterial activity and UV blocking effect.
翻訳 - 英語 [Effect of the utility model]
As described above, since the microphone holding device of the present utility model comprises an elastic protection component covering at least the outer circumference of the microphone, and a holding component which has one end fixed to the shaft component and winds a plurality of times around the outer circumference of the elastic protection component to elastically clamps it, it is possible not only to elastically holds the microphone and to absorb the mechanical vibration from the mounting component and but also to protect against impact directly applied to the microphone. Furthermore, since the microphone is covered with the elastic protection component and is held by a flexible holding component, even if the outer diameter of the microphone is somewhat different, this difference can be absorbed by the elasticity of the holding component, so it is possible to hold various kinds of microphones.
4. Brief description of the drawings
/12
Fig. 1 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of the microphone holding device according to the present utility model, Fig. 2 is a partially cutaway sideview showing the microphone and its elastic protecting component, Fig. 3 is a graph comparing the microphone holding device shown in Fig. 1 with a conventional microphone holding device in terms of the frequency characteristic of the mechanical vibration, and Fig. 4 is a perspective view which shows an example of a conventional microphone holding device.
In the drawings, 1 is the drum, 2 is the head, 3 is the shell, 11 is the clamping component, 12 is the vibration absorbing component, 13 is the shaft component, 14 is the holding component, 15 is the screw, 16 is the microphone, 17 is the elastic protection component, 18 is the opening, 19 is the groove, 20 is the sound collecting portion, 21 is the body portion, and 22 is the ring portion.
[Sic! The last two lines of text on this page is information about the applicant and agent]
日本語 から 英語: LAMINATE FOR LASER MARKING General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 [Detailed description of the invention]
[Technical field]
[0001]
The present invention relates to a laminate for laser marking, which makes marking with the intended words, figures, codes, etc., on an ink film layer formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin through laser irradiation.
[Background technology]
[0002]
The PL Act (Product Liability Act) has been enforced, and packaging, labels, etc. require various printings. In addition, from the viewpoint of security or traceability, the importance of display by printing, patterns, etc., is increasing.
The display relates to a wide variety of products such as medicines, electronic devices, electronic parts, daily necessities, packaged goods, etc. The actual display is made by indicating the production location of the product, distribution channel, product characteristics, etc., with unique words, figures, codes, etc., and the display may be incorporated
/3
into the product itself or the information may be attached in the form of label or seal.
[0003]
Conventionally, the display of words and figures on packaging materials, labels, caps, films, containers, etc., has been carried out by the plate printing method such as gravure printing, flexographic printing, offset printing, silk screen printing, and the like. In addition, stamp printing method, ink jet printing method, thermal transfer ribbon method, stamp printing method, etc., are also used.
[0004]
However, since this kind of printing method is a method in which printing ink, thermal ink, etc., are printed on the surface of the object, the identification symbols, numbers, words, figures themselves may be erased by scratching, oil, etc., and this could be a serious problem if it affects the safety instruction and traceability.
[Patent Document 1] Japanese laid-open patent publication No. 2006-26939
[Patent Document 2] Japanese laid-open patent publication No. 2004-262015
[Patent Document 3] Japanese laid-open patent publication No. 2002-321476
[Disclosure of the invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
[0005]
Therefore, the present invention is intended to provide a low-cost laminate for laser marking obtained by laser irradiation of the laminate for laser marking composed of a transparent plastic film (1), an ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink, and a substrate (3) such as a film, paper or a metal foil, wherein the laminate for laser marking can make markings with words, figures, and codes that will not be erased by scratching or exposure to oil.
[Means for solving the problems]
[0006]
Specifically, the present invention relates to a laminate for laser marking, comprising a transparent plastic film (1), an ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin, and a substrate (3).
[0007]
Further, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laminate for laser marking, characterized in that the printing ink containing the vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin further contains at least one of a white pigment and a yellow pigment.
[0008]
Furthermore, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laminate for laser marking, characterized in that 20~90 parts by weight of the vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin are contained in 100 parts by weight of the solid content of the printing ink containing the vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin.
[0009]
The present invention further relates to a laminate for laser marking described above, wherein the printing ink containing the vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin contains a coloring agent that develops a color by laser irradiation.
[0010]
Furthermore, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laminate for laser marking, characterized in that the coloring agent is a copper-molybdenum composite oxide.
[0011]
The present invention further relates to the above-mentioned laminate for laser marking, characterized in that the substrate (3) is any of paper, aluminum foil or plastic film.
[0012]
Furthermore, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laminate for laser marking, characterized in that it is a soft package for food.
[0013]
The present invention further relates to a laser marking method, characterized by irradiating the above-described laminate for laser marking with laser to mark it with words, figures or codes.
[0014]
/4
Furthermore, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laser marking method, characterized in that the marking is made on the heat seal portion of the soft package for food.
[0015]
The present invention further relates to the above-mentioned laser marking method, characterized in that the marking is any of an expiration date, a lot number or a serial number.
[0016]
Furthermore, the present invention relates to the above-mentioned laser marking method, characterized in that the marking is made by using any of a carbon dioxide gas, YAG laser or YVO4 laser.
[0017]
The present invention further relates to a laminate with the laser marking obtained by the above-mentioned method.
[0018]
The laminate for laser marking in this embodiment has a transparent plastic film (1) on the surface, and words, figures and codes can be directly formed, by laser irradiation, on the ink film layer (2) with the printing ink contained in the laminate. Further, since the transparent plastic film (1) serves as the surface protection layer, excellent water resistance, oil resistance and abrasion resistance can also be obtained without further treatment after printing.
[0019]
In the commodity or product distribution control and sales promotion using this laminate for laser marking as a package or a label, and marking it with words, figures, and codes, the identification function can be ensured because the print will not be erased.
[Best embodiment of the invention]
[0020]
The basic structure of the laminate for laser marking of the present invention is a transparent plastic film (1), an ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin, and a substrate (3). Specifically, the structures of the laminate are, for example, A) a transparent plastic film (1) / ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin / anchor coat layer / plastic film (3), B ) a transparent plastic film (1) / ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin / printing ink film layer / adhesive layer / plastic film (3), and C) a transparent plastic film (1) / ink film layer (2) formed of a printing ink containing a vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate resin / printing ink film layer / adhesive layer / aluminum foil (3). When the laminate for laser marking is used as a packaging material, the substrate (3) is preferably a plastic film that can be sealed by heating.
日本語 から 英語: Manufacturing method of a coating material General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 3. Detailed description of the invention
(Technical field)
The present invention relates to a manufacturing method of a coating material capable of providing a coating with high hardness and high durability with a feeling of depth (thicker film is possible) on a substrate having relatively large dimensional variations, such as a cement substrate or wood.
/2
(Background art)
Coatings have been applied on cement substrates and wood for the purpose of preventing contamination, etc. Generally, the coating is an organic system and is not weather resistant. Recently, fluorocarbon resin systems have been used as highly weather resistant coatings, but their coating hardness is low. Further, although there are inorganic systems such as water glass system, phosphate system, silica sol system, etc., they are inferior in generation of efflorescence, transparency, adhesion, and other property. In addition, there is an alkoxide system of silicon for making a hard coat on plastic, but it has the limitations of at most several μ and a thickness of at most 5 μ. Further, there are other coating materials (Japanese laid-open patent publication No. S48-56230, S48-81928, etc.), but they are not suitable for a cement substrate.
(Objective of the invention)
The present invention has been proposed to improve the above-mentioned drawbacks by providing a manufacturing method of a coating material which can make a thick, transparent and highly durable coating of a high hardness and 10 m or more in thickness with 1 coat on a substrate having relatively large dimensional variations, such as a cement substrate or wood. An objective of the present invention is to provide a manufacturing method of a coating material which can be by 10 m or more.
(Disclosure of the invention)
The present invention relates to a manufacturing method of a coating material, which can make a thick, highly durable coating of a high hardness and 10 m or more in thickness with 1 coat and which is suitable for use on a substrate having relatively large dimensional variations such as a cement substrate or wood.
A detailed description is provided below. Specifically, in the present invention:
I. (A) Si (OR′)4 is used as the SiO2 component, and its amount is 50~200 parts by weight (wherein R′ is an alkyl group having 1~4 carbons),
(B) RSi (OR')3 is used as the RSiO component, and its amount is 100 parts by weight (wherein R is a methyl group or an ethyl group, R' is an alkyl group having 1~4 carbons),
(C) R2Si (OR')2 is used as the RSiO component, and its amount is 13~50 parts by weight (wherein R is a methyl group or an ethyl group, and R' is an alkyl group having 1~4 carbons)
The above components (A), (B) and (C) are mixed, and a solvent such as water-alcohol is added and mixed to react under an acidic catalyst to produce a coating solution, which is coated on a substrate and is hardened at a temperature of 200°C or below.
In the alkoxysilane used here, R’ is an alkyl group with 1~4 carbons, and R is a methyl group or an ethyl group.
Specifically, the alkoxy group as Si (OR′)4 is tetraalkoxysilane such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy or the like. In RSi (OR')3, the alkyl group is methyl and ethyl groups, and the alkoxy group is alkyltrialkoxysilane such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, etc. Further, in R2Si (OR′)2, the alkyl group is a methyl or ethyl group, and the alkoxy group is dialkyl dialkoxysilane such as methoquine, ethoquine, propoxy, butoxy, etc.
Preferably, R is methyl or ethyl, and further introduction of an alkyl group or phenyl group will lead to decreased weatherability.
日本語 から 英語: METHOD FOR RENDERING STRONGLY ACIDIC AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS VISCOUS AND THIXOTROPIC General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 詩&文学
翻訳 - 英語 1. Name of invention
Method for rendering strongly acidic aqueous solutions viscous and thixotropic
2. Claims
A method for rendering a strongly acidic aqueous solution viscous and thixotropic, characterized by suspending a finely powdered aluminum silicate in the strongly acidic aqueous solution to which a silica sol and an alumina sol have been added, and then adding a small amount of a water-soluble silicone-glycol copolymer to make it gelate.
3. Detailed Description of the Invention
This invention is a method for rendering strongly acidic aqueous solutions viscous and thixotropic.
When removing metal rust and cleaning the surface of tiles and pottery using an aqueous solution such as hydrochloric acid or phosphoric acid, sometimes there is a need to work by applying the acid solution to objects that cannot be immersed. If the acidic solution is to be applied to places such as walls or ceilings, it is desirable to render to the acidic solution viscous and thixotropic, so that it will not flow off but will stay.
Generally, high molecular organic thickeners such as carboxymethyl cellulose, sodium polyacrylate and polyvinylpyrrolidone as well as mineral thickeners such as bentonite and kaolin are used as thickeners to impart viscosity to aqueous solutions.
However, in [sic! source contains illegible text] of strongly acidic solutions with pH 1 or below, high-molecular organic thickeners will be hydrolyzed, and the viscosity will be reduced [sic! source contains illegible text] and will be completely lost in 2-3 days. In case of mineral thickeners, they will be eroded by acids, causing loss of viscosity as well as precipitation.
Therefore, it was difficult to make strongly acidic aqueous solutions viscous and remain viscous.
This invention provides a method to solve such difficulties.
Specifically, this invention is a method for rendering a strongly acidic aqueous solution viscous and thixotropic by suspending a finely powdered aluminum silicate in the strongly acidic aqueous solution to which a silica sol and an alumina sol have been added, and then adding a small amount of a water-soluble silicone-glycol copolymer to make it gelate.
/2
More specifically, firstly mix the silica sol and the alumina sol into the strongly acidic aqueous solution, and then suspend the finely powdered aluminum silicate in the mixture, and after that, add a small amount of the water-soluble silicone or glycol copolymer to make it gelate so that its viscosity rapidly increases and it becomes thixotropic, wherein the viscosity can be stably sustained for a long period of time, which is the main discovery of this invention. Although the theoretical mechanism of such phenomenon is not yet clear, it is thought that the colloidal particles of silica and alumina and the suspended particles of aluminum silicate adsorb each other, and they are crosslinked by the long chain-like molecules of the silicone glycol copolymer to form a gel so that the strongly acidic aqueous solution becomes and remains viscous and thixotropic.
Examples of the strongly acidic aqueous solutions in this invention include inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid and phosphoric acid as well as organic acids such as [sic! source contains illegible text] acid, gluconic acid and citric acid.
Next, we will explain this invention by the following examples.
Example 1
Mixed 1 part of silica sol and 1 part of alumina sol (which have a combined solid content of 20%) into the strongly acidic aqueous solution containing 4 parts of 15% hydrochloric acid, 1 part of 50% phosphoric acid, 1 part of 50% ferric chloride solution, and 1% anionic surfactant, and stirred them, and then added 2 parts of finely powdered aluminum silicate and suspended it in the solution. In this state, there was almost no viscosity, but when 1% of water-soluble silicone/glycol copolymer was added, the viscosity increased rapidly and the solution gelated, showing viscosity and thixotropy. There was no decrease in viscosity after it was stored for 6 months. This viscous acidic solution was applied to the welding surface of a stainless-steel pan, and after several minutes, it was rinsed, and the welding scale was dissolved and removed.
Example 2
Mixed 1 part of silica sol and 0.5 part of alumina sol into the mixture of an acidic solution containing 1 part of 15% hydrochloric acid, 3 parts of 30% phosphoric acid, 2 parts of 30% gluconic acid, and 1% anionic surfactant, and then mixed in 2.5 parts of finely powdered aluminum silicate to suspended it, and after that, added 2% water-soluble silicone or glycol copolymer to cause gelation to obtain a paste-like acidic solution which exhibited viscosity and thixotropy. This acidic solution was stored for 6 months at a low temperature between 0C~10C and a high temperature between 30C~40C, and no decrease in viscosity was observed.
Even if this acidic solution was applied to walls and ceilings, it clung firmly to them and stayed there and did not flow off, so it could be used to clean the dirt effectively such as rust adhering to the surface of tiles, pottery, etc.
As described above, this invention can impart viscosity and thixotropy to strongly acidic aqueous solutions and sustain such properties for a long period of time. As such, this invention has an excellent effect in manufacturing viscous acidic rust removers, viscous acidic cleaners, etc. and has great industrial value.
日本語 から 英語: ENERGIZED ROLL General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 航空宇宙/航空/宇宙
[Claims]
[Claim 1]
Energized rolls, which comprise an energized roll which contacts an object to be heated and electrically heats the object and which is constituted by a roll of high rigidity, and a backup roll which presses said object to be heated against said energized roll and is constituted by a roll which can deform more easily than said energized roll.
[Claim 2]
Energized rolls, which comprise an energized roll which contacts an object to be heated and electrically heats the object and which is constituted by a roll of high rigidity, and a backup roll which presses said object to be heated against the backside of said energized roll and is constituted by a roll which can deform more easily than said energized roll, and 2 backup rolls of high rigidity which are further provided near the two ends of the backup roll.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Field of industrial use]
The present invention pertains to an energized roll which can prevent the generation of sparks between the energized roll and a steel material such as a steel strip when an electric current is passed to the steel strip via the energized roll to heat or plate the steel strip.
[0002]
[Prior art]
Examples of methods for preventing the generation of sparks by using an energized roll when a steel material such as a steel sheet is directly energized can be found in the Japanese Utility Model Application Publication No. S55-103252 which is a method of boosting the inter-roll voltage and in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. S59-222535 where the energized position is controlled by the winding angle of the roll.
[0003]
However, in the former, in order to heat the steel sheet, a current of I2R must be passed wherein the current which is passed through the steel strip is I [A] and the resistance is R [Q]. For example, in order to heat the steel sheet to its annealing temperature, an electric current of a few thousand and even tens thousands [A] is needed and the current which flows through the roll cannot be reduced. Therefore, generation of sparks cannot be fundamentally prevented.
[0004]
In the latter, the roll will expand due to the heated steel sheet and it is impossible to distribute the diameter in the width direction of the roll while repressing it in the edge direction of the steel sheet, so unstable contact will occur between the steel sheet and the roll in the edge direction and inevitably sparks will be generated to cause spark flaws on the steel sheet.
[0005]
Conventionally, during electrical heating or electroplating where a current is applied via the energized roll, such sparks tend to cause damages. Especially in a sheet material, sparks can easily occur.
[0006]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Next, the generation of sparks of the energized roll will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 5 is the conceptual diagram of a transformer type of electrical heating device. In the electrical heating device 19, the energized rolls 15, 16, 17 and 18 are arranged in 2 pairs in tandem relatively to the steel sheet S which is being conveyed. The ring-shaped transformer 20 which provides the route 27 for the steel sheet S is arranged between the 2 pairs of the energized rolls. 21 and 22 are bus bars.
[0007]
These energized rolls 15, 16, 17 and 18 contact the steel sheet S at or above a specific pressure F while the steel sheet S bears the pressure F applied by the energized rolls 15 and 16 and the energized rolls 17 and 18 which respectively come into contact from above and from underneath.
[0008]
Fig. 6 (A) shows the pressure distribution on the side where contact with the low-temperature steel sheet is made. Fig. 6 (B) shows the pressure distribution on the side where contact with the steel sheet heated by the electric current is made.
[0009]
The energized rolls on the side where they contact the heated steel sheet expand due to the heat transferred from the steel sheet. As the central part of the rolls expand and the pressure of the central part rises, the pressure distribution on the edge of the steel sheet begins to fall. As the situation progresses, a gap will be formed between the steel sheet and the rolls.
[0010]
Once this kind of local pressure drops, the contact between the steel sheet and the energized rolls will become unstable and spark will be easily generated. It has been proved through actual measurements with a laser displacement sensor and an analysis by FEM that sparks are generated in the roll thermal crown generating area of 10~50 μm. In this way, the situation of such a local pressure drop is that, for example, there is contact with the steel sheet that has a deteriorated sheet shape, and eccentricity of the energized rolls also occurs.
[0011]
The inventors of the present invention keep the pressure distribution of the contact surface between the steel sheet and the energized rolls, which rotationally contact and energize the steel sheet, to be always at or above a specific pressure during the thermal treatment or electroplating of the steel sheet. Even if the thermal expansion of the energized rolls themselves continues due to the heat of the heated steel sheet, unstable contact between the steel sheet and the energized rolls will not occur so that sparks are prevented, and a stable current is applied.
[0012]
[Means for solving the problems]
The present invention is (1) energized rolls, which comprise an energized roll which contacts an object to be heated and electrically heats the object and which is constituted by a roll of high rigidity, and a backup roll which presses the object to be heated against the energized roll and is constituted by a roll which can deform more easily than the energized roll, and (2) energized rolls, which comprise an energized roll which contacts an object to be heated and electrically heats the object and which is constituted by a roll of high rigidity, and a backup roll which presses the object to be heated against the backside of the energized roll and is constituted by a roll which can deform more easily than the energized roll, and 2 backup rolls of high rigidity which are further provided near the two ends of the backup roll.
[0013]
[Functions]
The present invention will be described when it is applied in a transformer type of electrical heating device and a steel sheet is the object to be heated with reference to Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, and Fig. 4. Fig. 1 is an explanatory drawing where 1 and 2 are the energized rolls of high rigidity, and 3 is a bus bar. 4 is the transformer type of heating device. 5 and 6 are the axles of the energized rolls 1 and 2. 7 and 8 are thin shell rolls which can deform more easily than the energized roll 2 and S is the steel sheet.
/3
[0014]
Fig. 2 is an enlarged view of the thin shell rolls 7 and 8 shown in Fig. 1, and although not illustrated, their two ends are supported by the axle 10 via a panel or spoke, and they contact the steel sheet S located between them and the energized roll 2 with a pressure that is applied through the axle.
[0015]
Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the steel sheet S shown in Fig. 2, where the axle 10 of the thin shell rolls 7 and 8 is pressed and deformed to press the steel sheet S against the energized rolls 1 and 2, and unstable contact between the energized rolls 1 and 2 and the steel sheet S is suppressed.
[0016]
The thin shell 9 of the thin shell rolls 7 and 8 is made of a metal and is conductive and, when the diameter of the thin shell rolls is 200~300 mm, its suitable thickness is 10 mm~20 mm and the Young's modulus of the thin shell rolls formed by the thin shell is preferably above 5000. A suitable pressure to apply on the thin shell rolls 7 and 8 is 0.5 kg/mm2. In other words, the present invention deforms the thin shell rolls to control the pressure distribution.
[0017]
The effect is to keep the power supply constant by uniform contact with the strip S which is unnecessarily fully flat thus preventing the generation of arcs as well as scratches in the strip S.
[0018]
The 2nd invention not only provides the backup roll 11 near the two ends of the thin shell roll 7 of the 1st invention and suppress it by flattening it with the thin shell roll, but also applies pressure on the axles 23 and 24 of the backup rolls of the thin shell roll 7 to flatten the large crown which is generated at the edge areas and control the pressure distribution. Here, the axles 23 and 24 are electrically insulated from the outside.
[0019]
The case where only the thin shell roll is used and the case where the thin shell roll and the backup roll are used to provide description in the above, but the roll of the present invention may or may not supply electric power.
[0020]
[Examples]
(Example 1) In the transformer type of electrical heating device as shown in Fig. 1, an example which applies the present invention will be described below. It is constituted by a 1 restraining roll which is made of a 10 mm thick shell and has an external diameter of 250 mm.
[0021]
The energized rolls used are rolls made of cast iron with an external diameter of 250 mm and a length of 600 mm and a thermal crown of 150 micron at maximum will be generated when they contact a steel sheet which has been heated to 850C. For the rolls on the low-temperature side, a rubber roll with an external diameter of 230 mm is used as the upper roll and a roll with an external diameter of 250 mm is used as the lower roll. The energized rolls were set 2.3 m apart and an ordinary steel sheet (0.06 carbon) with a width of 150 mm and a thickness of 0.4 mm was used to conduct the experiment at a plate feeding speed of 6~60 m/min. In the experiment, the electric current was 6000 [A] at maximum, and the average pressure was 3 kg/mm2.
[0022]
As a result, the electrical current was applied at a maximum of 20 [A] per 1 mm of steel sheet width and stable heating could be performed without generating sparks at any temperature during heating from room temperature to 1100C, and because the energized rolls uniformly contact the steel sheet, the heat transferred from the sheet to the rolls was also almost equally and the temperature distribution in the width direction of the steel sheet after passing through the rolls was also within ±5C which was good, so deformation of the steel sheet caused by temperature difference did not occur at all. It has been confirmed that the current density per 1 mm in the width direction of the steel sheet when a conventional roll was used was well above 10 [A/mm].
[0023]
(Example 2) An average pressure of 1 kg/mm2 was applied on the backup rolls which had an external diameter of 200 mm and a length of 100 mm and were positioned near the two ends of the rolls of the device used in the example 1. As a result, the current density could be even higher and could reach up to 40 [A/mm].
[0024]
[Effects of the invention]
As stated above, by using thin shell rolls so that the energized roll crown and the sheet crown are pressed by the flattened thin shell rolls and the pressure is applied on the surface instead of on some lines, there are the effects of keeping a stable supply of electric power and preventing the generation of arcs. Moreover, it is also possible to press down the sheet edge areas, where there are larger crowns, by the backup rolls.
日本語 から 英語: THERMAL TRANSFER RECORDING MEDIUM General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 A preferable but not essential material to be added to the ink layer of this invention is, for example, a wax having a penetration degree of 1 or more. Since this wax can be transferred with low energy, it is highly sensitive, and its melt viscosity is lower than that of the resin, clear images can be obtained faithfully according to the image signal (without any omission). In addition, since the thermal transfer recording medium is relatively hard when the penetration degree is less than 1 (25℃), the thermal transfer recording medium excellent in abrasion resistance and scratch resistance can be obtained.
When the acrylic resin of this invention and the wax are used in combination in the ink layer, they are preferably used in a weight ratio of 20/80~80/20.
The support of the thermal transfer recording medium of this invention can be, for example, relatively heat-resistant plastic films
/4
such as polyester, polycarbonate, triacetylcellulose, nylon, and polyimide, as well as glassine paper, condenser paper, gold leaf foil, etc., and composites of the above materials.
The composites can be aluminum/paper composites, metal-deposited paper, or metal-deposited plastic film. The preferable thickness of the support is around 2~15 μ when considering the thermal head as the heat source at the time of thermal transfer, but there is no particular restriction if a heat source, e.g. a laser beam, capable of selectively heating the thermal transferrable ink layer is used. When a thermal head is used, a heat-resistant protective layer made of a silicone resin, a fluorocarbon resin, a polyimide resin, an epoxy resin, a phenolic resin, a melamine resin, a nitrocellulose, etc. can be used on the surface of the support in contact with the thermal head to improve the heat resistance of the support, or a support material which cannot be used conventionally can be used.
The colorant can be an organic or inorganic dye and a pigment having the characteristics suitable for use as the recording material. Preferably, it has, for example, sufficient coloring density and will not be discolored by light, heat, humidity, etc. In addition, it can also be a material which is colorless when it is not heated and becomes colored when it is heated or when it comes in contact with the substance coated on the transfer receiving object.
The pigment colorant in this invention preferably contains 15~75 wt% of ink components. More preferably it is 30~50 wt%. When it is less than 15 wt%, the dispersibility decreases, and when it exceeds 75 wt%, the inherent properties (excellent solvent resistance and abrasion resistance) of the acrylic resin of this invention are lost. And, by using the pigment colorant in this range, the dispersibility can be further improved and, at the same time, the thickness of the ink layer can be reduced.
In this invention, a separation layer can be interposed between the support and the heat transferable ink layer as required.
The separation layer of this invention is designed to facilitate the separation of the ink layer and the support when the ink layer is melted and transferred, so it is preferable to use a material whose peak value of the differential thermal analysis below 120℃ and which is easily thermally melted to become a low viscosity liquid. Such materials include natural waxes such as hard wax, spermaceti, candelilla wax, carnauba wax, rice bran wax, montan wax and ozokerite, as well as petroleum waxes such as paraffin wax and microcrystalline wax, and various modified waxes, hydrogen waxes, long-chain fatty acids, etc. The thickness range of the separation layer is 0.1~10 μm, preferably 1~5 μm.
Among the above-mentioned materials for the separation layer, carnauba wax is particularly preferred. This is because the separation layer material and the colorant layer material will be partially melted and mixed during the thermal transfer, so a hard and slippery material such as carnauba wax can be perfectly used as the separation layer material.
In addition, a wax containing an acrylic polymer can also be used in the separation layer. In that case, the mixing ratio of the wax to the acrylic polymer should be 100:0~10:90, preferably 90:10~30:70.
Next, we will describe the method for producing the thermal transfer recording medium using the support, the colorant and the above-mentioned compounds. Firstly, the colorant and the above-mentioned compound should be blended to form a composition and then the composition can be applied to one surface of the support by an appropriate coating method.
To form the composition, the colorant and the above-mentioned compound are blended to contain the colorant in the amount of 1~80%, preferably 5 to 35%, by weight of the total composition weight, and in addition, optional components can be added as needed, and then they are blended at normal temperature or under heating.
The above-mentioned optional components include a softener such as mineral oil or vegetable oil, a thermal conductivity improving agent such as a metal powder, pigments such as micro silica, calcium carbonate and kaolin, a transferability improving agent such as polyhydric alcohol, a solvent or diluent, etc.
/5
A solvent or diluent is used when the composition is used as an ink composition for common printing methods, and it can be, for example, toluen, xylene, ethyl acetate, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, ethyl cellosolve, cyclohexanone, etc.
The method of coating the above-mentioned composition to one side of the support can be gravure coating, roll coating, air knife coating, and wire bar coating, in addition to the printing methods such as gravure printing, gravure offset printing, silk screen printing, etc.
In addition, if necessary, waxes such as paraffin wax, polyethylene wax, candelilla wax, carnauba wax and thermoplastics such as EVA, EEA and other thermoplastic resins can be added or multi-layered.
The thickness range of the above-mentioned ink layer is 0.1~30 μm, preferably 1~20 μm. If the thickness is less than 0.1 μm, the printing density will not be increase, and if it exceeds 30 μm, the thermal conductivity will be poor, causing insufficient transfer.
The reason why the above-mentioned acrylic resin is preferable for the ink layer of the thermal transfer recording medium of this invention is that it melts or softens at 50~200C which is a preferable heat sensitivity for the thermal transfer recording medium. In addition, since glycidyl methacrylate or glycidyl acrylate accounts for 10% or more (molar ratio) of the constituent monomers of the polymer, the momentary high-temperature heating at the time of thermal transfer will easily enable the ring-opening reaction of epoxy groups between polymers, which contributes to the excellent solvent resistance, abrasion resistance and heat resistance of the transferred images.
Synthesis examples of the above-mentioned acrylate polymer are shown below.
(Synthesis example 1)
150 ml of ethyl acetate was placed into a 500 ml four-neck flask equipped with a thermometer, a reflux condenser, and a mechanical stirrer, and a mixture composed of 0.2 g of azobisisobutyronitrile, 30 g of I-hexene, 20 g of glycidyl methacrylate, and 30 g of ethyl acetate was dripped in over 1 hour under a nitrogen gas flow. Heating was given from the outside so that the reaction liquid temperature was 70~72C.
After the dripping was complete, heating was continued for 6 hours. After the reaction was completed, ethyl acetate, unreacted monomers, etc. were distilled off in a water bath with a temperature below 70C using a rotary evaporator. 25.7 g of a transparent resinous substance was obtained.
The substance was composed of 5% of hexene and 95% of glycidyl methacrylate by molar ratio of monomers based on the comparison with the elemental analysis value of the glycidyl methacrylate homopolymer synthesized in the same way.
The number average molecular weight by GPC was about 10000. (Compound No. 5)
(Synthesis example 2)
31.4 g of acrylic resin was obtained in the same way as synthesis example 1 except that 30 g of 2-chloroethyl vinyl ether was used instead of hexene.
The elemental analysis showed that it was composed of 15% 2-chlorovinyl and 85% glycidyl methacrylate. The number average molecular weight by GPC was about 8000. (Compound No. 11)
日本語 から 英語: A FUEL ASSEMBLY General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エネルギー/発電
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the invention
A fuel assembly
2. Claims
(1) A fuel assembly comprising a plurality of fuel rods arranged in a lattice array, characterized in that fuel pellets filled in the fuel rods are hollow.
(2) The fuel assembly according to Claim 1, characterized in that fuel pellets located in more outer areas have larger void ratios than those located in the center of the fuel assembly.
3. Detailed description of the invention
The present invention relates to an improvement of a fuel assembly.
The fuel assembly comprises a plurality of fuel rods arranged in a square lattice array such as 7 rows and 7 columns or 8 rows and 8 columns.
However, in a fuel assembly loaded in a nuclear reactor, the degree of combustion of individual fuel rods differs depending on the width of the water gap existing around them. Specifically, in a light water reactor currently used as a commercial reactor, uranium-235 concentrated to an abundance ratio of 2~3% (level of concentration) is used as the nuclear fuel and light water is used as the coolant. The light water also acts as a moderator, and decelerates the high-speed neutrons generated during fission to a speed level at which they are balanced with the thermal energy in the reactor. Neutrons decelerated by the light water are called thermal neutrons and they react well with uranium-235.
Moreover, the distribution of thermal neutrons in the fuel assembly is that their number is the most in the water gap region and gradually reduces as they are closer to the central area.
Thus, a conventional fuel assembly uses several kinds of fuel rods with different levels of concentration in order to generate identical linear power density no matter which fuel rods in the fuel assembly are taken into account.
However, it is both troublesome and complicated to use several kinds of fuel rods with different levels of concentration. Specifically, it is necessary to prevent fuels with different levels of concentration from mixing up with one another, and at the time of mold forming, it is necessary to clean the equipment to prevent mixing with any remaining powder of fuel with a different level of concentration from previous molding.
/2
This not only takes more time to work but also drives the manufacture cost high.
The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and it is an objective of the present invention to obtain a fuel assembly, which, without using different kinds of fuels with different levels of concentration, has the same linear power density no matter which fuel rods in the fuel assembly are taken.
An embodiment of the present invention will now be described with reference to the figures.
Fig. 1 is a schematic expository diagram showing an embodiment of the fuel assembly of the present invention. As shown in Fig. 1, the fuel assembly (10) of the present invention comprises fuel rods (11) filled with hollow fuel pellets (20) shown in Fig. 2. The void ratio VR of the hollow fuel pellets (20) shown in Fig. 2 is indicated by the following equation.
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the invention
Heat exchanger
2. Claims
A heat exchanger having a core formed by joining a corrugated fin or a plate fin with a plurality of louvers on a flat tube, characterized in that a protruding length L of the fin from the flat tube in a cooling air introduction portion is longer than a flat length L1 of the fin tip and is shorter than a length L2 which is from the fin tip edge to a rear edge of a 1st louver or a turning louver.
3. Detailed Description of the Invention
[Field of industrial use]
This invention relates to a structure of the core of a heat exchanger which is suitable for a car radiator.
[Prior art]
Conventionally, corrugated fin type and plate fin type structures are used as the structures for the core of a heat exchanger which is used as a car radiator.
The end of the flat tube is indented so much that it is even more inside than the corrugated fin in a conventional corrugated fin type of core, which is represented by the structure disclosed in the Japanese utility model publication No. S55-119585 and the applicant, Nippon Denso’s published technical report No. 23-136 (issued on July 20, 1981).
The core structure of the conventional corrugated fin type will be explained based on Fig. 5 through Fig. 8. In the figures, 1 … is the corrugated fin and 2 … is the flat tube. The bent side portion of the corrugated fin 1 … is joined to the flat side wall 2a of the flat tube 2 … by brazing. Most of the louvers 3 … are cut, raised and formed along the flow direction A of the cooling air in the flat plate portions of the corrugated fin 1 … while the turning louvers 3a, 3b and 3c are formed respectively on the cooling air introduction side, on the central portion and on the cooling air outlet side as shown in Fig. 7. The louver 3 … provided between the turning louver 3a on the cooling air introduction side and the turning louver 3b on the central portion is formed in a reverse
/2
tilt direction to that of the louver 3 … provided between the louver 3b on the central portion and the turning louver 3c on the cooling air outlet side.
The length L of the fin 1 protruding from the flat tube 2 on the cooling air introduction portion is defined by the protruding length of the fin 1 from the bend start point (the point that is substantially away from the fin 1) of the curved wall 2b of the flat tube 2’s tip.
Conventionally, as shown in Fig. 8, the end of the flat tube 2 is much indented and the indent is more inside than the tip of the corrugated fin 1, and the length L of the fin 1 protruding from the flat tube 2 on the cooling air introduction portion is larger than the length L2 to the rear edge of the turning louver 3a at the cooling air introduction side.
In the above-mentioned structure, the joining length of the flat tube 2 and the fin 1 is short, and the heat conduction from the flat tube 2 to the tip flat portion 1a of the fin 1 is not effective due to the cutting line of the louvers 3 and 3a formed between the tip portion and the flat portion 1a of the flat tube 2, so the heat radiation efficiency of the fin is low, and adequate heat exchange performance cannot be achieved.
In order to eliminate such problems, it is desirable to increase the joining length of the flat tube 2 and the fin 1 (i.e., the length B of the flat tube 2) as much as possible, to increase the heat transfer contact length.
[Problems to be solved by this invention]
However, even if only the length B of the flat tube 2 is increased, as shown in Fig. 9, when the protruding length L of the fin 1 is smaller than the length L1 to the root (the bend start point) of the turning louver 3a, the flow of the introduced cooling air at the inlet is a combined flow F consisting of the flow F1 avoiding the louvers 3a and 3 where there is large resistance and the flow F2 along the flat side wall 2a of the flat tube 2; since this combined flow F avoids the louver 3 portion, it was found that the amount of air flowing through the louver portion having high heat dissipation performance decreased, and the improvement of heat exchange efficiency did not meet the expectation.
[Means used to solve the problems]
This invention is characterized in that the protruding length L of the fin from the flat tube in the cooling air introduction portion is longer than the flat length L1 of the fin tip and is shorter than the length L2 which is from the fin tip edge to the rear edge of the 1st louver or the turning louver.
[Functions]
In this invention, there is no cutting line of the louver between the flat tube tip and the flat portion, the heat conduction path from the flat tube to the flat portion is not interrupted, so the heat is effectively transferred to the flat portion, leading to high heat dissipation efficiency of the fin. Moreover, the flow of the introduced cooling air is a combined flow F consisting of the flow F1 which avoids the louver portions where there is high resistance and the flow F3 which is along the curved wall of the flat tube’s tip. As such, the flow F3 along the curved wall of the flat tube’s tip is directed to the louver and it is a flow generated by decreasing the cross-sectional area of the flow path between the flat tubes sandwiching the fin, so its flow velocity is large. Therefore, the combined flow F is directed to the louver portion. As a result, the amount of air flowing through the louver portion which has high heat dissipation performance is increased, and the heat exchange efficiency is improved.
[Examples of this invention]
Next, we will explain this invention based on the 1stfirst example shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.
This example shows a core of the corrugated fin type. Since its main configuration is the same as that of the conventional core shown in Fig. 5 or Fig. 9, we will not explain it repeatedly.
The difference between this example and the conventional core is that the protruded length L of the fin from the flat tube 2 in the cooling air introduction portion is longer than the length L1 of the flat portion 1a of the fin 1’s tip, and is shorter than the length L2 from the fin 1’s tip edge to the rear edge of the turning louver 3a on the cooling air introduction side (i.e. (L1 L L2)).
In other words, the length L1 of the flat portion 1a of the fin 1’s tip is the length from the fin 1 tip edge to the root of the turning louver 3a on the cooling air introduction side.
In this structure, there is no cutting line of the louver between the flat tube 2’s tip and the flat portion 1a, the heat conduction path from the flat tube 2 to the flat portion 1a is not interrupted, so the
/3
heat is effectively transferred from the flat tube 2 to the flat portion 1a, leading to high heat dissipation efficiency of the fin 1.
Moreover, in terms of the flow of the introduced cooling air, the flow F1 which avoids the louvers 3a, 3 … where there is large resistance and the flow F3 which is along the curved wall 2b of the flat tube 2 are combined into the flow F3. As such, the flow F3 along the curved wall 2b of the flat tube 2’s tip is directed to the louvers 3a, 3 … and it is a flow generated by a decrease in the cross-sectional area of the flow path between the left and right flat tubes 1 sandwiching the fin 1, so its flow velocity is high. Therefore, the combined flow F is directed to the louvers 3a, 3 …, and as a result, the amount of air flowing through the louver 3a, 3, … which have high heat dissipation performance is increased, and the heat exchange efficiency is improved.
Although the corrugated fin type of core has been described in the first 1st example, this invention is also applicable to the plate fin type of core as described in the second example shown in Fig 3. It is well known that the plate fin type of core is formed by passing the flat tubes 11 … between a plurality (only 1 plate fin is shown in the figure) of plate fins 10 stacked at intervals and joining them. Even in such a configuration, by making the protruding length L of the fin 10 from the flat tube 11 in the cooling air introduction portion longer than the length L1 of the fin tip’s flat portion 10a but shorter than the length L2 from the fin 10’s tip edge to the rear edge of the turning louver 12a on the cooling air introduction side (L1 L L2), the same effect as the 1st example can be obtained.
Furthermore, when there are no turning louvers 3a and 12a in the louver structure, the 1st louver on the cooling air introduction side will function in the same manner as the turning louvers 3a and 12a. As shown in Fig. 4 which is the 3rd example, the length of the flat portion 1a of the fin 1’s tip can be considered as L1, and the length from the flat portion of the fin 1’s tip edge to the rear edge of the 1st louver 20a can be considered as L2, and the same effect as that of the 1st or the 2nd example can be obtained. In Fig. 4, 20b represents the 2nd louver, and 20c represents the 3rd louver.
[Effects of this invention]
According to the above explanation about this invention, since there is no cutting line of the louver between the flat tube tip and the flat portion of the fin, the heat is effectively transferred from the flat tube to the flat portion, thereby increasing the heat dissipation efficiency of the fin. Moreover, in terms of the flow of the introduced cooling air, the flow F1 which avoids the louvers where there is large resistance and the flow F3 which is along the curved wall of the flat tube’s tip are combined into the flow F which is directed to the louver portion, the amount of air flowing through the louver portion which has high heat radiation performance is increased, thus improving the heat exchange efficiency.
翻訳 - 英語 1. Name of the utility model
Cardboard cool box
2. Claims
1) A cardboard cool box, characterized in that a cut necessary for forming a box corner by folding is made on a cardboard designed with an insulating layer on at least one surface, the cut being formed in a line shape without a gap at least near a ruled line for folding.
2) The cardboard cool box according to Claim 1, characterized in that the insulating layer is an aluminium deposited film.
3) The cardboard cool box according to Claim 1, characterized in that the insulating layer is a foamed resin layer.
4) The cardboard cool box according to Claim 1, characterized in that the insulating layer is a material formed by laminating an aluminium deposited film on a foamed resin layer.
5) The cardboard cool box according to Claim 1, characterized in that the insulating layer is a material formed by laminating an aluminium deposited film on an air bag sheet layer.
/3
3. Detailed description of the utility model
[Field of industrial use]
The present utility model relates to a cool box made of a cardboard that is used for transportation of fresh foods, etc.
[Prior art]
Along with the improvement and spread of the simple transportation means such as home delivery services, the transportation of fresh foods, etc., has the tendency of a rapid increase in recent years. Because fresh foods have severe requirements for freshness maintenance, they are encased together with a refrigerant such as dry ice or ice, and at present, insulated containers resistant to fresh foods and refrigerant mostly adopt boxes made of foamed polystyrene.
Nevertheless, in spite of good insulating effects, these boxes made of foamed synthetic resins are molded products and cannot be folded like a cardboard box. Moreover, because they need increased wall thickness to improve the strength, so they take up much inventory space which is disadvantageous from the viewpoint of transportation cost. Furthermore, it is difficult to print on them
/4
for decoration, the cost for non-standard design and production is high, and they also have the problems of environment pollution such as production of hazardous gases when they are incinerated at disposal.
The cardboard boxes have excellent insulating properties in virtue of the cardboard structure and have less of the problems stated above. Thus, they are suitable for use as cool boxes, but they have a water resistance problem.
What's more, as shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2, a cut 5 necessary for folding the corner 1 of the conventional cardboard box is made into a groove having a space to facilitate the folding without overstrain. However, due to the corrugation generated on the sheet during production of the cardboard sheet, a distortion is easy to occur on said cut 5 and thus a hole 1a is obviously formed on the corner of the box. Even there is no problem due to corrugation as stated above, when the cool box is assembled, even though the corner 1 is sealed, a hole 1a which is easy for air to flow through will be formed on the corner 1, leading to inadequate effect of preserving the cold air in the box.
/5
Therefore, although the cut 5 is generally a groove in a conventional cardboard, in the event that it is formed in a line without a gap, when the corner 1 is formed by folding (in Fig. 1, when the flaps 2, 3 are folded, the edges of the two flaps 2, 3 are pushed together at the place where the corner is formed), an overstrain will occur and a crack will be generated on the extended ruled line 6 of the cut 5 on the corner 1.
[Objective of the utility model]
In view of the facts described above, the utility model is intended to provides a cool box made of a cardboard with water resistance by making a cut necessary for forming a corner by folding on a line without a gap in such a way that the box does not have an air breathable hole generated on the corner even though the cut may have some distortion and it does not have a crack generated on the extended ruled line even though the cut is a line shape.
[Construction of the utility model]
/6
In order to achieve the objective above, the present utility model uses a cardboard designed with an insulating layer on at least one surface. On the cardboard, a cut necessary for forming the box corner by folding is formed in a line shape without a gap at least near the folding line. Thus, a cool box made of such a cardboard can be assembled without generating an air breathable hole or a crack on the corner due to the cut.
[Embodiments]
Fig. 3 through Fig. 9 show one embodiment. As shown in Fig. 4, the cardboard F forming the cool box C has a two-sided cardboard 7 as its main body, which has a middle core 7a made of a corrugated paper onto which an outer liner and an inner liner 7b, 7c of the same paper are pasted, wherein, as the insulating layer, a sheet 8 made of a soft foamed synthetic resin is pasted onto the outer surface of the outer liner 7b, and then aluminium deposited films 9a, 9c made of a synthetic resin are respectively pasted onto the outer surface and the surface of the rear liner 7c. Moreover, an air bag sheet layer or other suitable insulating sheet can be used as the insulating layer which can be either composited with an aluminium deposited film or be used alone for cold preservation.
/7
The cool box C can be assembled into many forms, all of which need the cut 20 to fold the corner 25. In this embodiment, an A-3 type of box suitable for sealing the content is prepared. First, we will describe it from its unfolded state (Fig. 3).
There are the front and rear sidewalls 11, 12 and the left and right sidewalls 13, 14 that can be folded along the longitudinal ruled lines 16 and are connected together. The outer flaps 11a, 11a, 12a, 12a that can be folded along the lateral ruled lines 17 are connected with the upper and lower ends of the front and rear sidewalls 11, 12. The inner flaps 13a, 13a, 14a, 14a that can be folded along the same ruled lines 17 are connected with the upper and lower ends of the left and right sidewalls 13 and 14. Moreover, the connecting piece 15 that can be folded along the longitudinal ruled line 18 and the right sidewall 14 are connected with the ends of the rear sidewall 12, and the auxiliary pieces 15a that can be folded along the lateral ruled line 19 are connected with the upper and lower ends of the connecting piece 15.
The outer flaps 11a, 12a and the inner flaps 13a, 14a alternate with each other and adjoin at the border which is the cut 20. The outer flap 12a and the auxiliary piece 15a connecting to the rear sidewall 12 adjoin at the border which is the cut 21. The cuts 20 and
/8
21 are simply cut linearly without a gap by a single-edged blade. Moreover, the projection sizes of the flaps 11a and 12a and the opposite flaps 13a and 14a are set so that they butt with each other. For this purpose, the projections of the inner flaps 13a, 14a are longer than those of the outer flaps 11a, 12a.
Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 5, typically the ruled lines 16, 17 each consist of 2 folding lines, i.e. 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b. The tip of the cut 20 is positioned in the middle between each two folding lines 16a, 16b and 17a, 17b. This position tends to be away from the inner folding line 17b of the lateral ruled line 17 so the air breathable hole as described previously will not be formed and airtightness is improved.
As shown in Fig. 6, when the cool box C is assembled, the connecting piece 15 is connected to the inner side of the left sidewall 13 through a glue machine or wire nails 23. Then each of the inner flap 13a, 14a and outer flap 11a, 12a on the top and bottom is folded along the ruled line 17. In this way, the inner flaps 13a, 14a and outer flaps 11a, 12a will have no gap in between, thus the edges are pushed together near the lateral ruled line 17 to have an impact on generating a crack in the longitudinal ruled line 16. However,
/9
the synthetic resin films 9a, 9b are pasted on the two surfaces of the cardboard F to improve the strength and the sheet 8 made of a soft foamed synthetic resin will also improve the strength. Moreover, the overstrain produced during folding will be absorbed by the elasticity, so no crack will be generated on the corner 25. Moreover, the inner flaps 13a, 14a are folded to press on the inner surfaces of the front and rear sidewalls 11, 12 on the corner 25. Further, the elasticity of the sheet 8 also has a sealing effect, so surely no air breathable hole will be generated.
There is no cut described above between the flaps 12a and 13a at the two ends. The connection of the rear sidewall 12 and left sidewall 13 (the state shown in Fig. 6) allows the two flaps 12a, 13a to adjoin each other from the beginning. The relative positions of the two flaps 12a and 13a can make the corner 26 air-tight by carefully joining the two sidewall 12 and 13 when they are joined. The flap 12a and the auxiliary piece 15a adjoin at the linear cut 21 from the beginning. Thus, if the auxiliary piece 15a is folded, the edge will press sideways onto the inner surface of the rear sidewall
/10
12. Thus, no matter to which extent the two sidewalls 12 and 13 join each other, the corner 26 will be completely airtight.
Moreover, as shown in Fig. 9, if the auxiliary piece 15a is folded in half and fixed with a wire nail 23a, the same airtightness can be realized.
The cool box can be finally taped with a rubber tape to stay in the assembled form with any gaps sealed to become an almost completely sealed container for use. Together with the special insulating structure of the cardboard F, an excellent cooling or heat insulating performance can be achieved. As long as the synthetic resin films 9a, 9c are pasted on both surfaces of the cardboard F, any other structure of the cardboard will work in line with the spirit of the utility model.
[Other embodiments]
Fig. 10 and Fig. 11 are C-type cardboard box bodies (the covers have the same structure) of embodiments. The front and rear sidewalls 31, 32 and left and right sidewalls 33, 34 are each foldable along the ruled lines 35 and connected to the bottom wall 30. The front and rear sidewalls 31, 32 and the connecting pieces 36, 36 are foldable along the ruled lines 37 and connected to the upper and lower ends of the left and right sidewalls 33, 34. The cuts 20 between the
/11
connecting pieces 36, 36 and the front and rear sidewalls 31, 32 are formed in a line shape without a gap near the ruled lines 35 and 37 and the other part 20a is formed in a groove shape.
In this way, no air breathable hole will be generated on the corner of the box. Similar to the embodiment described above, because the synthetic resin films 9a, 9c are pasted on the outer and inner surfaces of the cardboard F, no crack will be generated on the corner.
Moreover, beyond the present utility model, a grooved cut 40 as shown by the dashed line in Fig. 11 is made until it is close to the ruled lines 35, 37, which can prevent the generation of an air breathable hole on the corner of the box.
Furthermore, Fig. 12 shows an expanded view of an embodiment of an A-type cardboard box, wherein 41 is a grooved cut and 41a is a line-shaped cut.
[Effects of the utility model]
As described above, the cardboard cool box according to the present utility model uses a cardboard designed with an insulating layer on at least one surface, so the box has a strength that will not deteriorate even though it contacts fresh foods and
/12
a refrigerant, and it is resistant to water. Moreover, a cut necessary for forming the box corner by folding is formed in a line shape without a gap at least near the folding ruled line. Thus, the box can be assembled without producing an air breathable hole or a crack on the corner due to the cut. Thus, it is easy to achieve complete airtightness to have an excellent effect of cold or heat preservation.
日本語 から 英語: LITHIUM ION SECONDARY BATTERY General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
翻訳 - 英語 [Claims]
[Claim 1]
A lithium ion secondary battery, characterized in that it comprises a battery group for charging and a battery group for discharging, and the battery group for charging and the battery group for discharging will be switched if the state of charge of these battery groups is outside a specified range.
[Claim 2]
The lithium ion secondary battery according to claim 1, characterized in that said battery group for charging and battery group for discharging are arranged alternately.
[Detailed description of the invention]
[0001]
[Technical field of the invention]
The present invention relates to a lithium ion secondary battery, and particularly to a lithium ion secondary battery with optimized charging and discharging timing.
[0002]
[Prior art]
Usually, in order to prevent the degradation of a secondary battery, it is necessary to prevent it from overcharge and over-discharge. Fig. 6 shows the relation between the power density and state of charge (SOC) of a nickel hydrogen storage battery. As shown in Fig. 6, if SOC is low, then the power density is also low. Moreover, Fig. 6 shows the power density when the discharge cut-off voltage is 8.0 V, 9.0 V, and 10.0, respectively V. It can be known from Fig. 6 that the range of SOC suitable for a nickel hydrogen storage battery has a fixed upper limit and a fixed lower limit, and preferably the range is, for example, in the range of 20%~80%. If the battery exceeds this range to be in the region near 0% or in the region near 100%, it may degrade due to overcharge or over-discharge.
[0003]
This is also the case for a lithium ion secondary battery. The Japanese patent publication No. H4-331425 disclosed a device for preventing a lithium ion secondary battery from overcharging and over-discharging. In this example of a conventional device, the voltages between various terminals of the lithium ion secondary battery are monitored and the battery overcharge and over-discharge are prevented by controlling when to start and when to stop charging and discharging according to the voltages.
[0004]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
Nevertheless, in said conventional lithium ion secondary battery, there is no difference between the battery for charging and that for discharging, and the charging and discharging are switched as per the changes in the use conditions of the batteries. Thus, for example, if the battery is used for an electric car, when the regenerative electric power is to be received by the lithium ion secondary battery but the state of charge (SOC) of the battery is high, then the power cannot be recovered and has to be discarded. Thus, the problem of poor regeneration efficiency may occur. Moreover, if it is desired to forcibly recover the regenerative electric power in order to prevent such poor regeneration efficiency, the battery may be overcharged. Furthermore, depending on the use condition of the battery, there may be times when power must be supplied to a load even though its SOC is low, which may cause battery over-discharge.
[0005]
Moreover, the lithium ion secondary battery will generate heat during discharging, so it is necessary to cool it. For example, in the case of cylindrical batteries, it is necessary to have a gap between battery cylinders to ensure heat dissipation, and in the case of square batteries, it is necessary to separate and modularize the batteries. Therefore, it is necessary to make sure there is this gap for a gas or a liquid to flow through to cool the battery. Thus, it is necessary to ensure an extra battery space is provided, which is a problem.
[0006]
In view of these problems, the present invention is intended to provide a lithium ion secondary battery that can prevent overcharge and over-discharge and can adjust the battery temperature without having to ensure there is a gap for heat dissipation.
[0007]
[Means to solve the problems]
In order to reach the goals above, the present invention is a lithium ion secondary battery which is characterized by consisting of a battery group for charging and a battery group for discharging, wherein the battery group for charging and the battery group for discharging will be switched in the event that the state of charge of the battery groups is outside a specified range.
[0008]
Moreover, said invention is also characterized in that the battery group for charging and the battery group for discharging are arranged alternately.
[0009]
[Mode for implementing the invention]
The mode for implementing the present invention (hereinafter referred to as embodiment) is described below based on the drawings.
[0010]
Fig. 1 shows an example of the configuration of the lithium ion secondary battery according to the present invention. As shown in Fig. 1, multiple batteries are connected in series or in parallel or both, which are referred to as battery group A. Similarly, other multiple batteries are connected in series or in parallel or both, which are referred to as battery group B. The batteries in the battery group A and those in the battery group B are arranged alternately as shown in Fig. 1, and the batteries are close to one another. Moreover, as shown in Fig. 1, the batteries in the battery group A and those in the battery group B are arranged in a zigzag form, but they are not limited to this form but can also be arranged adjacent to each other.
[0011]
In the configuration described above, for example, if the battery group A is used for charging and the battery group B is used for discharging in an electric car, the former will be used with the state of charge (SOC) in the range of 20%~80% and the latter will be used with SOC in the range of 80%~20%. In this way, for example, when the regenerative energy during electric car braking is recovered, it is ensured that there is always a battery group that can receive the energy, which can thus prevent the inability to recover the energy due to high SOC of the battery. In this way, the situation where the regenerative energy must be abandoned can be prevented, and the regenerative energy recovery efficiency can be
/4
improved. In addition, the battery group B for discharging can be charged from another power generation source such as a solar cell or a fuel cell to always maintain a suitable SOC. Moreover, when the SOC of the battery group for charging reaches 80% or the SOC of the battery group for discharging drops to 20% during driving, if the battery group A for charging and the battery group B for discharging are configured to switch electrically, their uses can be modified flexibly corresponding to the SOC of the battery groups.
[0012]
The ranges of SOC of the battery group A and battery group B are set to 20%~80% in order to prevent overcharge and over-discharge. That is, if the SOC is higher than 80% and the regenerative energy is high, then the battery will not be charged, or it may be overcharged if it is forced to recover the energy. Moreover, if the SOC is lower than 20%, an adequate discharging capacity will not be ensured, and an over-discharge may occur if the batter is forced to discharge. Furthermore, if the SOC is too low, the film containing the components of Li2CO3, etc., generated on the surface of the negative electrode material will disappear and this film will be formed upon next charging, which may result in the problem of low charging or discharging efficiency. Further, the lithium ions will be consumed as the electrolyte decomposes, which may also result in a problem of battery deterioration. For the reasons above, the SOC of each battery group is preferably controlled in the range of 20~80%.
[0013]
Fig. 2 is a flow chart of charging operations to quickly charge the battery group for discharging. As shown in Fig. 2, the voltages of the battery group A and battery group B are compared and the one having a higher voltage is used for discharging (S1). Moreover, as shown in Fig. 3, the battery characteristic of the lithium ion secondary battery is that there is a certain relationship between the SOC and the battery voltage. That is, the voltage will rise as the SOC increases. Thus, the SOC of the battery group can be learned through observing its voltage. In this embodiment, the reason to select the one having a higher voltage from the battery group A and battery group B for use as the battery group for discharging is because it can be charged to the SOC of 80% in a short time.
[0014]
In S1, if the battery group A has a higher voltage, the battery group A will be used as the battery group for charging and the battery group A will be charged (S2). Moreover, in S1, if the battery group B has a higher voltage, the battery group B will be charged (S3).
[0015]
The charging is performed as stated above and whether the end-of-charge voltage, which is equivalent to SOC of 80%, is reached will be judged (S4). If it is reached, the charging operation will be ended (S5).
[0016]
In this embodiment, in the battery groups A and B, the one have a higher voltage is charged and used for discharging, and it will be charged to SOC of 80%, so charging can be done quickly to finish in a short time.
[0017]
Fig. 4 shows the flow of charging and discharging operations at the time of starting up and during driving when the lithium ion secondary battery according to the present invention is used in an electric car. As shown in Fig. 4, the voltages of the battery group A and battery group B at the time of starting up are compared and the one having a higher voltage is used for discharging (S11).
[0018]
If the battery group A has a higher voltage, it will be used for discharging (S12) and the SOC of the battery group A will be monitored to check if it is 20% or higher (S13). If the SOC of the battery group A is 20% or higher, then the SOC of the battery group B will be monitored to check if it is 80% or higher (S14).
[0019]
In S13 and S14, if the SOC of the battery group A is lower than 20% or the SOC of the battery group B is no lower than 80%, the battery group A and the battery group B will be switched (S15). This is because that if the SOC of the battery group A changes is lower than 20%, an adequate discharging capacity cannot be ensured when it is used for discharging and it may be over-discharged. Moreover, if the SOC of the battery group B is 80% or higher, its capacity to recover the regenerative energy will be inadequate, and it may be over-charged. Thus, when either of the conditions is satisfied, the battery group A and the battery group B will be switched and the battery group for charging and that for discharging will also be switched.
[0020]
On the other hand, if the battery group B has a higher voltage in S11, the battery group B will be used for discharging (S16) and the SOC of the battery group B will be monitored to check if it is 20% or higher (S17). If the SOC of the battery group B is 20% or higher, the SOC of the battery group A will be monitored to check if it is 80% or higher (S18).
[0021]
Similar to the case where the battery group A is used for discharging, in S17 and S18, if the SOC of the battery group B is lower than 20% or if the SOC of the battery group A is no lower than 80%, the battery group A and the battery group B will be switched (S19).
[0022]
By means of the operations stated above, the battery groups are used for charging and discharging depending on the SOC of the battery group A and the battery group B and they can be switched accordingly as necessary. In this way, it can be ensured that there is always a suitable battery group for charging or discharging and a suitable discharging capacity is ensured, and that there is always a battery group to recover the regenerative power.
[0023]
As described above, Fig. 3 shows the battery characteristics of the lithium ion secondary battery. As shown in Fig. 3, the lithium ion secondary battery shows an endothermic characteristic when being charged in the SOC range of 0%~80% and shows an exothermic characteristic when being charged in the range of 80%~100% or being discharged in the range of 100%~0%. Thus, as shown in Fig. 1, the battery group A and the battery group B are arranged alternately and are close to each other. Because the battery groups are controlled to suitable ranges of SOC, the absorbed heat at the charging side and the released heat at the discharging side can be balanced. In this way, the temperature of the battery groups can be maintained to the specified level even though no special cooling device
/5
is used. Moreover, it can be known from Fig. 3 that the borderline between the endothermic characteristic and exothermic characteristic is the points of SOC of 80%, and so it also means that it is important to limit the control range of SOC of the battery groups to no higher than 80%.
[0024]
Fig. 5 shows the result of a dynamic stress test using the battery groups arranged as shown in Fig. 1, i.e., the repeated charging and discharging test assuming an actual electric car is driven. Moreover, through Fig. 5 shows only the voltage of the battery group at the discharging side, the batteries at the charging side are also being operated at the same time.
[0025]
It can be seen from Fig. 5 that the temperature of the whole battery group is maintained to the range of about 22C~23C. Thus, if the battery group A and the battery group B are arranged to have the configuration as shown in Fig. 1, it will be unnecessary to use a cooling device. In this way, for example, there will be no need to design a gap for heat dissipation and thus the battery can have a compact design.
[0026]
[Effects of the invention]
As described above, the timing for switching the battery groups between charging and discharging can be optimized and the SOC of the battery for discharging and the SOC of the battery for charging can be maintained within their suitable ranges. As a result, the regenerative energy will not be wasted. Moreover, the temperature of the battery group can be adjusted by combining the endothermic characteristic and exothermic characteristic of the battery group for charging and the battery group for discharging, without using a cooling device.
中国語 から 英語: SCREENING OF DIFFERENTIAL EXPRESSION GENES OF HUMAN SKIN EPIDERMAL STEM CELLS AT DIFFERENT DEVELOPMENTAL STAGES BY cDNA MICROARRAY TECHNIQUE General field: 医療 Detailed field: 化粧品、美容
翻訳 - 英語 [Abstract]
Objective To analyze expression characteristics of human skin epidermal stem cells at different developmental stages, and to explore their possible biological significance. Methods Healthy skin samples were collected from 3 groups, i.e. 28~32-week-old fetuses, 4~12-year-old children and 35~55-year-old adults, with 10 in each group. Epidermises were separated using the combined digestion with trypsin and EDTA, and human epidermal stem cells were isolated and purified with the type IV collagen attachment method. The monoclonal antibodies of integrin β1 and keratin 19 were used for detection and identification of epidermal stem cells by immunohistochemical staining. Total RNA was extracted from the cells of the groups by the one-step Trizol method, and the quality of the total RNA was tested by formaldehyde denaturing agarose gel electrophoresis. Probes were prepared and hybridized with expression profiling gene chips for scanning fluorescent signals and analyzing images. The differential expression genes were analyzed and screened with the 2-fold differential expression value. Significantly up- or down-regulated genes were selected for the validation verification of relevant genes by real time RT-PCR. Results Compared with the child group, the adult group had a total of 1,808 genes with differential expression, including 1,089 up-regulated genes and 719 down-regulated genes, of which 1,462 genes were known, and 346 genes were unknown. Compared with the fetus group, the child group had a total of 4,534 genes with differential expression, including 1,783 up-regulated genes and 2751 down-regulated genes, of which, 3,577 genes were known, and 957 genes were unknown. According to gene functions, genes with differential expression between the adult group and the child group could be classified into 128 categories, and genes with differential expression between the child group and the fetus group could be classified into 216 categories. 1,104 genes with persistently differential expressions were detected in the fetus, child and adult groups, and they could be divided into 32 categories according to gene functions. In the genes with persistently differential expression that were detected, there were 94 genes which were persistently up-regulated and 75 genes which were persistently down-regulated. The validation results by real time RT-PCR were consistent with the results obtained from the gene chip screening. Conclusion The gene expression profiles of epidermal stem cells that were collected from fetuses, children and adults and cultured in vitro exhibited obvious differences, which might be closely related to the proliferation and differentiation of human epidermal stem cells and the self-repair ability of wound at different developmental stages.
[Keywords] Epidermis; Stem cells; Genes; Microchip analytical technique; Development
The proliferation, differentiation and regulation of epidermal stem cells are an extremely complex process, the mechanism of which is not fully understood. At present, some progress has been made in the study of the expression characteristics of some single genes and their effects on the proliferation and differentiation of epidermal stem cells [1]. However, in the process of human growth and development, the expression characteristics of the genes in epidermal stem cells, their overall changes and developmental patterns are still not clear. By using the gene chip technique, the expression of thousands of genes can be analyzed in parallel. The DNA fragments are extracted and amplified and are then densely and addressably fixed on slides. Based on the principle of complementary base pairing, a large number of complementary DNAs, oligonucleotides or gene fragments with known sequences can be used as probes for high throughput parallel analysis of sample DNAs [2]. The purpose of the present study is to screen for the differential expression genes in human skin epidermal stem cells at different developmental stages by the gene chip technique, and to preliminarily analyze the characteristics of gene expression changes as well as their possible biological significance, so as to provide new ideas and clues for further exploring the mechanism of proliferation, differentiation and regulation of epidermal stem cells.
1 Materials and Methods
1.1 Main reagents and instruments
KC serum-free medium (K-SFM), 2.5 g/L trypsin, 0.2 g/L ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), and FBS (Gibco, USA); type IV collagen and diethyl pyrocarbonate (DEPC) (Sigma, USA); mouse anti-human integrin β1 and keratin 19 (Beijing Zhongshan Biotechnology Co., Ltd.); Trizol Reagent (Invitrogen, USA); anthocyanine fluorescent dye Cy5-deoxycytidine triphosphate (dCTP) and Cy3-dCTP (GE Healthcare, USA); NucleoSpin® RNA purification kit and NucleoSpin® Extract II kit (Macherey-Nagel, Germany); Crystal Core® human whole-genome oligonucleotide microarray and Crystal Core® SuperGreen fluorescent quantitative PCR universal kit II (CapitalBio, Beijing, China); CX40 regular optical microscope and CK40 inverted phase contrast microscope (Olympus, Japan); quantitative PCR instrument (Roche, Switzerland); gel imager and LuxScan 10K-A dual-channel laser scanner (CapitalBio, Beijing, China).
1.2 Specimen origin
The skin specimens of 28~32-week-old fetuses (fetus group) were obtained from artificially aborted fetuses having normal development and were provided by the Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology of Guangdong Work Injury Rehabilitation Hospital; skin specimens of 4~12-year-old children (child group) and 35~55-year-old adults (adult group) were collected from their remaining healthy skin during post-burn plastic skin grafting and were provided by the Department of burn rehabilitation, Guangdong Work Injury Rehabilitation Hospital. All the skin specimens were collected from the same part in the back. Each experimental group contained 10 skin specimens. Informed consent has been obtained from the donors and/or their family members for specimen collection, and the study protocol was approved by the Medical Ethics Committee of the hospital.
1.3 Isolation, culture and identification of epidermal stem cells
The epidermises of each group were separated using the combined digestion with trypsin and EDTA, and human epidermal stem cells were isolated and purified with type IV collagen attachment method. Then, the human epidermal stem cells were cultured in vitro in a medium composed of epidermal growth factor, K-SFM, etc. [3]. Based on the two-step EnVision method, the integrin β1 and keratin 19 were used in the identification testing by immunohistochemical staining after cell isolation by following the procedures provided in the instruction of the kit. The 10 samples in each group were co-cultured after isolation and identification. The cell morphology was observed immediately after inoculation and on day 3 and day 10 of cell culture under an inverted phase contrast microscope at 200x magnification.
1.4 Extraction and quality testing of RNA from epidermal stem cells
The total RNA of epidermal stem cells was extracted by Trizol one-step method for each group [4]. Then it was purified by column chromatography with the NucleoSpin® RNA purification kit. Then, the total RNA was quantified by measuring the absorbance values at the wavelengths of 260 nm and 280 nm with a spectrophotometer. The quality of RNA was tested by formaldehyde denaturing agarose gel electrophoresis.
1.5 Preparation of the microarray
Crystal Core® human whole-genome oligonucleotide microarray (22 K) and its analysis kit were used. The microarray containing 21522 70-mer oligonucleotide DNAs (from the Human Gene Oligonucleotide Library version 2.1 of US Operon Co., Ltd. with each oligonucleotide DNA representing 1 human gene) were dotted on a chemically modified glass slide (75 mm 25 mm) by a SmartArrayer microarrayer. For quality control of the whole process of the microarray preparation and hybridization, 4 human housekeeping genes (H-ACTB, H-GAPD, H-LDHA and H-RPL9) were also dotted on the slide for use as positive control to detect the fluctuation of microarray data. In addition, 12 artificially synthetic 70-mer oligonucleotide DNAs with no homology to human genes and the DNA spotting solution were used as negative controls, 8 nucleic acid sequences from yeast that are not related to the experimental samples were taken as external references, and Hex was used as positive spotting control to avoid interference by the experimental RNA samples and to check the validity of the microarray system.
1.6 Fluorescent labeling of cellular RNA
Starting from the total RNA, the T7 oligonucleotide (dT) primer containing the T7 promoter sequence was used as primer to synthesize the complementary DNAs by reverse transcription with CbcScript reverse transcriptase. The reverse transcription product was purified with the
/3
PCR NucleoSpin® Extract II kit. Then, the complementary DNAs produced by the reverse transcription were labeled with the KLENOW enzyme using a random primer. Cy3-dCTP was used to label the human gene controls, and Cy5-dCTP was used to label the samples of the fetus group, child group, and adult group. The labeled products were purified with the PCR NucleoSpin® Extract II kit and were then dried.
1.7 Microarray hybridization and scanning
The labeled DNAs were dissolved in 80 μL hybridizing solution [containing 3 concentrated saline sodium citrate buffer (SSC), 2 g/L sodium dodecyl sulfate (SDS), 3 concentrated Denhart’s solution, and formamide with a volume fraction of 25%] for hybridization at 42C overnight. The hybridization system was washed for 5 min. using a 42C solution containing 2 g/L SDS and 2 concentrated SSC and then washed for 5 min. in 2 concentrated SSC at room temperature. After the slide was dried, it was scanned with a LuxScan 10K-A dual-channel laser scanner. LuxScan 3.0 image analysis software was used to analyze the microarray images and convert the image signals into digital signals.
1.8 Data detection and analysis
STATA 11.0 software was used to analyze the microarray data and Lowess method was used for normalization. According to the average value of the overall signals of Cy5 and Cy3, the inter-slide linear correction was performed for each microarray to make the average value of signals identical across all the microarrays. The genes were marked based on signal strength and image quality. In addition, the genes with weak fluorescence signals as well as the redundant data such as the signals of positive control, negative control and external reference on the microarrays were deleted. The label probe for the fetus, child and adult groups was Cy5 fluorescein (red), and that for the human gene controls was Cy5 fluorescein (green). The microarray results of the child group and fetus group, and those of the adult group and child group were superimposed in pairs to screen for the differential expression genes of epidermal stem cells in these groups. The criterion for differential expression gene is: the differential expression value, that is, the fluorescence signal ratio Cy5/Cy3 is greater than 2 or less than 0.5. In the Molecule Annotation System, the screened differential expression genes were systematically classified based on their functions and were statistically analyzed with the Go database system.
1.9 Validation and analysis of the differential expression genes TUBGCP3 and FOSL2 screened from microarrays using real time fluorescence RT-PCR
According to the results of microarray screening, the up-regulated TUBGCP3 gene and down-regulated FOSL2 gene, which are differential expression genes of epidermal stem cells in the fetus, child and adult groups, were selected for real time fluorescence RT-PCR using GAPD as internal reference. The basic requirements for the primer design are: the size of PCR products is 150~250 bp, the annealing temperature is 60C, and the primers should be designed and synthesized based on the target fragments which are selected according to the sequences of TUBGCP3 gene and FOSL2 gene in the US GeneBank of the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI) database (the same applies below). The primer sequences are shown in Table 1. The RT-PCR products with 10-fold serial dilutions were used to prepare the samples for standard curve plotting. The target genes and internal reference genes were amplified by a fluorescence quantitative PCR instrument, and the standard curve was measured. The cycle threshold (Ct) values of the tested genes were calculated according to the amplification results and the Ct values were used to represent the initial number of copies of the tested template in the samples. The smaller the Ct value is, the larger the initial number of copies is; the larger the Ct value is, the smaller the initial number of copies is. The content of the target genes and the content of GAPD were calculated according to the Ct values of the specimens and the standard curves. With the fetus group as the control, the expression levels of target genes were presented as the ratio of child group/fetus group, and the ratio of adult group/fetus group, respectively.
中国語 から 英語: EXPRESSION OF TRANSCRIPTION FACTORS OF RICE FLAG LEAF UNDER LOW NITROGEN STRESS General field: 科学 Detailed field: 生物学(バイオテク、生化学、微生物学)
翻訳 - 英語 Abstract:
With Agilent 444K whole-genome microarrays, the expression changes of transcription factor genes in 2 rice cultivars with different chlorophyll contents were studied under low nitrogen stress. The results showed that under low nitrogen stress, compared with the controls, the expression level changed in 53 transcription factor genes in the flag leaves of super-green rice Shennong 196 (SN196) (35 genes with down-regulated expression and 18 genes with up-regulated expression in the transcription level), and in 27 transcription factor genes in the flag leaves of Toyonishiki (21 genes with down-regulated expression and 6 genes with up-regulated expression in the transcription level). 48 genes from SN196 and 22 genes from Toyonishiki had cultivar-specific responses to low nitrogen stress. There were 5 overlapping transcription factor genes responding to low nitrogen stress between the two rice cultivars, including 1 having up-regulated expression and 4 having down-regulated expression in the transcription level, respectively. Expression of transcription factor genes in the flag leaf was affected by low nitrogen stress, and rice cultivars with different chlorophyll contents exhibited cultivar-specific responses as well as overlapping responses in some genes. The distribution of THE low nitrogen stress response transcription factor genes on the chromosomes was different between the two rice cultivars.
Keywords: rice; flag leaf; microarray; transcription factor
Rice was one of the crops that has the largest growing area, the highest yield and the largest use of nitrogen fertilizers in China. In 2002, the area of rice grown in China was 28.5 million hm2, accounting for about 20% of the world's rice growing area, but the amount of nitrogen fertilizers used accounts for more than 30% of the world's rice nitrogen fertilizer consumption. The large-scale use of nitrogen fertilizers not only reduces the utilization rate of nitrogen fertilizers, increases the production cost of the grain, but also seriously affects the enthusiasm of farmers to grow the grain, and moreover, it will also bring serious environmental pollution. Therefore, how to improve the nitrogen absorption and utilization by rice and to reduce the consumption of nitrogen fertilizers while maintaining high and stable yields was a problem to be solved urgently as well as a hot issue for study in recent years [1-3].
Plant transcription factors play an important role in plants’ life activities. Since the first discovery of plant transcription factors in maize, hundreds of plant transcription factors have been found. There were at least 2,300 transcription factors in rice, which play an important role in rice growth and development. Previous studies had shown that plant transcription factors regulate the expression of a series of stress-related genes through transcriptional regulation to influence the plants’ tolerance to stress [4-7]. Transcription factors were known to be closely related to a series of stress resistances, such as resistances to cold stress, drought, salt, diseases, etc. Expression profiling
___________________________________________________
whole-genome microarray was used by Lian et al. [14] to analyze the expression of genes in rice seedling under low nitrogen stress, and the result showed that the expression level of 11 transcription factor genes in rice roots under low nitrogen stress experienced changes, including 5 genes with up-regulated expression and 6 genes with down-regulated expression, indicating that transcription factors were also closely related to nitrogen stress, but the results were only limited to the rice seedling. The nitrogen supply of rice was closely related to chlorophyll content. The difference in chlorophyll content under low nitrogen conditions reflected the differences in the nitrogen absorption efficiency and nitrogen chlorophyll synthesis efficiency between different genotypes [16-17].
This study used rice microarray technology to analyze differences in the expression of N stress response transcription factor in the flag leaf of rice with different chlorophyll contents at the rice full heading stage to better understand the response and mechanism of crops to low nitrogen stress and provide reference for improving the efficiency of nitrogen absorption and utilization by rice.
1 Materials and Methods
1.1 Materials
Super-green rice Shennong 196 (SN196) was a leaf color variation material discovered by the Rice Research Institute, Shenyang Agricultural University during its practice of super-rice breeding. Through years of continuous self-pollination, this rice cultivar has stable traits with strong green leaf colors and high chlorophyll contents during the whole growth period. Toyonishiki is a Japanese conventional rice cultivar (which has a significantly lower chlorophyll content than SN196) [18].
1.2 Cultivation of the Materials
The test was conducted in the experimental base of the Rice Research Institute, Shenyang Agricultural University. Pot planting method was used. The plastic pot has an upper mouth with a diameter of 30 cm, a lower mouth with a diameter of 20 cm, and a height of 26 cm. The soil was fully mixed, sifted and dried. The soil was sandy loam with 29.8 mg/g of organic matter, 1.11-1.28 mg/g of total nitrogen content, 2.80 mg/g of total phosphorus content, 34.0 mg/g of total potassium content and 30.0 ug/g of hydrolyzed nitrogen content, and 5.90 g/g of available phosphorus content. The nitrogen fertilizer used was urea [CO (NH2)2, nitrogen content 46.7%], and there were nitrogen-free fertilizer N0 (0 g/kg) treatment and normal nitrogen fertilizer N1 (0.15 g/kg) treatment, with N1 treated leaves as control. The phosphate fertilizer used was superphosphate calcium [Ca (H2PO4)2-H2O, phosphorus content 18%], 5.1 g for each pot; the potassium fertilizer used was KCl, 1.5 g for each pot. The nitrogen fertilizer was portioned for 3 applications, of which 50% was applied as a base fertilizer, 30% as the tillering fertilizer and 20% as the panicle fertilizer. The phosphorus and potassium fertilizers were applied at one time as base fertilizers. Nutrient soil (special soil for raising seedlings according to the growth law and nutrient characteristics of rice during the seedlings period) was used to keep seedlings warm and dry. When rice seedlings grew 4 leaves, they were transplanted into prepared plastic pots with 3 holes per pot, 1 plant in each hole, repeated 3 times. Rain shelter was used to shelter from rain and prevent loss of the nitrogen fertilizer. Other management measures followed those for general rice growing fields. Flag leaves were collected at full heading stage and treated with liquid nitrogen and then stored at -80C for use.
1.3 Determination of Relative Chlorophyll Content and Leaf Nitrogen Content
Relative chlorophyll content of the flag leaves from the main stem was determined with a chlorophyll meter (CCM-200 of Opti-Sciences, USA). 3 leaves were measured for each pot; 3 sections, upper, middle and lower sections, were measured for each leaf and their average was taken; each treatment was repeated 3 times. The flag leaves collected at full heading stage were treated in an oven of 105C for 30 min. to remove the greenness, and then the temperature was lowered to 80C for drying until a constant weight was reached. The dry sample was crushed with a crusher. 0.5000 g was measured from the plant sample and put into a 250 mL digestion tube, 1 mL water was added for wetting, 7.0 g K2SO4 and 0.8 g CuSO4·5H2O were added into the digestion tube as catalysts, and 12 mL concentrated sulfuric acid was added and mixed well by shaking. The digestion tube was placed in a digestion furnace to digest at 420C for 60~90 min. until the solution became a clear blue-green liquid, which was cooled for 10~20 min. The nitrogen content in the leaves was determined by the Kjeldahl method (with a FOSS KJELTEC2300 automatic nitrogen analyzer).
1.4 Extraction and Purification of Total RNA from Leaves
Total RNA was extracted according to the instruction provided with the Trizol test kit (product of Invitrogen, USA) and was purified with a RNeasy Mini test kit (produce of Qiagen, Holland). The A260 and A280 values of the extracted RNA samples were determined with an ultraviolet spectrophotometer. At the same time, each RNA sample was diluted to the same concentration according to the determined concentration. 1 μg of RNA was taken for electrophoresis testing with a 0.8% denatured agarose gel. 3 biologically replicated RAN samples of the same volume were taken and mixed for microarray analysis.
1.5 Rice Microarrays
Whole-genome expression profile analysis was made by Kangcheng Biological Co., Ltd using Agillelt [sic! “Agillelt” is a likely a typo in source for “Agilent”] microarrays with 43,803 probes. Each sample was labeled with cyanine Cy3 monochrome fluorescence. cDNA synthesis, microarray hybridization and flush scanning were carried out according to the 2008 edition of Operation Procedure Manual (http://www.chem.agilent.com/Library/usermanuals). Statistical analysis of microarray data was made with Agilent Feature Extraction Software. The microarrays were scanned to obtain a large amount of data. First, the original data of each microarray were normalized so that the expression median value of each microarray was 0, the background was adjusted, the signal-to-noise ratio was improved, and redundant data was removed to improve the efficiency of analysis and processing and make it easier to understand the analysis results. The 2 cultivars (strains) both used N1 treated leaves as control to compare the expression levels with N0 stress treated leaves, and a greater than 2-fold expression change was considered the threshold of gene expression activity changes.
1.6 Real-time Fluorescence Quantitative PCR Analysis
For each sample, 3 biologically replicated RNAs were reverse transcribed into cDNA with the reverse transcription products as templates and rice Actin was used as internal reference. QIAGEN’s SYBR Green RT-PCR kit and ABI7500 fluorescence quantitative PCR analyzer were used for analysis. 4 genes exhibiting differential expression in the super-green rice SN196 gene microarray analysis were randomly selected for real-time fluorescence quantitative PCR analysis to verify the results of gene microarray analysis. The test was repeated 4 times for each gene in each sample and quantitative calculation was made according to the relative quantitative method. The formula for relative quantitative calculation
/3
of the target gene was Exp = 2-Ct, in which, Ct = Ct Unknown sample - Ct Calibrator, Ct unknown sample = Ct Internal reference gene - Ct Target gene, and Ct Calibrator = Ct Internal reference gene - Ct Reference target gene.
2. Results and analysis
2.1 Chlorophyll Content and Nitrogen Content in Flag Leaves of Rice under Nitrogen Fertilizer Stress
Table 2 shows that under low nitrogen stress, both the SN196 and Toyonishiki had significantly decreased relative chlorophyll content and nitrogen content in the flag leaves compared with those of normal nitrogen treated leaves, but their decreases were significantly different, with the relative chlorophyll content decreasing by 22% and 41%, respectively, and the leaf nitrogen content decreasing by 21% and 41%, respectively; a comparison of the two cultivars shows that under the same nitrogen level, the super-green rice SN196 was significantly higher in both the relative chlorophyll content and the nitrogen content than Toyonishiki.
2.2 Rice Flag Leaves Response Transcription Factor Genes under Nitrogen Fertilizer Stress
Compared with the control, a total of 53 transcripts of transcription factors in the flag leaves of super green rice SN196 had changed expression under low nitrogen stress, of which 35 had down-regulated expression, with an average of 3.6-fold down regulation, and 18 had up-regulated expression, with an average of 2.8-fold up regulation. Compared with the control, Toyonishiki flag leaves under nitrogen stress had a total of 27 transcripts of transcription factors (Table 3) that had changed expression, of which 21 had down-regulated expression of 2.0~5.4 folds, with an average of 2.7-fold down regulation, and 6 had up-regulated expression of 2.3~13.6 folds, with an average of 4.2-fold up regulation.
2.3 Cultivar specific and Overlapping Responses to Low Nitrogen Stress of Transcription Factor Genes of Rice with Different Chlorophyll Content in
Most of the transcription factors responding to low nitrogen stress in rice cultivars with different chlorophyll contents showed cultivar specific changes in transcription expression level (Fig. 1). Of the 53 transcripts of transcription factors responding to low nitrogen stress in super green rice SN196, 48 showed cultivar specificity, accounting for 90.6% of the total, of which 17 transcripts had up-regulated transcription expression levels and 31 transcripts had down-regulated transcription expression levels. Under low nitrogen stress, Toyonishiki rice had 22 transcripts of transcription factors showing specific responses, accounting for 78.6% of the total transcripts, of which, 17 were low nitrogen suppressed transcripts and 5 were low nitrogen induced transcripts. Of the transcription factors responding to low nitrogen stress shared by the super green rice SN196 and Toyonishiki, there were 5 transcription factors that had changed transcription expression, including 4 down-regulated expression and 1 up-regulated expression.
2.4 Classification of Low Nitrogen Stress Response Transcription Factor-Related Genes and Transcription Factors
Under low nitrogen stress, the 53 transcripts of transcription factors of super-green SN196 flag leaves with high chlorophyll contents that experienced expression changes belonged to 16 transcription factor families. From Table 4 and Table 5, it can be seen that the Myb family has the highest number of 6 (33.3%) transcription factors with up-regulated expression, with Os07g0443500 having the largest up regulation (9.39 folds); the WRKY family has the largest number of 10 (28.6%) transcription factors with down-regulated expression, with AK106282 having the largest down regulation of 4.24 folds. Some families have both up-regulated expression transcription factors and down-regulated expression transcription factors, for example, in the bHLH family, AK073183 has down-regulated expression and all the others have up-regulated expression; in the WRKY family, AK109770 is up-regulated, while the rest are all down-regulated; the Myb family also has both up-regulated and down-regulated transcription factors. The transcripts of transcription factors with changed expression in Toyonishiki belonged
日本語 から 英語: FRIED FOOD COATING MATERIAL General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 食品&乳製品
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the invention
Fried food coating material
2. Claims
A fried food coating material, which is characterized in that it contains oil- or fat-processed starch, which is obtained by adding edible fat or oil or its analog into a mixture of non-glutinous starch and glutinous starch or glutinous starch alone and processing them and has a slurry viscosity of 200 cp or higher when its concentration is 40 wt%.
3. Detailed description of the invention
The present invention pertains to a fried food coating material which becomes a uniform creamy batter with an appropriate viscosity when water is added, and which has very good property of binding the core (meat, fish, vegetable, croquette, etc.) with the coating to prepare fried foods.
Conventionally, various proteins, starches, emulsifiers and baking sodas which are used for the purpose of improving mouthfeel are added to low-gluten wheat flour which is the main ingredient and, after natural rubber and tackifier, etc. are added to the mixture as necessary to provide an appropriate viscosity when the batter is formed, an appropriate quantity of water is added to form a batter for use a fried food coating material.
However, it is difficult to reach an appropriate viscosity (having creamy consistency at a concentration of 40%) for the batter to be obtained due to flour lumps which occur when water is added to the conventional coating material containing wheat flour as the main ingredient and, even after an appropriate viscosity is reached, the solid content deposits over time, making the batter inappropriate for coating. Moreover, because the property of binding the core and the coating is bad and the coating is prone to coming off the core, which leads to bad appearance of the product and significantly undermines the product value. To solve these problems, various techniques have been proposed. For example, there are the technique of adding 5~20 wt% of rye to wheat flour to provide an ideal
/2
viscosity for the batter (Japanese laid-open publication No. 54084042) and the technique of adding 10~40 wt% of waxy corn starch which is enzymatically saccharified to about DE5~20 to the coating material in order to prevent separation of the coating from the core when being fried (Japanese laid-open publication No. 55085376).
However, each of these techniques has its merits and demerits and is not satisfactory both in maintaining necessary viscosity of batter and in improving the property of binding the core and the coating.
In order to improve in this area, the inventors of the present invention developed a coating material which is constituted by oil- or fat-processed starch of a specified slurry viscosity to replace the conventional coating material which takes wheat flour as the main ingredient and filed a prior patent application (Patent Application No. S60-125069). With this technique, the problem in said conventional techniques was solved but the mouthfeel remained unsatisfactory. That is, when the coating material is coated onto the core and is fried with oil, the coating of the fried food is hard. The problem does not stand out much if a relatively hard core such as a pork cutlet is used. However, when soft food like cream croquette is used, the coating will become dry and brittle in the mouth and it feels differently from the core and cannot be harmoniously integrated with the core in term of mouthfeel.
The purpose of the present invention is to provide a fried food coating material which becomes creamy and has suitable viscosity when water is added to obtain batter, which has a good property of binding the core and the coating for food preparation and provides soft and pleasant mouthfeel as fried foods.
Through extensive research for the purpose of achieving said purpose, the inventors of the present invention find that the coating material constituted by oil or fat-processed starch which takes glutinous starch only or a mixture of glutinous starch and non-glutinous starch as the starting material brings significantly improved mouthfeel compared with the coating material constituted by an oil- or fat-processed starch which takes a non-glutinous starch only as the starting material.
Based on said knowledge, the constitution of the present invention is characterized by containing oil- or fat-processed starch, which is obtained by adding an edible oil or fat or its analog to a mixture of non-glutinous starch and glutinous starch or glutinous starch alone and processing them and has a slurry viscosity of 200 cp or higher when its concentration is 40 wt%.
Next, the constitution of the present invention will be described. Firstly, waxy corn starch and starch obtained from glutinous rice are examples of glutinous starch. Secondly, corn starch, wheat starch and other above-ground starch, sweet potato starch, potato starch, tapioca starch and other underground starch are examples of non-glutinous starch. Any of them can be used in the present invention. Moreover, these raw starches can be weakly oxidized by using sodium hypochlorite or receive heat-moisture treatment before being used in the present invention. Likewise, food-oriented modified starch or enzyme treated starch where amylase treatment is conducted within the temperature range where starch is not gelatinized can also be used effectively.
In the present invention, glutinous starch is used alone or jointly with non-glutinous starch as the starting material of the oil- or fat-processed starch. If glutinous starch is used jointly with non-glutinous starch, it is desirable that the former has a content of 5% or more, preferably 10% or more in the mixture. If its content is less than 5%, the mouthfeel improvement effect by adding glutinous starch is insufficient. On the other hand, if the amount of glutinous starch is increased, the more glutinous starch contributes to more improved mouthfeel and softness. However, once the amount of glutinous starch exceeds 70%, it will make no big difference in the effect by further adding it. Moreover, because glutinous starch is expensive compared with non-glutinous starch, it is economic to keep its amount under 70%.
The oil- or fat-processed starch which takes this starch as the starting material is obtained by adding 0.005%~10%, preferably 0.01%~1.0% of edible oil or fat or its analog to the starch, blending them fully to become a uniform mixture and then drying the mixture as necessary and heating it. Both fish oil which takes fish as the raw material and vegetable
/3
oil which is obtained from plants is good, and any edible oil or fat can be used.
It is necessary that the slurry viscosity should be 200 cp or higher when the concentration of the oil- or fat-processed starch is 40 wt%.
To achieve a slurry viscosity of 200 cp or higher when the concentration of the oil- or fat-processed starch is 40 wt%, it is desirable to provide a heating source as necessary for drying or, if drying is unnecessary, directly heat the mixture after a necessary quantity of oil or fat is added to starch and mixed uniformly. The heating method can be storing the starch in a warehouse above normal temperature or in a season of high temperatures like summer, it would be unnecessary to heat it. In short, any heating method is acceptable so long as the added oil or fat reacts with the starch to become a creamy mixture.
Moreover, it is desirable that the slurry viscosity is below 5000 cp, preferably below 3000 cp when the oil- or fat-processed starch used in the present invention has a concentration of 40 wt%.
If the oil- or fat-processed starch has a slurry viscosity below 200 cp at the concentration of 40 wt%, the batter will not be creamy and there will not be sufficient batter bonded to the core, so in subsequent processes, the bread powder will not attach firmly or the quantity of the attached bread powder is not enough, or after initial attachment, the bread powder comes off during subsequent operations such as packaging.
If said oil- or fat-processed starch is used to prepare batter of a proper viscosity, because it can be used at a high concentration compared with the conventional wheat flour to prepare a uniform creamy slurry with tiny air pores, the adhesion of bread powder is good and its binding with the core when being fried with oil is good. Moreover, there will be neither the parched mouthfeel nor the unpleasant feeling of inconsistency between the core and the coating.
Moreover, the oil- or fat-processed starch can be used alone as fried food coating material, and various powders, such as protein, starchy material, emulsifier, seasoning and spices can be added as necessary for use as the fried food coating material.
Next, the implementation examples and application examples of the present invention will be described.
Implementation example 1
10 g sunflower oil (0.2% against DS) was added to 6.62 kg corn starch with 32% moisture and 735 g waxy corn starch with 32% moisture (the mixing ratio of the corn starch to the waxy corn starch was 9:1). The mixture was agitated in a Kanto mixer for 30 minutes and spread out on an aluminum pat [sic! “pat” is likely a source typo for “pad”]. Then, it was dried in a drying machine until its moisture was reduced to 12.5%. Then, the mixture was put into a plastic bag so that water did not splash, and then it was further heated in the drying machine. The starch slurry viscosity of the trial product obtained in this way at the concentration of 40 wt%, measured with a Brookfield viscometer was 700 cp (this was the present invention product 1).
Next, corn starch only was used without using waxy corn starch to obtain oil- or fat-processed starch that was treated in the same way as stated above (this was the comparison product 1).
As a control, unmodified wheat flour (weak flour) was used to prepare a control product by adding water to achieve a viscosity of 700 cp measured with a Brookfield viscometer (this was the conventional product).
Implementation example 2
Mixtures of waxy corn starch and corn starch respectively at mixing ratios of 10:90, 25:75, 75:25, and 95:5 as well as waxy corn starch only were used for the same oil or fat treatment as in the implementation example 1 and then they were cured (being further heated after being dried to 12.5% moisture). They were prepared to have a slurry viscosity of 700 cp at 40 wt% measured with a Brookfield viscometer and they are the present invention products (these are respectively the present invention products 2~6).
Moreover, a mixture of the two starches at a mixing ratio of 1:99 was treated in the same way as above to obtain the comparison product 2.
Implementation example 3
A mixture of waxy corn starch and corn starch at a mixing ratio of 25:75 received the same oil or fat treatment as in implementation example
/4
1. Cured the mixture by heating to various degrees so the starch slurry viscosity at the concentration of 40 wt% was respectively 300 cp, 700 cp and 1000 cp, measured with a Brookfield viscometer, thereby obtaining 3 present invention products (these were respectively the present invention products 7~9).
Moreover, a mixture whose starch slurry viscosity at 40 wt% measured with a Brookfield viscometer was 150 cp was prepared in the same way as stated above (this was the comparison product 3).
Implementation example 4
A mixed starch slurry at the concentration of 40 wt% (mixture of 25 portions of waxy corn starch and 75 portions of corn starch) was heated to 40C and its pH value was adjusted to 9.0 with sodium hydroxide. Then, sodium hypochlorite was added to 0.2% against DS for reaction for 30 minutes. After reaction, it was neutralized with hydrochloric acid. Then, it was desalted with sodium bisulfite and then dehydrated to obtain oil- or fat-processed starch in the same way as in implementation example 1. The slurry viscosity of the obtained starch at the concentration of 40 wt% was 700 cp (this was the present invention product 10).
Application example 1
3 kinds of fried food coating materials obtained in the implementation example 1 were used to prepare pork cutlet. A towel was used to lightly pat off water from the pork. Then, the pork was put into slurries of the 3 kinds of fried food coating materials, respectively. After the slurry was sufficiently coated, lightly drained the batter. Then, coated the pork cutlet with bread powder and put into frying oil which had been heated to 160~170C in advance to cook the pork cutlet. When the cooked pork cutlets were compared, the pork and the coating which used the present invention product 1 and the comparison product 1 as fried food coating materials bonded to each other firmly and the coating would not come off the pork even if they were cut with a knife. In comparison, when the conventional product of wheat flour was used as the coating material, the coating was separated from the pork, the whole thing appeared swelling and, when it was cut with a knife, the coating came off the pork completely to significantly undermine its appearance. It proves that either corn starch only or a starch mixture obtained by blending corn starch and waxy corn starch can be used for oil or fat treatment and then be further heated to increase the slurry viscosity, thus becoming excellent processed starch for use as batter to coat meat in which the meat and the coating will not be separated from each other.
However, the coating which uses the comparison product 1 gives a parched mouthfeel while the coating which uses the present invention product 1 delivers improved and desirable mouthfeel.
中国語 から 英語: Effect of Coptis Cchinensis and Evodia Rutaecarpa Aqueous Extract on Precancerous Lesion of Colon in Rats General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
翻訳 - 英語 [Abstract]
Objective: To investigate the effect of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa on the DMH-induced precancerous lesions of colon and on the proliferation and apoptosis of colonic epithelium in rats. Methods: The rat colon cancer model was prepared using DMH. The proliferative and apoptotic changes in colonal crypts obtained by fine separation were detected by the morphological method, and the number of aberrant crypt foci (ACF) developed in the middle and descending colon were measured by feulgen staining and optical microscopy. Results: Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa could significantly inhibit the formation of ACF in the model animals. The proliferative crypts in the middle and descending colon were significantly increased in the model animals while Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa could significantly inhibit the crypts in the middle and descending colon. In the model animals, the apoptosis of crypts significant increased in the descending colon but was not significantly different in the middle colon compared to normal apoptosis while Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa could significantly promote the apoptosis of crypts in the middle and descending colon. Conclusion: Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa can significantly inhibit the formation of ACF in precancerous lesions of colon cancer, suggesting that they may have inhibitory and clinical therapeutic effect on colon cancer, in part by inhibiting cell proliferation and promoting apoptosis.
[Key words] Coptis chinensis; Evodia rutaecarpa; colon cancer; dimethylhydrazine; precancerous lesion; rat
Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa have a long history of being used in combination. Prescriptions prepared with different ratios of these two drugs will form different compounds with different effects. Modern pharmacological studies have demonstrated that Coptis chinensis extract can have the effect of inhibiting the formation of colon precancerous lesion [1]. Many monomer components of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa have shown inhibitor effects on the proliferation and growth of colon cancer cell lines [2-5], but they are less effective against cancers than single drug extract according to some reports [1]. Evodia rutaecarpa pill made from Coptis chinensis-Evodia rutaecarpa (1:1) is intended for diarrhea and watery stools and is mainly used for treatment of inflammatory diseases in modern clinical practice. The effect of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa on precancerous lesion of colon remains unknown at present. This study is designed to investigate the effect of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa compounded at a ratio of 1:1 on DMH-induced precancerous lesion of colon in rats, and to preliminarily study their effects on proliferation and apoptosis of colon crypts.
1 Materials and Methods
1.1 Reagents and Instruments
DMH, methylene blue (Sigma); Basic fuchsin (Sinopharm Chemical Reagent Co., Ltd). Electronic balance of Sartorius (Germany); Metrohm 744 pH meter (Switzerland); Leica optical microscope (Switzerland); Olympus phase-contrast inversion microscope and Olympus anatomical microscope (Japan).
1.2 Preparation of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa aqueous extract
Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa were purchased from Shanghai Huayu Chinese Herbs Co., Ltd with Coptis chinensis Franch from Sichuan and Evodia rutaecarpa var. officinalis Huang from Guizhou, which were identified by Dr. Lihong Wu from the Institute of Materia Medica, Shanghai University of Traditional Chinese Medicine. Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa was made into an aqueous extract by decocting, concentrating and freeze-drying.
1.3 Animals and Groups
Clean-grade male Wistar rats weighing 125~150 g were provided by the Experimental Animal Center of Shanghai University of Traditional Chinese Medicine, with the certificate number of SCXK (Hu) 2003-0003. The animals were fed with drug from 9:00-11:30 in the morning. Animals were divided into a normal group, a model group, a Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa 1:1group, a high-dose group, a medium-dose group and a low-dose group. The animals in high-, medium- and low-dose groups were given drugs at the doses of 0.9, 0.3, and 0.1 g∙kg-1 respectively.
1.4 ACF model preparation
Male Wistar rats were raised for 1 week after purchase and were subcutaneously injected with DMH into the neck back at 30 mg∙kg-1 on day 1 of weeks 2 and 3 to prepare the aberrant crypt foci (ACF) model. The animals were given drugs for 6 weeks from day 1 of week 4 of raising. The whole experiment cycle lasted 9 weeks. Each group included 10 animals. DMH was dissolved in 25 mmol∙L-1 EDTA + 137 mmol∙L-1 NaCl solution with a mass concentration of 3 g∙L-1 and a pH of 6.4.
1.5 Crypt proliferation and apoptosis study
Male Wistar rats were subcutaneously injected with DMH into the neck back at 30 mg∙kg-1 after 1 week of feeding with drug, followed by a 2nd dose of DMH after 1 week. The animals were sacrificed at 24 and 48 hours after
_____________________________________________________________________
[Manuscript number] 20090717002
[Foundation Project] Open Project Fund of Shanghai Key Laboratory of Complex Prescription (09DZ2270900); Shanghai Natural Science Foundation Project (09ZR1431800); Shanghai Education Commission High-level Project Construction Foundation Project (2008GSP19)
[Corresponding author] * WU Dazheng, Tel: (021) 51322498, Fax: (021) 51322498, E-mail: [email protected]
/2
the 2nd injection of DMH to observe the effects of the drug on the proliferation and apoptosis of crypts.
1.6 Detection of frequency and spatial distribution of apoptotic cells
and mitotic cells in intact crypts obtained by fine separation
The methods for drug intervention and model preparation were the same as those in the crypt proliferation and apoptosis study. At 24 and 48 hours after the 2nd injection of DMH, animals were anesthetized by intraperitoneal injection of 25% urethane (0.05 mL∙kg-1), and the colon was removed by laparotomy and washed with Krebs-Ringer solution. The whole length of colon from the ascending colon to the end of the descending colon, was measured. At 55% and 90% of the colon, a segment of colon of 1 cm long was taken and specified as middle colon and descending colon samples, all specimens being 0.5 cm in thickness and stained with Fuelgen [6]. The muscular layer was removed, and the crypt was separated using a fine needle, and then the number of apoptotic nuclei and mitotic nuclei in each crypt were calculated under the optical microscope ( 400). 10~20 crypts were randomly selected from each animal for detection. Each crypt was divided into 10 equal portions from the bottom to the opening to calculate the number of apoptotic nuclei and mitotic nuclei in each equal portion.
1.7 Aberrant crypt foci (ACF) measurement
Under anesthesia, laparotomy was performed on the animals to remove the whole colon which was washed with Krebs-Ringer solution to measure the total length of the colon following the same steps as described in 1.6. The whole colon was cut open along the longitudinal axis with mucosa surface upward and fixed with 10% neutral formalin, followed by 0.2% methyl blue staining. The number of ACFs was observed under the optical microscope ( 40) [7]. The crypts were recorded for each ACF in each colon (some ACFs contained multiple crypts).
1.8 Statistical analysis
The experimental data were presented as +s. One-way ANOVA test was used. P < 0.05 was considered statistically significant.
2 Results
2.1 The effect of Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa aqueous extract
on DMH-induced colon epithelial proliferation
At 24 h and 48 h after feeding, the proliferative index of middle colon crypts was 1.6 and 2.05 times higher in the DMH group animals than that in the normal animals, and it was 68.2% and 57.6% lower in the combination drug group than in the DMH group animals; the proliferative index of descending colon crypts was 3 and 1.72 times higher in the DMH group animals than in the normal animals, and it was 68.9% and 48.6% lower in the combination drug group than in the DMH group animals, respectively (Table 1). Further analysis of the spatial distribution of crypt proliferative nuclei of the middle and distal colon showed that the proliferative nuclei increased significantly in the middle and distal colon at 24 hours after DMH treatment and were mainly distributed in subareas 1~6 from the opening to the bottom of the crypt and the increase of proliferative nuclei was most concentrated in subareas 2~3. After treatment with combined Coptis chinensis and Evodia rutaecarpa, the crypt proliferation induced by DMH stimulation was significantly reduced.
中国語 から 英語: Special Hot Melt Adhesive for Polypropylene Random Copolymer Composite Pipes and Preparation Method Thereof General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: 化学、化学工学
原書のテキスト - 中国語 无规共聚聚丙烯复合管专用热熔胶及其制备方法
技术领域
本发明属于粘结剂制备领域，特别涉及一种无规共聚聚丙烯(polypropylene random copolymer,简称PP-R)复合管专用热溶胶及其制备方法。
背景技术
无规共聚聚丙烯复合管是指近年来比较流行的PP-R/金属/PP-R管复合管，如PP-R铝塑复合管、PP-R钢塑复合管和PP-R铜塑复合管等，目前比较常见的是前两种。由于作为无极性的无规共聚聚丙烯与表面极性的金属粘结强度差，往往使用一种较特殊的粘结剂将其粘结起来。故PP-R复合管实际是五层结构的复合管材，即PP-R—热熔胶一金属一热熔胶一PP-R。这种新型的化学建材具有优异的机械性能、耐腐蚀性能、卫生安全性能、隔热保温性能、减阻性能、易安装性能及50年的长使用寿命等优点，因而可克服单一的金属管和塑料管的许多缺点，成为镀锌管、铜管、塑料管的革新换代产品，自20世纪80年代问世以来发展十分迅速。国内近几年也出现了不少PP-R复合管用热熔胶的产品，但由于原料品质和生产技术的问题，市面上的产品一直是良莠不齐，其中不乏热熔胶易脱粘的性能问题。目前能较好解决这些的问题的热熔胶一般靠进口，但是其供货周期长，价格高昂。
发明内容
本发明的目的在于克服现有技术的不足，提供一种无规共聚聚丙烯复合管专用热熔胶。
本发明的另一目的在于提供一种无规共聚聚丙烯复合管专用热熔胶的制备方法。
本发明的目的通过下述技术方案实现:一种无规共聚聚丙烯复合管专用热熔胶，由下述重量份的原料制成：功能聚合物5〜70份、聚丙烯10〜70份、弹性体2〜50份、增粘剂5〜20份、抗氧剂0.1〜1.2份、成核剂0.1〜1份。
翻訳 - 英語 Special Hot Melt Adhesive for Polypropylene Random Copolymer
Composite Pipes and Preparation Method Thereof
Technical Field
The present invention belongs to the field of binder preparation, and particularly to a special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer (PP-R) composite pipes and a preparation method thereof.
Background Art
A polypropylene random copolymer composite pipe refers to a PP-R/metal/PP-R composite pipe which is popular in recent years, such as a PP-R aluminum-plastic composite pipe, a PP-R steel-plastic composite pipe and a PP-R copper-plastic composite pipe, etc., and currently the first two are more common. Since the binding between a non-polar polypropylene random copolymer and a metal with a polar surface is weak, they are often bonded with a special binder. Therefore, the PP-R composite pipe is actually a composite pipe of a five-layer structure, that is, PP-R-hot melt adhesive-metal-hot melt adhesive-PP-R. This new type of chemical building material has excellent mechanical properties, corrosion resistance, hygiene and safety performance, thermal insulation performance, resistance reduction performance, easy installation performance and long service life of 50 years, and thus, it can overcome many shortcomings of a single metal pipe and a plastic pipe to become an innovative product to replace a galvanized pipe, a copper pipe or a plastic pipe. It has developed rapidly since its introduction in the 1980s. In recent years, there have been many products of hot melt adhesives for PP-R composite pipes. However, due to the problems of raw material quality and production technology, the quality of adhesive products on the market has always been inconsistent, and the hot melt adhesives have the problem of easy debonding. Hot melt adhesives that can better solve these problems are generally imported, but their supply cycle is long, and the price is high.
Summary of the Invention
An objective of the present invention is to overcome the deficiencies of the prior art and to provide a special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes.
Another objective of the present invention is to provide a preparation method of the special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes.
The objectives of the present invention are achieved by the following technical solution: a special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes, which is prepared from the following raw materials in parts by weight: 5-70 parts of a functional polymer, 10-70
/5
parts of polypropylene, 2-50 parts of an elastomer, 5-20 parts of a tackifier, 0.1-1.2 parts of an antioxidant, and 0.1-1 part of a nucleating agent.
A preferred functional polymer of the present invention is a maleic anhydride combined polymer, that is, a maleic anhydride grafted polymer. The maleic anhydride grafted polymer is prepared by grafting maleic anhydride onto one or two polymers containing a propylene structure, and the main chain of the polymer contains 60% or more of the [-CH2-CH(CH3)-] structure. This is to maintain a similar structure to the polypropylene random copolymer material, thereby promoting compatibility between the two. The polymer containing a propylene structure includes a polypropylene homopolymer, a polypropylene random copolymer, a propylene-ethylene copolymer or the like. The polypropylene is a polypropylene copolymer having a melt index of 0.1-50 at 230C and a load of 2160 g.
The elastomer includes: one or more of an ethylene-propylene copolymer, an ethylene-butene copolymer, an ethylene-hexene copolymer, an ethylene-octene copolymer, an ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer, an ethylene-allyl acetate copolymer, a propylene-butene copolymer, a propylene-octene copolymer, an ethylene-propylene-diene polyolefin copolymer or the like.
The tackifier includes one or a mixture of two of a rosin resin, a terpene resin, a pinene resin or a polyisobutylene.
The antioxidant is selected from one or a mixture of two of a highly effective hydrolysis-resistant hindered phenolic antioxidant or a phosphite antioxidant. The hindered phenolic antioxidant includes pentaerythritol tetrakis[β-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], octadecyl β-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate, 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene or the like. The phosphite antioxidant includes tris(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl) phosphite, bis(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl) pentaerythritol diphosphite, tetrakis(2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl-4,4'-biphenyl) bisphosphate or the like.
The nucleating agent is a β-nucleating agent, and the β-nucleating agent is an aromatic amine compound, which can promote the conversion of PP from the α crystal form to the β crystal form, thereby achieving the purpose of strengthening and toughening it.
A preparation method of the special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes includes the following steps: firstly uniformly mixing 5-70 parts by weight of a functional polymer, 10-70 parts by weight of polypropylene, 2-50 parts by weight of an elastomer and 5-20 parts by weight of a tackifier in a mixer, then adding 0.1-1.2 parts by weight of an antioxidant and 0.1-1 part by weight of a nucleating agent, stirring to mix them uniformly, adding the mixture into an extruder, performing extrusion and granulation, and drying to obtain the special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes.
The present invention takes note of the fact that moisture has a great influence on the performance of the product, and thus a hydrolysis-resistant antioxidant is particularly selected, which is very favorable for processing and long-term use of the product. At the same time, the present invention selects a β-nucleating agent to adjust the product structure to further enhance the performance of the product.
/6
Compared with the prior art, the present invention has the following outstanding advantages and beneficial effects:
(1) The special hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes of the present invention has the characteristics of a low melting point, good fluidity and good bonding property and can be used as a bonding layer between a polypropylene (PP) substrate and other polar materials or metals such as aluminum and steel.
(2) The hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes of the present invention has a simple preparation process, a low cost and stable comprehensive performance.
(3) The hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes of the present invention has good processability and is suitable for use with various composite pipe manufacturing equipment at home and abroad.
Specific Embodiments
The present invention will be further described below with reference to embodiments, but the implementations of the present invention are not limited to these embodiments.
Embodiments 1-5
The materials were firstly prepared according to the formulation ratio in Table 1, the functional polymer (maleic anhydride grafted polymer containing 60% or more of the [-CH2-CH(CH3)-] structure), the polypropylene, the elastomer and the tackifier (four resins) were uniformly mixed in a mixer, the antioxidant and the nucleating agent were added, and stirring was given to disperse them uniformly so that the antioxidant and the nucleating agent were uniformly adhered to the surface of the resin. Then, the mixture was fed at a rate of 80 r/min into a twin-screw extruder, extruded at a rate of 200 r/min, cooled, granulated and dried to prepare the special hot melt adhesive for PP-R composite pipes. The peeling strength test results of the prepared hot melt adhesive for polypropylene random copolymer composite pipes are shown in Table 1.
日本語 から 英語: MANUFACTURING METHOD OF A NONWOVEN FABRIC General field: 法/特許 Detailed field: エレクトロニクス/電子工学
翻訳 - 英語 1. Title of the invention
Manufacturing method of a nonwoven fabric
2. Claims
A manufacturing method of a nonwoven fabric, characterized in that, in a fiber assembly containing 20% by weight or more of thermal-bonded fibers, (1) pre-bonding is performed for bonding between fibers by heating to a temperature higher than the melting point of the thermal-bonded fibers, and then (2) convex parts are regularly arranged on the sides of a rhombus or hexagon (hereinafter, the rhombus or hexagon is referred to as the external pattern), and further convex parts are arranged on the inside of the external pattern, and the sum of the areas of these convex parts is 20~50% of the total area so that a basic pattern is formed, which is continued to become an embossing roll, which is used for processing into embosses to partially reinforce bonding between fibers.
3. Detailed description of the invention
The present invention relates to a manufacturing method of a nonwoven fabric. More particularly, the present invention relates to a manufacturing method of a nonwoven fabric in which heat bonding of heat-bondable fibers is carried out using an embossing roll having a specific pattern to make the nonwoven fabric.
In recent years, the demand for nonwoven fabrics has grown rapidly, and particularly in disposable nonwoven fabrics, the growth in the field of thin or low weight fabrics is remarkable. In general, nonwoven fabrics belonging to the low weight category often have a fabric weight of 10~50 g/m2, and more preferably 15~25 g/m2, and the fabrics of this category are required to be strong, not fluffy and soft to touch.
In a conventional nonwoven fabric bonded by binder adhesion, which has been widely used, when the amount of the binder used is increased according to the demand requirement for improvement in strength, the good feel will be lost. Furthermore, in applications such as disposable diaper surface materials, there is a significant restriction on the types of binders that can be used according to regulations on the amount of residual formalin under the law, and hydrophobic synthetic fibers such as polypropylene and polyester appear to be the mainstream nonwoven fabric materials, and it has become increasingly difficult both technically and economically for the binder way of bonding to maintain both the strength and the feel to touch.
From such a background, the manufacturing method of a nonwoven
/2
fabric by the so-called no-binder system, in which thermal-bonded fibers are used and the nonwoven fabric constituting fibers are fixed by heat bonding of the fibers, is receiving attention.
However, even when a thermal-bonded fiber is used, to achieve both nonwoven fabric strength and good feel is a problem. Especially in the dry card method, it is difficult to avoid the directionality of the web constituent fibers, and the strength in the lateral direction is not enough, and when the ratio of the thermal-bonded fiber added is increased to maintain a strong lateral strength and the thermal treatment condition is severe, the resulting product feels stiff and has a poor feel. The inventor of the present invention diligently studied the manufacturing methods of nonwoven fabrics without fluffs that have both a strong nonwoven fabric strength and a soft feel, and, as a result, achieved the present invention.
The present invention is a manufacturing method of a nonwoven fabric, characterized in that, in the fiber assembly containing 20% or more of thermal-bonded fibers, (1) pre-bonding is performed for bonding between fibers by heating to a temperature higher than the melting point of the heat-bondable fibers (hereinafter the step of performing pre-bonding is referred to as preparatory step and the nonwoven fabric obtained from the pre-bonding is referred to the first nonwoven fabric), and then (2) convex parts are regularly arranged on the sides of a rhombus or hexagon (hereafter this rhombus or hexagon is referred to as the external pattern), and further convex parts are arranged on the inside of the external pattern (hereinafter the polygon obtained by connecting the centers of the convex parts arranged on the inside are referred to as the internal pattern), and the sum of the areas of these convex parts is 20~50% of the total areas so that a basic pattern is formed, which is continued to become an embossing roll, which is used for emboss processing to partially reinforce bonding between fibers.
Thermal-bonded fibers used in the present invention can be thermoplastic fibers having a relatively low melting point such as polypropylene fibers, polyethylene fibers, low melting point polyester fibers (sometimes referred to as single-component thermal-bonded fibers hereafter), and further it can also be a heat-bondable fiber that combines components having different melting points (sometimes referred to as a composite thermal-bonded fiber hereinafter). The reason for setting the amount of the thermal-bonded fibers used to 20% by weight or more is because it will be difficult to obtain enough nonwoven fabric strength if the amount is less than 20% by weight, and furthermore, the surface of the nonwoven fabric may become fluffy, which is undesirable.
The thermal-bonded fibers can be used in by mixing with other fibers. The amount of other fibers used for this is 80% by weight or less, and these other fibers can be natural fibers such as cotton, wool and hemp, semi-synthetic fibers such as rayon and acetate, and synthetic fibers such as polyester, polypropylene and nylon, or glass fibers, metal fibers, etc. The only restriction on these other fibers is that they should have a melting point higher than the melting point of the thermal-bonded fiber used for the purpose of heat bonding, preferably at least 20°C higher than the melting point.
The fiber assembly containing 20% by weight or more of thermal-bonded fibers may be dry webs obtained by a conventional card or random weber or wet sheets obtained by various known paper machines, using heat bonded fibers or a mixture of heat bonded fibers and other fibers.
The pre-bonding performed on the above fiber assembly can be performed by any method such as a hot air drier, suction drum drier, Yankee drier or heat calendar, but from the viewpoint of energy saving and productivity, preferably a heat calendar is used for the dry method and a Yankee dryer is used for the wet method. It is important for the pre-bonding to be carried out in this preparatory step to maintain the good feel of the obtained nonwoven fabric, and as a rule, the strength of the 1st nonwoven fabric [sic! The word “fabric” is added by a correction] is preferably in the range of 70~80% of the final strength required of the nonwoven fabric.
The effects of the crimping by means of the convex parts of the embossing roll on the strength, feel, fluffiness, etc., of the nonwoven fabric varies subtly depending on the pattern of the array of the convex parts (hereinafter simply referred to as pattern), and the emboss processing often leads to a deterioration in the strength and feel of the nonwoven fabric. The present inventor examined various patterns with square and hexagon as the basic pattern, from the viewpoint that uniformly continuing a single pattern in both the longitudinal and lateral directions of the nonwoven fabric will be easy to deliver most uniform properties.
中国語 から 英語: EDIBLE SPICE PLANTS OF XISHUANGBANNA ETHNIC GROUPS General field: 医療 Detailed field: 食品&乳製品
翻訳 - 英語 2. Stalks (barks):
There are 4 kinds, including cinnamon, wild cinnamon, Piper sp, and fragrant bamboo.
(1) Pepper plant
Scientific name Piper sp
It belongs to the family Piperaceae and is a climbing vine, growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbannn and other places, it often grows in an evergreen broad-leaved forest in the mountains, attached to the trunk of a tree or a rock. The whole plant has a spicy taste and aroma. The vines or roots are often taken to make cooking ingredients or for use as flavoring seasoning for meat and cold dishes. It has a special aroma and is spicy and palatable, but its flavor is different from that of Sichuan peppercorn and is uniquely refreshing.
(2) Cinnamon
Scientific name Cinnamomum cassia Presl.
It belongs to the family Lauraceae and is an evergreen tree that is cultivated and grown in Xishuangbanna. Cinnamon is used as a traditional Chinese medicine, and it can also be extracted for an essential oil or be used as seasoning spice for foods. According to our analysis, cinnamon yielded 1.13~2.16% of oil and contained cinnamic aldehyde (t-cinnamic aldehyde, 87-92%) [2, 3]. People often take cinnamon barks to make seasoning spice for meat. C. bejolghota, wild cinnamon of the same genus, is also used as an alternative seasoning of cinnamon.
In addition, the Dai people use the young and tender bamboo joints (stems) of Cephalostachyum pergracile to cook with glutinous rice, which has a special refreshing aroma and flavor.
3. Leaves (stems and leaves):
There are 22 kinds, including Piper sarmentosum (Piper sarmentosum Roxb.), Houttuynia cordata, fragrant Polygonum, Acacia leaf, sour lemon, grapefruit, lemon, toon, fragrant wood, celery, coriander, spiny coriander, swamp leaf, Elsholtzia communis, water mint, mint, basil, fragrant ginger, green onion, lemon grass, wild lemongrass, lemongrass, etc.
(1) Fragrant Polygonum, also known as Polygonum herb, Fei (in Dai dialect).
Scientific name Polygonum caespitosum BI.
It belongs to the family Polygonum and is a perennial herb that grows in the wild or is cultivated. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows by a river or stream or in a vegetable garden or field. The stems and leaves have an aroma similar to that of spiny coriander, and the whole plant can be used as a medicine or to extract an essential oil. According to our analysis, fresh stems and leaves gave 0.062~0.14% of oil with the main components of lauryl aldehyde (28%) and decanal (19%). People often take young tender stems and leaves as spice seasoning for beef, mutton, rabbit meat, etc., especially game meats, and it has a pleasant aroma and can be used as a flavoring ingredient to make food tasty.
Piper sarmentosum leaves are often cooked with potherb and can be used for flavoring seasoning or as a cooking ingredient; the stems and roots of Houttuynia cordata have a special aroma and can be used for as a cooking ingredient.
(2) Acacia leaf, also known as Acacia vine, Pa La (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Acacia intsia (L.) Willd.
It belongs to the family Mimosa and is a woody vine shrub growing in the wild or cultivated. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows along the forest edges in moderate to low mountains or in sparse forests. The tender stems and leaves have a special aroma. It is often cooked by itself or fried with chicken eggs, duck eggs, etc., and it is a famous dish that has a special flavor.
Fresh leaves and fruit peels of Rutaceae pomelo (Citrus grandis), lime (C. auran-tifolia) [sic! The “auran-tifolia” is likely a source typo for “aurantifolia”], lemon (C. limon [sic! “limon” is likely a source typo for “lemon”]), etc., have a lemon aroma, and people often make them into spice seasonings for beef and mutton broth. Tender young leaves (buds) of Toona sinensis are used as seasoning or as an ingredient for pickles or grounded raw meat dishes.
(3) Spiny coriander, also known as big coriander, Pa Bo Meng Man (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Eryngium foetidum Linn.
It belongs to the family Umbelliferae and is a perennial herb growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows on the forest edges of low to moderate mountains, riverside grassland or under shrubs. The whole plant is used and has a distinct aroma similar to coriander (Coriandrum sativum) [3]. According to our analysis, fresh leaves gave about 0.1% of essential oil with the main components of
/3
2-decenal (69%) and 2-tetrade-cenal (12%). People often take fresh leaves and mash them with green peppers and add salt, soy sauce, vinegar, etc., to make seasonings, or use them to add flavors to meat and cold dishes, etc., and it is one of the main spice seasoning ingredients in the Dai cuisine.
(4) Swamp leaf, also known as Gratiola, Da Ye Shi Long Wei in Chinese
Scientific name Limnophila rugosa (Roth.) Merr.
It belongs to the family Scrophulariaceae and is a perennial herb growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows in a swamp in moderate mountains, in a valley or riverside wet grassy land. The whole plant has a strong anise-like aroma and can be used as a medicine or be extracted for an essential oil. Our analysis shows that fresh stems and leaves had an oil yield of 0.2~0.43%, and dry ones had an oil yield of 1.79~2.25%, and the main aroma components were t-anethole (76%), estragole (22%), etc. [4, 5]. People often take fresh stems or air dry the stems and ground into a powder for seasoning meat, pickles, etc., as an alternative to anise (Illicium verum); its distillate can be used as a sweetener.
(5) Elsholtzia communis, also known as vanilla
Scientific name Elsholtzia communis (Coll. et Hemsl.) [sic! “Coll. et” is likely a source typo for “Collett”.]
It belongs to the family Lamiaceae and is annual herbaceous plant for multi-line cultivation. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows in mountainous areas or semi-mountainous areas at an altitude of about 1000 meters, usually in a dry stream bed. Its stems, leaves, and inflorescences have a citral aroma and can be used as a medicine and be extracted for an essential oil. Out analysis shows that fresh stems and leaves yielded 0.3~0.8% of oil, dry ones yielded 1.47~1.73% of oil, and the main fragrance component was citral (92-96%) [6]. People often take fresh stems or dried inflorescences and shred or chop them for use as flavoring seasoning for meat and cold dishes.
In addition, water mint (Elsholtzia kachinensis), mint (Mentha haplocalyx), etc., which are also in this genus, are used as seasonings or meat flavoring spices; basil (Ocimum basilcum) stems and leaves are also used as a seasoning ingredient or a cooking spice for sour bamboo shoots.
(6) Fragrant ginger, also known as Amomum with coriander aroma
Scientific name Amomum coriandriodorum S. Q. Tong
It belongs to the ginger family and is a perennial herb growing in the wild or cultivated. Produced in southern Fujian and other places, it often grows under the trees in moderate mountain forest or in a valley or a wet place of the stream. The leaves have the aroma of spiny coriander. Our analysis shows that fresh leaves yielded 0.32% of essential oil and the main aroma components were 2-dodecenal (18%), 4-te-tradecenal (6%), etc. Folks often use fresh leaves or air dry them for use, and to use the leaves, slice or smash them for use as flavoring seasoning for meat, cold dishes, tomato soup, etc.
(7) Lemongrass, also known as maplegrass, Se Hai (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Cymbopogon citratus (DC.) Stapf
It belongs to the family Gramineae and is a perennial herb that is cultivated. It is grown in hot and humid areas such as Xishuangbanna. The stems and leaves have a citral aroma and can be extracted for an essential oil. Our analysis shows that fresh stems and leaves gave 0.5% of oil and the main fragrance components were citral (76%), myrcene, etc. [7]. Folks often take fresh leaves for use as a seasoning spice for meat, especially for beef and mutton broth, or as a seasoning for grilled fish, which is one of the famous dishes in Dai cuisine and has a special flavor.
The leaves of C. totilis and C. nardus in this genus are also used as spice seasoning for meat.
4. Flowers:
There are 4 kinds, including Yunnan Gmelina, rose, Colocasia esculenta, and Colocasia tonoim.
(1) Yunnan Gmelina, also known as rice bowl tree, Mai Suo (Lao Ke Shao in Dai dialect).
Scientific name Gmelina arborea Roxb.
It belongs to the family Verbenaceae and is a semi-deciduous tree growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows on low hills or in moderate mountain jungle or sparse forest. It flowers from February to March. The flower has an aroma and is used as a yellow food coloring. The Dai calendar new year is a major festivity of the Dai people, and every household will make rich varieties of foods for their New Year. Glutinous rice cake (New Year cake) made with dried Gmelina flower ground with glutinous rice is an indispensable delicacy in their New Year menu and is an auspiciousness and complimentary gift to give to their guests or to hosts which they visit. The thin glutinous rice cake is dried and then baked on fire until crispy before eating, and it is a delicious and aromatic food with a distinct Dai flavor.
Rose (Rosa rugosa) flowers are soaked with brown sugar, which is then used to make flavoring seasoning for buns and pastry [3]; the flowers of Colocasia esculenta and Colocasia tonoim have special aromas, and dried flowers are fried and crushed for use as flavoring spices for noodles, soy flour soup, winter melon soup.
/4
5. Fruits (seeds):
There are 12 kinds, including mountain anise, star anise, mountain pepper, fragrant Litsea, Piper paepuloides Roxb, pepper, peppercorn, thorny peppercorn, wild peppercorn, prickly ash with a fragrant fruit, fennel, and Tsao-ko.
(1) Mountain anise, also known as aniseed fragrant Magnoliaceae, fragrant seed white Magnoliaceae, Mai Han (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Michelia hedyosperma Low.
It belongs to the family Magnoliaceae and is an evergreen tree growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows in a low hill valley, rain forest or monsoon forest in moderate mountains. Fruits are harvested when ripen and are dried, and the seeds are taken out for use. The seeds have a very strong aroma and can be used as a medicine [8] or be extracted for an essential oil. Our analysis shows that dry seed gave 11-12% of oil with the main components of safrole (92%), Ocimene, etc. Folks often make the seed into a seasoning spice for wild game, meat, cured meat, sausage, and wind-dried soybean meal. It is also a precious gift for friends and guests to show reverence and respect. The ethnic people living in the borders prefer mountain anise to another star anise (Illicium verum) and Tsao-ko (Amomum Tsao-ko). To use it, put the dried seeds into charcoal fire ash for a moment and take them out when smoke comes out, and crush the seeds for use as a seasoning for meat dishes to give a uniquely refreshing flavor.
Editor's Note: safrole should not be consumed as food.
(2) Mountain pepper, also known as mountain Litsea, Litsea euosma, Se Hai Teng (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Litsea cubeba (Lam.) Pers.
It belongs to the family Lauraceae and is a small evergreen tree growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows in low to moderate mountain sparse forests and shrubs. Its leaves, flowers, and fruits have an aroma, the fruits can be used as a medicine, the seeds can be extracted for a fixed oil and essential oil; fresh fruits can give 2.5~5.5% of oil with a main component of citral (74%) [3, 7]. Folks often take its fresh young fruits and crush them and mix with salt, soy sauce, pepper, etc., to make a seasoning condiment for eating, which is a good appetizer and has a refreshing flavor. In addition, the fruit of Litsea euosma has a citral aroma, and the fresh young fruit is also used as a seasoning.
(3) Prickly ash with a fragrant fruit, Ma Qian (in Dai dialect)
Scientific name Zanthoxylum utilis Huang
It belongs to the family Rutaceae and is an evergreen tree growing in the wild. Produced in Xishuangbanna and other places, it often grows in moderate to low mountain sparse forests, and the fruit has a special aroma and can be extracted for an essential oil. Our analysis shows dried fruits gave 9~11% of essential oil with the main components of abietene (31%), α-phellandrene (25%), p-cymene (23%), etc. Its aroma and components are different from those of peppercorns [3, 7]. Folks often take dried fruits and crush them for use as seasoning spice for beef, mutton, fish, and game meat, and may also use it in marinade, especially for meat, which can repel flies and has an antiseptic effect. It is a customary spice for the Dai people who prefer it even over peppercorn.
The above are the 15 ethnic edible spice plants mainly introduced in this paper, and they account for 30% of all the total, and other spice plants are not described herein.
II. Evaluation of uses
1. Xishuangbanna is located on the northern edge of the tropics. It has a mild climate, abundant rainfall, complex terrains and abundant plant species. Different geographical conditions have been formed at different altitudes, and different plants grow at different altitudes. It is home to more than 300 kinds of species in spice plants only, including 50 species of ethnic edible spices, most of which are native plants, with locality and adaptability to different climates, so it is conducive to developing the economy of the poor, old and ethnic group areas on the border by adapting to their local conditions.
2. Ethnic edible spice plants have a long history of use and have not been found to have toxic side effects. They play an important role in the material and life of the local people, forming a unique culture of plant uses that is a unique member of the national family of China. The use of spice plants by these ethnic people provides a scientific basis for further development and utilization of wild plant spice resources.
3. These ethnic edible spice plants have their own aromas. In the citral category, the mountain pepper, fragrant Litsea, lemongrass, etc., can be further developed, and the Yunnan specialty Elsholtzia communis can also be developed vigorously as the citral content (92~96%) in its essential oil is much higher than that of other spice plants, and lemon ginger also has the value to be developed. In the t-anethole category, star anise and fennel are traditionally cultivated edible spice plants, and the essential oil of wild Limnophila rugosa growing in Xishuangbanna and other places contains 76% of t-anethole, which is equivalent to those of the preceding two, and it can be grown in a swamp, by a ditch or creek, or in a damp area in the forest, and new use can be developed or it can be used as a sweetener. The spiny coriander contains undecenal, dodecenal, tetradecenal, dodecanal, etc., and its aroma is very unique. In Xishuangbanna, the wild spiny coriander resources can be fully used, and
/5
lemon Zingiber, fragrant Polygonum, etc., can be planted in the forest ravines and by the creeks in the mountainous areas at an altitude of 1,500 meters or lower. The prickly ash with a fragrant fruit is obviously different from peppercorn and is a special seasoning spice, and it can be planted in the semi-mountainous area of the region (about 1000 meters above sea level), and new uses of it can be developed. The seeds of mountain anise with a safrole aroma can be used as a medicine, and as only some ethnic people such as those in Xishuangbanna use it in foods, it can be developed for its high-quality lumber.
4. Turmeric, Caesalpinia sappan, Buddleia officinalis, etc., are folk food colorings and have aromas. Since the side effects of synthetic food colorings are being discovered continuously, the development of new natural food colorings is the main approach to replacing synthetic colorings. The flower and the fruit juice of Yunnan Gmelina can be used as a new yellow food coloring.
5. In the wild edible spice plants, such as fennel Amomum, fragrant Polygonum, lemon ginger, pepper plant, mountain anise, prickly ash with a fragrant fruit, fragrant bamboo, etc., the resources are limited, their number is sharply reduced and many species are facing danger, so they must be protected, and cultivating from the wild species is the main way to preserve the species.
6. The useful parts of the ethnic edible spice plants can also be processed into powders as direct seasoning spices for meat products, and more importantly, extracting for essential oils or extracts from the used parts, and separating the fragrances can be some new uses. Therefore, domestication and development of these plants are important ways to fully and rationally use the ethnic edible spice plants.
翻訳 - 英語 Claims
1. A dried crab flavor flaked product which is made by adding crab extract and seasoning to fish flesh and then kneading it thoroughly, making into a plate and heating it, putting coloring on the surfaces, making cuts of about 0.1 mm~3 mm into the front and back surfaces, and cutting into certain sizes and then drying them until water content is in a range of 2~20%.
Detailed Description of the Invention
The present invention is intended to provide a dried crab flavor flaked fish product.
Today, salmon is becoming more expensive as its catch decreases year by year. In view of the current situation, the present invention uses fish flesh to make an inexpensive crab flavor product, and an example of the production of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
1 is a kneading machine, into which fish flesh, mainly white flesh of sardine and seasonings such as crab extract and glycine are added, and then they are kneaded thoroughly. 2 is a delivery pump which quantitatively sends the kneaded material from the kneading machine 1 through a hose 3 and then out of the end hose 4.
5, 5' are molding rollers, which are rotated in the direction of arrows I, R so that the kneaded material is molded into a plate-like belt 6 having a certain thickness and is extruded onto a heating conveyor means 7. The heating conveyor means 7 is provided with a pair of upper and lower wire mesh conveyors 7a and 7b which oppose each other and rotate respectively in the directions shown by the arrows to move the plate-like belt 6 in the direction of the arrow H, during which time, the belt is baked between the two conveyors by the heating means 8a, 8b of gas burners installed inside each of the two conveyors. The heating temperature is preferably about 180C.
9a and 9b are pressing rollers, which are disposed such that the baked plate-like belt 6 is molded into a certain thickness (approximately 1 mm~5 mm), and then the surfaces of the plate-like belt 6 are colored by the coloring means 10 with a red color, and the plate-like belt 6 is delivered by the rotation of the conveyor 11 in the direction of arrow N. 12 is a coloring roller whose surface is made of a sponge or the like, and an edible red color is attached to the surface during turning of the roller.
13 is a dryer, and the colored plate-like belt is dried to have a moisture content of about 20~30% while it continuously travels through the dryer.
14 is a cutting roller, and as shown in Fig. 2, on the surfaces of the rollers 14a and 14b that are vertically aligned with each other, cutting teeth Pa and Pb that are gently inclined relative to the length direction are provided in such a way that the inclining cutting teeth Pa and Pb are in directions that are different vertically. In this way, the rollers turn in the directions shown by arrows H, K, cutting lines of about 0.1 mm~3 mm deep are made on the front and back surfaces of the plate-like belt coming from the dryer 13. At this time, the cutting lines are formed to have a mesh-like pattern, but they do not cut through the plate as their directions are different on the front and back surfaces. (See Fig. 3)
15 is a longitudinal cutting machine which cuts lengthwise the above continuous plate-like belt into a desired lateral width, that is, a width of about 10 mm~50 mm. Then, they are fed into a lateral cutting machine 16, and the lateral cutting machine cuts them into a width of about 2 mm~10 mm, and then, the cut pieces are placed into a mesh basket 17 which
/2
is placed into the dryer 18 to dry until the water content is in the range of 2%~20%, preferably 5%~15%.
Fig. 3 shows a flaked product 19 manufactured in the way described in the above, wherein, the surfaces are colored with a red coloring a, and the front and back surfaces are cut with lines b resembling the texture of crab.
The dried product of the present invention can be eaten as is and is a delicious delicacy, and since it can be put in boiling water for 1~3 minutes to return to a state that looks like crab flesh, it is also suitable for use in ramen as an instant food, or as a soup base ingredient for absorbent materials, etc. In addition, it can be returned to its original state and added to a vegetable salad, or used as vinegar ingredient, and it can be easily used for various other dishes, and it is inexpensive.
日本語 から 英語: PRODUCTION METHOD OF FOOD MATERIAL General field: 技術/工学 Detailed field: 食品&乳製品
翻訳 - 英語
1. A method for producing a fibrous protein food material, characterized in that a protein-containing substance is kneaded with water, and the mixture is heated and oriented while in an elastic state by applying shear stress and then defibrated with a roller.
Detailed description of the invention
The present invention relates to a novel production method suitable for obtaining a fibrous protein, and more specifically, a protein-containing substance is kneaded with water, and the mixture is heated and oriented while in an elastic state by applying shear stress, and then it is defibrated with a roller so that it is fibrous.
An objective of the present invention is to provide a food material having a fibrous structure and a desirable mouthfeel similar to those of meat, poultry, seafood, and processed products thereof. Another objective of the present invention is to provide a simple and economical method for producing such a food material.
In the food industry, providing meat substitutes from unused edible protein resources is a big topic. The tissue of meat is considered to have a mesh structure in which protein fibers congregate, various methods have been proposed to develop products with similar structures from unused protein resources, and various products have been offered. Above all, it is becoming clear that the mouthfeel of meat liked by human beings is provided by fibers, and development is being made in this direction.
The most successful of such a technique is the wet spinning method as disclosed in US patent No. 2730447 by R. A. Boyer. In this method, a protein alkaline solution is introduced into an acidic coagulation bath and is discharged from a spinneret to form fibers. However, the industrial implementation of this method has a number of drawbacks, such as requiring a large investment, specialized equipment, many operating steps, a large amount of chemicals, etc. The method disclosed in the Japanese patent publication No. S50-25535 is a method in which a raw protein material slurry is heated by passing through a heat exchanger and then discharged through an orifice to recover the protein fiber. This method is substantially a wet method and is not desirable from the viewpoint of resource saving. On the other hand, according to the Japanese patent publication No. S44-6203, a method of obtaining an expanded product by passing defatted soybean flour and the like through a heating and pressurized extruder is provided. Although this method is simple, the resulting product is porous and has a different mouthfeel and appearance from meat.
As a result of repeated and intensive studies to develop a protein food material that is simpler and is closer to meat, the present inventors achieved the objective of the present invention by kneading a protein-containing material with water, heating and orienting the mixture while in an elastic state by applying shear stress, and then defibrating it with a roll to make it fibrous. According to the method of the present invention, an inexpensive fibrous protein food material similar to meat, poultry, and seafood can be produced, and by selecting appropriate raw material compositions, water content, additives, and processing conditions, various fibrous protein food materials similar to red meat,
/2
poultry and seafood can be obtained. The method of the present invention is simpler and cheaper than the existing method of producing a fibrous protein through a spinneret and shows a mouthfeel and appearance closer to meat than the method of expanding through an extruder. In the method of the present invention, a protein-containing substance is kneaded with water and subjected to shear stress in a heated, elastic state to become oriented (aligning the protein in the flow direction) to form a sheet or a rod, and this sheet or rod is made to pass through while being in contact with the surface of the roller (the surface of the roller is engraved with a lot of file teeth like a sheet cutter. Or it has brush-like needles) so that it is stretched and defibrated to obtain a fibrous substance. The protein-containing substance used in the present invention refers to a separated protein or a mixture of protein and non-protein.
The origin of the protein in the protein-containing protein substance is not limited, and any protein such as plant protein, animal protein, or microbial protein can be used. Vegetable proteins including oil seeds (defatted products of soybean, peanuts, nuts, rapeseed, sesame seeds, etc. and proteins or concentrates separated therefrom), cereal proteins (wheat gluten, corn gluten, rice protein, etc.), and animal proteins including meat, poultry, seafood, egg protein, milk protein, animal organs, etc., and microbial proteins including yeast protein, fungal protein, etc., can be used. Furthermore, a mixture of 2 or more of the above-mentioned proteins can be used. Of these raw materials, especially oil seeds and cereal proteins especially soybean protein and/or wheat gluten are most effective for use as the main ingredients. If so, the mixing ratio by weight of soybean protein and wheat gluten is most preferably in the range of from 8:2 to 2:8 in terms of defibration and this mixing ratio will provide a good protein food material. The protein content of the protein-containing substance is preferably at least 40 wt%, and the tensile strength of the product obtained increases as the protein content increases. In addition, proteins that are not modified in properties are preferred, and for oilseed protein, yeast, and microbial proteins, proteins that are free are preferred over those that are present in cells.
The raw material protein-containing substance may have a high protein content like isolated proteins, but it may contain up to 60 wt [sic! Source missing “%”] of other non-protein substances, and, for actively external fillers, carbohydrates such as cereals and starches, and gums such as Arabic kum [sic! “kum” is likely a source typo for “gum”] and carrageenan can be used. Furthermore, it goes without saying that seasonings, spices, coloring, fats and oils and the like can be added. In order to change the pH and thus the properties of the product, water-soluble acids and bases e.g. pH adjusters such as hydrochloric acid, phosphoric acid lactic acid, citric acid, caustic soda and ammonium hydroxide can be added. The pH can be varied in the range of about 3.0~12, preferably 4~9. In order to improve the fluidity of the protein-containing substance, organic and inorganic reductants such as cysteine and sodium sulfite, and plasticizers such as glycerin can be added.
The amount of water used for kneading the protein-containing substance, water and, if necessary, additives, can be varied in a wide range, and its optimum amount may not be the same depending on the raw materials used. Generally, it is about 20 wt% to 65 wt%, more preferably 30 wt% to 65 wt%, based on the total of all dry ingredients. The protein-containing substance is sufficiently kneaded with water and, if necessary, additives, to obtain a uniform mixture which is subjected to the following processing. In order to obtain a uniform mixture, the mixture may be preheated during kneading.
Then, while transporting the mixture obtained as described above, shear stress is applied when the mixture in the heated elastic state to orientate it, and the optimum heating temperature during this time varies depending on the kind of the raw material protein-containing substance and the mixing ratio of water and additives, but it is generally 80C to 250C, more preferably 100C to 200C. The pressure used at this time should be just higher than the pressure required to move the mixture that is in an elastic due to heating and does not need to be especially high. The upper limit correlates with the heating temperature, but usually the product processed at a pressure of 500 psi or below, more preferably 100 psi to 350 psi is suitable for defibration. After the mixture is processed as described above, the pressure is released to obtain a sheet or rod-like material, and at this time, it is important to control the pressure and / or temperature so that the product is not substantially expanded (20% or less, preferably 10% or less) in order to obtain good quality defibrated fibers.
There is no limitation on the type of the apparatus for applying shear stress while the mixture is in the heated elastic state while being transported, and, for example, a commercially available apparatus such as a roll or an extruder can be used. Specifically, an extruder equipped with a heating device, a screw, a driving device, a nozzle, and a material
/3
inlet is suitable.
Subsequently, the oriented sheet-like material or rod-like material obtained is defibrated in a softened state, that is, subdivided into thinner fibers, which is performed by a defibrating roller. For the defibration roller, a roll with a lot of file teeth on the surface such as a sheet cutter or brush-like needles can be used, and it is usually set in the vicinity of the discharge port of the sheet-like or rod-like product, at a right angle to the discharge direction. This roll can be used being cooled or heated, depending on the physical properties of the discharged sheet-like or rod-like product. Further, the speed of the defibrating roller is set to rotate slightly faster than the discharge speed of the sheet-like or rod-like product. Desired defibrated fibers
can be obtained by controlling the roll pressure by adjusting the roll clearance according to the shape and thickness of the discharged product and the stretching degree of the product.
As evident from the above description, the present invention provides a method for producing a protein food material resembling meat with a protein-containing substance by a simpler method. Therefore, it will greatly contribute to the food industry.
Next, the present invention will be described specifically by using examples.
中国語 から 英語: RESEARCH PROGRESS IN FLAVOR PEPTIDES IN FOODS AND CORRESPONDING TASTE MECHANISMS General field: 科学 Detailed field: 林業/木材
翻訳 - 英語 1 Roles of Flavor Peptides in Foods
1.1 Characteristic taste peptides
Flavor peptides play an important role in producing the characteristic tastes for fermented, pickled and smoked products because these products produce numerous small peptides during processing, giving foods with a special flavor. Dipeptides such as carnosine (β-alanyl histidine, carnosine), anserine (β-alanyl-1-methylhistidine, anserine) and balenine (β-alanyl-3-methylhistidine, balenine) are generally found in fishes [21], crustaceans, molluskcs , livestock and poultry [22], and as they contain amino and carboxyl groups, they have a strong buffering capacity near neutral pH which is closely related to the strength of taste, so that they give foods subtle and intricate flavors, i.e., the flavor-enhancing effect. Carnosine not only can give a rich and mellow taste to foods by buffering the physiological pH value [23] but can also chelate metal ions, especially copper ions, so it can inhibit and scavenge free radicals to inhibit lipid oxidation [24] and prevent the formation of myoglobin, thereby preventing the formation of rancid odor and the change in color of meats so as to improve the quality and flavor of meat products. A lot of carnosines are produced by beef and pork during the process of ripening and cooking, and they not only play some role in the meat ripening but also produce a characteristic taste, such as umami [25-26]. The process of protein degradation into peptide is a rate-limiting step of ham flavor formation [27], and the formation of characteristic flavor of cured ham is closely related to peptide components, especially carnosine which has a strong buffering effect on ham taste, and some Glu-containing small peptides are related to the umami taste of ham [28]. Glutathione can improve the flavor and quality of foods, adding glutathione to meat and seafood foods not only can greatly extend their shelf-life but also strengthen their desirable taste, and moreover, glutathione in L-glutamic acid nucleic acid system can give flavors, or when coexisting with its mixture, it can give a strong meaty flavor [29].
1.2 Flavor precursor peptides
As an important precursor for flavor formation, peptides can have a series of reactions such as Maillard reaction with flavor precursors such as reducing sugars, amino acids, fatty acids and thiamine, to produce a characteristic aroma. The Maillard reaction, in which peptides participate, not only can produce characteristic aromas but can also form more abundant volatile aromatic substances than those produced by the Maillard reaction in which other precursors participate [8, 30]. van Lancker et al. [31] simulated a Maillard reaction of dipeptides with -NH2 of lysine as the N-terminus with glucose, methylglyoxal and glyoxal, which produced a nutlike or roasted aroma that was identified as an aromatic mixture containing pyrazines, and such dipeptide reaction produced more pyrazines and a stronger aroma than the Maillard reaction in which free amino acids participated. Kim et al. [32] simulated the Maillard reaction system of 2 mol/L glucose mixed with 2 mol/L glycine, diglycine and triglycine, and the results showed that the largest amount of products with glucose disappearing most quickly were seen in the Maillard reaction containing diglycine, followed by the reaction containing triglycine.
Peptides are also precursors necessary for the formation of some characteristic aromas, and such Maillard reaction in which peptides must participate is known as the peptide-specific Maillard reaction. Chu et al. [33] and Roscic et al. [34] had investigated the Maillard reaction in which glycine participated using the isotope labeling method, and the results showed that the semi-heterocyclic compounds imidazolidin-4-one and 3-ethyl-2,5-dimethylimidazolidin-4-one could be only produced in a simulation system containing peptide substances. Oh et al. [35] found that 2(1H)-pyrazinones were present in the reaction products only in the presence of Gly-Leu and Leu-Gly in the peptide-specific Maillard reaction, that is, 2(1H)-pyrazinones were the specific products of Maillard reaction.
2 Flavoring Mechanisms
2.1 Taste physiology
There are 4 types of taste cells in mammalian animals, including dark cells (Type I), light cells (Type II), intermediate cells (Type III) and basal cells (Type IV) [36]. Different types of taste cells have different functions, and Type I cells can specifically bind to exogenous adenosine triphosphate hydrolase (ecto-ATPase) and exogenous nucleoside triphosphate hydrolase (NTPDase2) and can also transport glutamate (GLAST); Type II cells mainly express GPCR (G protein coupled receptor), PLCβ2 (phospholipase C beta 2), IP3R3 (inositol 1,4,5-trisphosphate receptor type 3) and TRPM5 (transient receptor potential channel M5); Type III cells express synaptosome-associated protein 25 (synaptosome-associated protein of 25 kD, SNAP-25) and neural cell adhesion molecule; Type IV cells are round proliferating stem cells that are differentiated into various other taste cells [37]. The intensity and duration of the taste produced by stimulation of corresponding taste receptor with the flavor substance are related to the solubility, the degree of stimulation and the proportion of taste receptors, and stronger
/3
stimulation and more receptors will generate more obvious taste [38]. The receptors and stimulators corresponding to the 5 basic tastes are shown in Table 1 [39].
2.2 5 basic tastes of the flavor peptides
2.2.1 Sweetness
At present, the studies on sweet peptides are relatively mature, and for example, dipeptide derivatives such as aspartame (L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanylmethyl ester) and alitame (L-aspartyl-D-alaninamide) have been added as a functional sweetener to various foods due to their high sweetness and low calorie [48]. Researchers in various countries are actively exploring the development of new oligopeptide sweeteners, such as sweet lysine dipeptides (N-Ac-Phe-Lys, N-Ac-Gly-Lys), Monellin, Thaumatin, Pentadin, Curculin, Miraculin, Mabinlin and Brazzien [50-52], from natural resources such as fruits and vegetables [49].
The sweet receptors belong to the first family members of the taste receptors (T1R) [53]. The study by Assadi-Porter et al [54] showed that sweet peptides and low molecular weight sugars could produce sweetness because they have the same taste receptors T1R2 and T1R3. Sweet peptides have the same sweetness-producing mechanism as other sweet substances, which is also consistent with the AH/B sweetness theory of Shallenberger, in which, it is believed that, in the molecular structure of peptide, there are a hydrogen-bonding group -AH, such as -NH2, and an electronegative group -B, such as -COOH, with a distance of approximately 0.25~0.4 nm between the two groups, and in order to match the corresponding part of receptor, there must be a hydrophobic amino acid between the two groups and the stereochemical requirements must be met. In the human sweet receptor GPCRs, there is also a structural unit similar to AH/B, with a distance of approximately 0.3 nm between the two groups such that when the AH/B structural unit of the sweet peptide is bound to the structural unit of AH/B of the sweet receptors through hydrogen bonds, it will stimulate the taste nerves to produce sweetness [43, 55]. Studies have also shown that production of sweetness by sweet peptides is related to their charge and the hydrophobicity of the groups, and most sweet peptides are positively charged when they have a neutral pH value and their positively charged residues may be the specific target molecules of some sweet receptors. The sweet peptides have rich side chain residues on their surface, such as lysine and arginine residues, which are important for production of the sweet taste, and the reduction in positively charged residues will reduce sweetness [51]. The study by Xue WF et al. [52] on the relationship between the surface charge and sweetness of sweeteners such as Monellin indicated that the sweetness was enhanced when the negative charge was reduced on the sweet protein surface, and vice versa; in addition the hydrophobic group on the sweet protein surface masked the binding site of the sweet protein to the receptor, thereby weakening the sweetness of the sweet protein. Studies have shown that the dipeptide derivatives must be sweet and the amino acids constituting the dipeptide must has an L form with its ω-COOH and α-NH2 being free radicals, and that the sweetness of dipeptide derivatives decrease with the increase in their molecular mass [39].
中国語 から 英語: Modified SiO2 Microspheres Reinforced the Mechanical and Thermostability Performances of Dental Resin-based Composite * General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 歯科学
翻訳 - 英語 1 Introduction
Dental resins are aesthetically appealing, durable, and easy and convenient to use for repair, so they are popular among patients and doctors and have been widely used clinically [1]. Dental resins exhibit inferior mechanical properties to traditional filler materials, such as silver-mercury alloy, glass-ionomer cement, etc.
Currently a common approach to this problem is adding a filler to change the mechanical properties. Du et al. [2] found that adding modified SiO2 improved the mechanical properties of dental resins. Atai et al. [3] also found that improved mechanical properties were obtained after using sintered SiO2 as filler, and such an improvement was correlated with the surface state of the sintered silica. Samuel et al. [4] compared the effects of porous structures on the mechanical properties and found that microspheres of a microporous structure displayed better mechanical properties. Wang et al. [4] employed the compounded filling method to increase the surface roughness and obtained good mechanical performance by adding a mixture of diatomite and SiO2 into resin. Apparently, the surface state of the filler is a key factor affecting dental composites.
However, surface state change alone fails to explain why change in filler content affects the mechanical properties in the same surface state. In view of this, well-dispersed nano SiO2 microspheres were prepared using ethyl silicate as the silicon source, ammonia as the catalyst and ethanol as the solvent with the sol-gel method [6-8] and were modified with γ-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane. Subsequently, bisphenol A glycerolate dimethacrylate, and triethylene glycol dimethacrylate were selected as dental composite resins, and camphorquinone and ethyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate were used as photoinitiator; finally, SiO2 microspheres of different silica contents were added to the dental resin in the presence of a photoinitiator to analyze the reasons for the changes using SEM and DMA curves.
2 Experiment
2.1 Materials and Instruments
Ethyl silicate: AR, Shanghai Chemical Reagent Purchase and Supply Wulian Chemical Factory; ammonia: AR (25%~28%), Shanghai Suyi Chemical Reagents Co., Ltd.; ethanol: AR, Shanghai Suyi Chemical Reagents Co., Ltd.; deionized water: made in-house; γ-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (KH-570): AR, Sinopharm Chemical Reagent Co., Ltd.; bisphenol A glycerolate dimethacrylate: AR, Sigama-Aldrich; triethylene glycol dimethacrylate: AR, Chengdu Aike Reagent Co., Ltd.; camphorquinone: AR, J&K Scientific; ethyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate: AR, J&K Scientific.
Scanning electron microscope JSM-6480 (JEOL, Ltd., a Japanese company), transmission electron microscope Tecnai 12 (Philips, a Dutch company), Malvern laser particle size analyzer Hydro2000Mu (Malvern Instruments Ltd., a British company), universal testing machine CMT4304 (MTS Systems (China) Co., Ltd.), dynamic mechanical analyzer DMA242C (NETZSCH, a German company), LED curing lamp LED.C (Guilin Woodpecker Medical Instruments Co., Ltd.).
2.2 Experiment Methods
2.2.1 Preparation and Modification of SiO2 Microspheres
(A) ammonia and ethanol were added into a beaker and were mixed evenly at room temperature under magnetic stirring; (B) ethyl silicate, deionized water and ethanol were added into a beaker and were mixed evenly at room temperature under magnetic stirring. Subsequently, the mixture of (A) was added into a 250 mL three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, a reflux condenser and a thermometer, and the mixture of (B) was added dropwise into the three-neck flask where the reaction mixture was allowed to react for 6 h under stirring. The reaction product was centrifuged and washed several times with ethanol and deionized water and was dried at 60ºC for 6 h under a vacuum, thereby obtaining a white SiO2 powder. A certain amount of dried SiO2 was taken, to which were added 2% KH-570 (relative to the mass of SiO2) and a suitable amount of ethanol. The mixture was stirred for 1 h at room temperature under magnetic stirring and the reaction product was centrifuged and washed several times and was dried at 60ºC for 24 h in a vacuum drying oven.
原書のテキスト - 英語 1. An airway device for human or animal use, the device comprising an airway tube having a distal end and a proximal end, the distal end of the airway tube is provided with a pre-formed and non-inflatable peri-pharyngeal bowl, the peri-pharyngeal bowl comprising a posterior bowl portion having a back dorsal portion and a side wall extending around and depending from the periphery of the back dorsal portion to define an internal space, the peri-pharyngeal bowl further comprising a resiliently deformable flange extending laterally from the side wall of the back dorsal portion which defines an extended internal space, the resiliently deformable flange having inner and outer surfaces that extend to a circumferential edge.
12. An airway device as claimed in claim 11 wherein the resiliently deformable flange forms a seal with the peri-larynx in the hypopharynx of the human or animal patient by enveloping the glottis within the peri-pharyngeal bowl when in situ in a human or animal patient.
13. An airway device as claimed in claim 11 or claim 12 wherein the resiliently deformable flange forms a seal with the peri-larynx in the hypopharynx of the human or animal patient by enveloping body of the larynx in general within the peri-pharyngeal bowl when in situ in a human or animal patient.
14. An airway device as claimed in any of claims 10 to 13 wherein the resiliently deformable flange forms a seal within and against the mucosa of the pharyngeal and hypo-pharyngeal walls of the human or animal patient when in situ in a human or animal patient.
翻訳 - 英語 Clinical diagnosis: Crohn's disease (suspected)
Examination item: Application Form for Painless Colonoscopy (Staidson) (Simethicone)
Examination findings: Patient is not allowed to drive within 24 hours after the examination and must be accompanied by an adult when going out. Attend a visit to Emergency Department of our hospital immediately when developing shortness of breath, nausea and vomiting. Patient's identity, and the name and method of surgical procedure were checked as correct.
The colonoscope was successfully inserted to terminal ileum; the intestinal preparation was poor with a large amount of fecal water, affecting observation of some intestinal parts. Colonoscopic findings are as follows:
[Terminal ileum]: No abnormality in mucosa.
[Ileocecal part]: Multiple granular hyperplasia seen at ileocecal valve, with congestion and erosion at its surface; biopsy to be performed.
[Ascending colon]: Mucosa slightly congested and glossy, with dendritic vascular texture of mucosa that can be clearly seen.
[Transverse colon]: Mucosa scattered with congestion, biopsy to be performed.
[Descending colon]: Mucosa slightly congested, with dendritic vascular texture of mucosa that can be clearly seen.
[Sigmoid colon]: Mucosa slightly congested.
[Rectum]: Mucosal congestion and edema.
Examination conclusions: nodular hyperplasia of ileocecal valve and inflammation of the whole colon, with nature to be determined by pathology.
英語 から 中国語: Health Information Technology and Clinical Research General field: 医療 Detailed field: 医療: 製薬
原書のテキスト - 英語 The MCB was prepared in the following freezing medium: 45% EX-CELL 302 (modified), 12% MCB-conditioned media and 48% dimethylsulfoxide. The cells were aliquoted into 128 cryovials within a Class 100 hood in the cell banking suite. The cryovials were transferred to a controlled rate freezer and frozen using a controlled rate pre-programmed freezing method and then transferred to the cryofreezer. Once frozen, the vials are transferred to a monitored and alarmed cryofreezer in which they are kept in the vapor phase of liquid nitrogen.
Within 20 minutes preceding the anticipated skin incision, patients will receive intravenous AAA or placebo (0.9% normal saline) as IV bolus or 10 minute infusion, with a first dose of 1 g given within 20 minutes, and a second 1 g dose given at the end of surgery when closing the wound.
Test Article:
Identity: XXX - packaged in vials each containing 10 mL of solution containing AAA (free drug) in a concentration of 1 mg/mL
Description: White to light yellow opaque liquid
Batch/Lot No.: ABC 12435
Expiry Date: Jun 1, 2019
Purity: See following*
Stability: One year from date of manufacture
Storage Conditions: In the refrigerator (2 to 8°C)
Handling Precautions: Standard laboratory procedures
Manufacturer:
With premonitory symptoms of gastrointestinal bleeding (cage-tray evidence), Low Dose female 1221 was found in extremis on Jan 19, 1998 (Day 4) and was euthanized for humane reasons. The animal was among those previously dosed on Jan 7 and Jan 14, 1998 (Days 1 and 8) and would otherwise have received its third dose on Jan 21, 1998 (Day 15). A full necropsy was conducted on this dog (all tissues retained) and the principal, macroscopically-visible finding consisted of focal mucosal hemorrhages throughout the gastrointestinal tract. There was corresponding microscopic evidence of congestion and/or hemorrhage of the gastrointestinal tract and, although these changes were judged to be compound-related, numerous macroscopic findings in other organs indicated that the proximate causes of the animal’s deteriorated condition were jejunal intussusception and bacterial infection.
The Lessor: Shochiku Co, Ltd. (hereinafter referred to as "Party A") and the Lessee: Guidewire Software Japan K.K. (hereinafter referred to as "Party B") conclude a memorandum on the room for rent (hereinafter referred to as the "Room for rent") described in Section 2 of [Exhibit 1] Property List, which is part of Division C of the building specified in Item 1 of the Property List (hereinafter referred to as the "Building") that is owned by KS Building Capital Special Purpose Company (hereinafter referred to as "Party C") based on the "Master Lease Agreement with Termination Conditions and Property Management Agreement" concluded on March 25th, 2010 (including any subsequent renewals or modifications) between Party A and Party C and in connection with the "Building Lease Agreement" (hereinafter referred to as the "Original Agreement") concluded between Party A and Party B on March 26th, 2014.
Unless otherwise defined in this Memorandum and the context otherwise requires, all terms used in this Memorandum shall have the meaning set forth in the Original Agreement, and all the provisions of the Original Agreement shall apply except those expressly provided in the articles of this Memorandum.
英語 から 中国語: Jason’s script for video message to remaining markets General field: マーケティング Detailed field: ビジネス/商業(一般)
原書のテキスト - 英語 After nearly nine months of significant efforts by both the Cigna and Chubb teams, we are close to finalizing the transfer of six life, accident and supplemental benefits markets to Chubb having received all the required regulatory approvals. In fact, those markets will transfer today.
I would like to take this opportunity to say a big thank you to everyone involved. I know there has been considerable effort across all the impacted markets, and while still ensuring those businesses continue to grow and meet their financial commitments.
For those Cigna colleagues transitioning to Chubb, I would like to thank you for your hard work and contributions to Cigna over the years. I truly wish you all the very best in your next chapter with Chubb.
Whilst this marks a significant milestone for the business, this does not mark the end of the work. In fact in the next phase, our team will focus on the transition services agreement to ensure the continued smooth operations of the businesses post the legal transfer.
This, of course, also marks a new chapter for International Markets as we continue to increase our focus on growing our health and health services capabilities outside the US. I am really pleased with the strong performance of our Health business so far in 2022. We must continue to build on this success for the remainder of the year and ensure we are well positioned to continue this growth into 2023 as we continue to bring our health strategy to life.
Thank you for your continued hard work and commitment and I look forward to working closely with you as we continue on our health journey.
I am writing to express my interest in translation opportunities requiring precise Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and English language support, particularly in medical, patent, pharmaceutical, and technical subject areas. As an ATA- and STIBC-certified English-to-Chinese translator with 25+ years of translation, interpreting, and technical experience, I offer both advanced linguistic skill and strong subject-matter understanding.
Over the course of my career, I have translated more than 20 million words across medical and life sciences, patent and intellectual property, pharmaceutical regulatory, engineering, telecom, legal, automotive, energy, and manufacturing documentation. My work includes clinical trial materials, informed consent forms, adverse event reports, medical records, patent specifications, medical device documentation, technical standards, SOPs, user manuals, and contracts. This breadth of experience allows me to manage complex terminology, maintain consistency across large projects, and deliver translations that are accurate, readable, and aligned with client expectations.
My background in mechanical engineering has been especially valuable in patent and technical translation. I hold a Master of Engineering in Mechanical Engineering and previously worked as an in-house translator at Huawei Technologies and as a mechanical field engineer/translator for Bechtel China. These roles gave me practical exposure to technical documentation, engineering workflows, and cross-cultural communication in high-precision environments.
In addition to English-to-Chinese and Chinese-to-English assignments, I have substantial experience translating from Japanese and Korean into English. I am also proficient with CAT and technical tools including SDL Trados, Wordfast, MemoQ, and AutoCAD, and I regularly use research-based terminology management to support quality and consistency.
I would welcome the opportunity to support your team with reliable, detail-oriented translation services in specialized technical, medical, and patent fields. My resume includes reference links for patent and medical translation work for your review. Thank you for your time and consideration. I look forward to the opportunity to discuss how my background can meet your translation needs.
Sincerely, Jane Yu
キーワード： Japanese Patent translator, Korean Patent Translator, Chinese Patent Translator, Chinese medical record translator, Japanese medical record translator, Korean medical record translator, drug package insert & information for use, clinical trials and protocols, patient information and informed consent forms (ICF), New drug application (NDA) submission. See more.Japanese Patent translator, Korean Patent Translator, Chinese Patent Translator, Chinese medical record translator, Japanese medical record translator, Korean medical record translator, drug package insert & information for use, clinical trials and protocols, patient information and informed consent forms (ICF), New drug application (NDA) submission, case report forms, adverse event reports, regulatory documentation, medical records and reports, back translation, general healthcare documents, medical papers and articles, patient questionnaires, medical production manuals, medical device user manual & software localization, user manuals, patents (for information and for filing), operation and service manuals, technical papers, technical specification and standards, medical-questionnaires, patient education materials, Medical Board, Insurance Claim Form, Laboratory Report, Cardiac Catheterization Report, hospital discharge summaries, medical records of patients. See less.
入会時期 Nov '05
